Treatment of Services Under Section 482; Allocation of Income and Deductions From Intangible Property; Stewardship Expense, 38830-38876 [E9-18326]
Download as PDF
38830
Federal Register / Vol. 74, No. 148 / Tuesday, August 4, 2009 / Rules and Regulations
DEPARTMENT OF THE TREASURY
Internal Revenue Service
26 CFR Parts 1 and 31, and 602
[TD 9456]
RIN 1545–BI78, 1545–BI79, 1545–BI80
Treatment of Services Under Section
482; Allocation of Income and
Deductions From Intangible Property;
Stewardship Expense
AGENCY: Internal Revenue Service (IRS),
Treasury.
ACTION: Final regulations and removal of
temporary regulations.
mstockstill on DSKH9S0YB1PROD with RULES3
SUMMARY: This document contains final
regulations that provide guidance
regarding the treatment of controlled
services transactions under section 482
and the allocation of income from
intangible property, in particular with
respect to contributions by a controlled
party to the value of intangible property
owned by another controlled party. This
document also contains final regulations
that modify the regulations under
section 861 concerning stewardship
expenses to be consistent with the
changes made to the regulations under
section 482. These final regulations
potentially affect controlled taxpayers
within the meaning of section 482. They
provide updated guidance necessary to
reflect economic and legal
developments since the issuance of the
current guidance.
DATES: Effective Date: These regulations
are effective on July 31, 2009.
Applicability Dates: These regulations
apply to taxable years beginning after
July 31, 2009.
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION CONTACT:
Carol B. Tan or Gregory A. Spring, (202)
435–5265 for matters relating to section
482, or Richard L. Chewning (202) 622–
3850 for matters relating to stewardship
expenses (not toll-free numbers).
SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION:
Paperwork Reduction Act
The collection of information
contained in these final regulations has
been reviewed and approved by the
Office of Management and Budget in
accordance with the Paperwork
Reduction Act of 1995 (44 U.S.C.
3507(d)) under control number 1545–
2149. The collection of information in
these final regulations is in § 1.482–9.
This information is required to enable
the IRS to verify that a taxpayer is
reporting the correct amount of taxable
income. An agency may not conduct or
sponsor, and a person is not required to
respond to, a collection of information
VerDate Nov<24>2008
16:58 Aug 03, 2009
Jkt 217001
unless it displays a valid control
number.
Books and records relating to a
collection of information must be
retained as long as their contents might
become material in the administration
of any internal revenue law. Generally,
tax returns and tax return information
are confidential, as required by 26
U.S.C. 6103.
Background
Section 482 of the Internal Revenue
Code generally provides that the
Secretary may allocate gross income,
deductions, and credits between or
among two or more organizations, trades
or businesses owned or controlled by
the same interests in order to prevent
evasion of taxes or clearly to reflect
income of a controlled taxpayer.
Regulations under section 482
published in the Federal Register (33
FR 5849) on April 16, 1968, provided
guidance with respect to a wide range
of controlled transactions, including
transfers of tangible and intangible
property and the provision of services.
Revised and updated transfer pricing
regulations were published in the
Federal Register (59 FR 34971, 60 FR
65553, 61 FR 21955, and 68 FR 51171)
on July 8, 1994, December 20, 1995,
May 13, 1996, and August 26, 2003.
While comprehensive in other respects,
these regulations did not modify
substantively the rules dealing with
controlled services transactions. On
September 10, 2003, proposed
regulations relating to the treatment of
controlled services transactions and the
allocation of income from intangible
property, in particular with respect to
contributions by a controlled party to
the value of intangible property owned
by another controlled party (the 2003
proposed regulations), were published
in the Federal Register (68 FR 53448,
REG–146893–02 and REG–115037–00).
On August 4, 2006, temporary
regulations relating to the treatment of
controlled services transactions, the
allocation of income from intangible
property, and stewardship expenses (the
2006 temporary regulations) were
published in the Federal Register (71
FR 44466, TD 9278, REG–146893–02,
REG–115037–00, and REG–138603–03).
A notice of proposed rulemaking crossreferencing the temporary regulations
was published in the Federal Register
on the same day (71 FR 44247, REG–
146893–02, REG–115037–00, and REG–
138603–03). Written comments
responding to the notice of proposed
rulemaking were received, and a public
hearing was held on October 27, 2006.
The 2006 temporary regulations are
generally effective with respect to
PO 00000
Frm 00002
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
taxable years beginning after December
31, 2006, and Notice 2007–5, 2007–1
C.B. 269, published on January 16, 2007,
partially modified the effective date of
the 2006 temporary regulations as it
pertained to the identification of
controlled services transactions eligible
to be priced at cost. Accordingly, the
2006 temporary regulations related to
the new services cost method in
§ 1.482–9T(b) (described in Section A.1
in this preamble) apply to taxable years
after December 31, 2007, with the
exception of the business judgment rule
described in § 1.482–9T(b)(2), which
had the same effective date (taxable
years after December 31, 2006) as the
other provisions of the temporary
regulations.
By issuing the 2006 temporary
regulations in temporary and proposed
form, the Treasury Department and the
IRS provided taxpayers an opportunity
to submit additional comments prior to
the time these regulations became
effective. See § 601.601(d)(2)(ii)(b). After
consideration of all the comments, the
proposed regulations under section 482
are adopted as revised by this Treasury
decision, and the corresponding
temporary regulations are removed.
Explanation of Revisions and Summary
of Comments
Introduction
The Treasury Department and the IRS
received a number of comments on the
2006 temporary regulations from
taxpayers, their representatives, as well
as industry and professional groups.
Commentators generally approved of the
2006 temporary regulations and found
the changes from the 2003 proposed
regulations to be useful. Specifically,
commentators approved of the
replacement of the simplified cost-based
method with the services cost method
(SCM) and the inclusion of the shared
services arrangement provision in the
SCM rules. Commentators also generally
approved of changes made to the profit
split method. However, commentators
did express concerns with some aspects
of the 2006 temporary regulations.
While these final regulations reflect
some modifications in response to
comments received on the 2006
temporary regulations, both the format
and the substance of the final
regulations are generally consistent with
the 2006 temporary regulations. The
changes adopted are intended to make
certain clarifications and improvements
without fundamentally altering the
policies reflected in the 2006 temporary
regulations.
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
Federal Register / Vol. 74, No. 148 / Tuesday, August 4, 2009 / Rules and Regulations
Explanation of Provisions
A. Controlled Services
1. Services Cost Method—Treas. Reg.
§ 1.482–9(b)
mstockstill on DSKH9S0YB1PROD with RULES3
a. Applicability of the Services Cost
Method
Most comments focused on the SCM.
Several commentators requested
confirmation that application of the
SCM is a matter within the control of
the taxpayer, provided that the
underlying services otherwise qualify
for the SCM. Some commentators stated
that the 2006 temporary regulations
could be interpreted as requiring a
taxpayer to apply the SCM if all the
conditions for that method were
satisfied.
Notice 2007–5 confirmed that
taxpayers control whether the SCM
applies. The final regulations make this
clear. Section 1.482–9(b)(1) provides
that, if a taxpayer applies the SCM in
accordance with the rules of § 1.482–
9(b), which requires that a statement
evidencing the taxpayer’s intent to
apply the SCM be contained in the
taxpayer’s books and records, then the
SCM will be considered the best method
for purposes of § 1.482–1(c).
b. Specified Covered Services
Several commentators contended that
the proposed list of specified covered
services in Announcement 2006–50,
2006–2 C.B. 321, is too narrow. One
commentator listed tax planning and
public relations activities as examples of
activities not on the list that illustrated
the narrowness of the list. Some
commentators suggested that the list
should refer to departments, cost
centers, or accounting classifications,
rather than to specific activities or
groups of activities. One commentator
suggested that all activities in particular
departments should be identified as
eligible for the SCM. Commentators also
stated that a comprehensive analysis
would be required and that it would be
too burdensome to track employee time
for activities that are specified covered
services vs. non-specified covered
services. See § 601.601(d)(2)(ii)(b). The
Treasury Department and the IRS also
received suggestions to broaden the
general administrative provision and
add additional specific activities to the
list of specified covered services,
including warehousing and distribution,
quality control and quality assurance
relating to manufacturing and
construction, and environmental
remediation.
The SCM is intended to provide a
practical and administrable means of
identifying low-margin services that
VerDate Nov<24>2008
16:58 Aug 03, 2009
Jkt 217001
may be evaluated by reference to total
services cost without a markup. The list
of services eligible to be priced at cost
in the specified covered services portion
of the SCM was added specifically in
response to requests from commentators
that the former simplified cost-based
method be eliminated and replaced with
just such a list of eligible services. In
response to public comments, the
Treasury Department and the IRS
published Rev. Proc. 2007–13, 2007–1
C.B. 295, which added several
categories as well as activities within
existing categories. In particular, public
relations and tax planning services were
added to the list, and the individual
categories of specified covered services
were expanded to include ‘‘other similar
activities.’’
After careful consideration, the
Treasury Department and the IRS
believe that Rev. Proc. 2007–13 strikes
the appropriate balance between
broadening the list to include services
similar to the specific services described
and expanding the categories of
services. The Treasury Department and
the IRS do not believe that other
additional services suggested by
commentators were appropriate, but
will continue to consider other
recommendations for additional
services to be added to the list in the
future.
One commentator expressed concern
that a review of services to determine if
they qualify as specified covered
services may require a more extensive
analysis than under previous
regulations, including interviews of
individual employees or of small groups
of employees. Although the covered
services list is not applied on a
departmental basis, a reasonable
aggregation of similar services may be
appropriate for performing the specified
covered services analysis in some cases.
To determine if the services cost method
should apply to a particular service (or
group of services) performed by a group
of employees, the aggregation principle
of Treas. Reg. § 1.482–1(f)(2)(i)(A)
should be followed as appropriate. In
certain cases, aggregation may assure a
more accurate result, especially if it
recognizes synergies that an individual
employee analysis might ignore. An
aggregation of employee services may,
thus, efficiently evaluate the work of
employees engaged in a common
function, as well as recognize the added
value that their collaborative effort
might produce. Conversely, analysis on
an aggregate basis does not permit
characterization of an individual service
as a specified covered service if it, in
fact, is not a specified covered service.
PO 00000
Frm 00003
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
38831
c. Low Margin Covered Services
Commentators provided comments on
low margin covered services described
in § 1.482–9T(b)(4)(ii) of the 2006
temporary regulations. One
commentator believed that the 7 percent
limit is too high for the SCM. In the
commentator’s view, the limit should be
lower because the 7 percent figure will
cover activities that are risky. Most of
the commentators, however, believed
that the 7 percent limit is an appropriate
measure. The Treasury Department and
the IRS continue to believe that the 7
percent limit is appropriate in light of
its purpose. That is, it minimizes the
compliance burden on taxpayers and
the IRS for relatively low-margin
services.
Several commentators requested more
guidance on low margin covered
services. One commentator suggested
that the Treasury Department and the
IRS develop an analysis to determine if
certain services have a markup of 7
percent or less and publish the results.
For example, the IRS could develop a
set of comparables for various groups of
low margin services, such as human
resources, accounting and finance,
information services, and training. Some
commentators requested guidance on
when and how often a transfer pricing
study is needed to support a
determination that services are low
margin covered services. In this regard,
some commentators requested that the
regulations specify a period of years
(such as three years) for which a transfer
pricing study may be valid for purposes
of determining if a service is a low
margin covered service. In support of
this request, one commentator stated
that the regulations could provide, for
example, that the reliance period could
apply to taxpayers whose facts and
circumstances have not changed
materially from the time the service was
most recently established as a covered
service.
The Treasury Department and IRS did
not adopt this proposal. Because there
may be significant differences among
services across different businesses, a
standardized, IRS-developed
comparables set would not be feasible
and would conflict with the fact
intensive nature of an appropriately
robust transfer pricing analysis. For
similar reasons, the Treasury
Department and the IRS did not adopt
the proposal to specify the frequency or
timing of transfer pricing analyses to
support taxpayer positions. To do so
would be inconsistent with a proper
comparability analysis, including
consideration of the time at which
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
38832
Federal Register / Vol. 74, No. 148 / Tuesday, August 4, 2009 / Rules and Regulations
transactions were undertaken, as well as
other relevant economic circumstances.
One other commentator requested that
the midpoint should be used in
measuring a comparable markup on
total services costs for purposes of low
margin covered services. While it may
be true that, in some cases, the midpoint
could be used depending on the
statistical method used, the interquartile
range ordinarily provides an acceptable
measure of an arm’s length range. See
§ 1.482–1(e)(2)(iii)(B). Therefore, the
Treasury Department and the IRS
believe that the interquartile range of
the comparable median markup is an
appropriate measure.
mstockstill on DSKH9S0YB1PROD with RULES3
d. Excluded Activities
One commentator requested that
engineering be removed from the list of
services that are ineligible for the SCM
in § 1.482–9T(b)(3) of the 2006
temporary regulations. This comment
was not adopted, since, in the view of
the Treasury Department and the IRS,
intragroup engineering services
generally should be subject to a robust
transfer pricing analysis.
e. Business Judgment Rule
Several commentators expressed
concern over how the business
judgment rule would be administered.
Some commentators requested that
statements in the preamble about the
business judgment rule in the 2006
temporary regulations be incorporated
in final regulations. Other commentators
suggested that the business judgment
rule should be applied by reference to
one or more trades or business of the
controlled group rather than of the
renderer, recipient, or both. These
commentators claimed that the business
judgment rule may yield incorrect
results in some cases, for example,
where a headquarters services company
or other legal entity is established solely
to provide centralized support services.
The activities performed by such an
entity would potentially be ineligible for
the SCM under the business judgment
rule because they would constitute the
entity’s core capability.
The Treasury Department and the IRS
agree that the business judgment rule
should be determined on a controlled
group basis and expressed this view in
Notice 2007–5. The final regulations
clarify that the business judgment rule
is determined by reference to a trade or
business of the controlled group.
Section 3.04 of Notice 2007–5
clarified that the business judgment rule
‘‘is satisfied by a reasonable exercise of
the taxpayer’s business judgment, not a
reasonable exercise of the IRS’s
judgment in examining the taxpayer.’’
VerDate Nov<24>2008
16:58 Aug 03, 2009
Jkt 217001
The Treasury Department and the IRS
reiterate that the final regulations
incorporate a high threshold for
application of the business judgment
rule to exclude services otherwise
eligible for the SCM. Section 1.482–
9(b)(5) provides that the rule is based on
a taxpayer’s reasonable conclusion in its
business judgment that the rule is
satisfied. It has come to the attention of
the Treasury Department and the IRS
that the clarification in the notice of the
business judgment rule has been
misconstrued as creating a nonrebuttable presumption that a taxpayer’s
determination under the business
judgment rule is always correct. This
construction of the clarification was not
intended and is not supported by the
plain language of the business judgment
rule. The business judgment rule
requires a reasonable conclusion by the
taxpayer. Thus, the taxpayer’s business
judgment is only the starting point of
the analysis, and the taxpayer must
make a reasonable conclusion in that
regard. Whether the taxpayer’s
conclusion is reasonable may be subject
to examination by the IRS in the course
of an audit.
One commentator suggested that the
regulations adopt a ‘‘principal activity’’
test similar to the test described in the
Organisation for Economic Cooperation
and Development Transfer Pricing
Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises
and Tax Administrations (OECD
Guidelines) in place of the business
judgment rule. The Treasury
Department and the IRS decline to
adopt this suggestion. Another
commentator pointed out that the
examples illustrating the business
judgment rule more accurately describe
a high value service or intangible
property, rather than a covered service.
The Treasury Department and the IRS
agree that some of the examples in the
temporary regulations could be read as
describing transfers of intangible
property rather than provisions of
services involving the intangible
property. Some examples have been
edited to improve clarity, including to
ensure that they cannot be read as
describing transfers of intangible
property.
Commentators also raised questions
concerning how to evidence the
necessary business judgment; for
example, whether an executive’s
representation must be preferred to the
tax director’s. The business judgment
rule is applied on a case-by-case basis
and takes into account the taxpayer’s
facts and circumstances.
One other commentator requested that
the business judgment rule take into
account whether a particular activity,
PO 00000
Frm 00004
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
such as that of a corporate tax
department, contributes to the operating
profit (as defined in § 1.482–5(d)(3)) of
one or more controlled parties. Notice
2007–5 provided several clarifications
to the business judgment rule, including
a clarification that the business
judgment rule should take into account
whether a particular activity contributes
to the operating profit of one or more
controlled parties. After further
consideration, the Treasury Department
and the IRS decided not to add an
operating profit consideration to the
business judgment rule because the
operating profit concept is broader than
the intended rule and because it would
implicitly require taxpayers to do the
type of economic analysis (and create
the attendant administrative burden for
taxpayers) that the business judgment
rule is intended to eliminate.
The Treasury Department and the IRS
continue to believe, however, that the
conclusion in Notice 2007–5 is correct—
that activities such as back office tax
services should not fail the business
judgment rule because they may affect
net income by reducing domestic or
foreign income taxes. Depending on the
facts and circumstances, tax services
may or may not satisfy the business
judgment rule.
f. Reorganization of the SCM
Section 1.482–9T(b) of the 2006
temporary regulations contains several
requirements, all of which have to be
satisfied in order for the SCM to be
applicable. In other words, the
requirements under § 1.482–9T(b) are
conjunctive; failure to satisfy one of the
requirements renders a service ineligible
for SCM treatment regardless of whether
any of the other requirements is
satisfied. The Treasury Department and
the IRS are aware that the rules under
§ 1.482–9T(b) have been misinterpreted
as disjunctive such that satisfaction of
only one of the requirements renders a
service eligible for the SCM. This view
is unsupported by the plain language of
§ 1.482–9T(b). To improve clarity, the
requirements for the SCM are
reorganized in the final regulations.
Section § 1.482–9(b)(2) lists the
conditions necessary for a service to be
eligible for the SCM and provides a
cross-reference to the paragraph in
§ 1.482–9(b) that corresponds to each
condition. In summary, to be eligible for
the SCM, a service must be a covered
service, the service cannot be an
excluded activity, the service cannot be
precluded from constituting a covered
service by reason of the business
judgment rule, and adequate books and
records must be maintained with
respect to the service. The
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
Federal Register / Vol. 74, No. 148 / Tuesday, August 4, 2009 / Rules and Regulations
mstockstill on DSKH9S0YB1PROD with RULES3
reorganization does not substantively
change the SCM rules.
Modifications have also been made to
the list of excluded activities to
harmonize it with Rev. Proc. 2007–13.
In particular, instead of referring to
‘‘excluded transactions,’’ the regulations
now refer to ‘‘excluded activities.’’
g. Shared Services Arrangements
In general, commentators supported
the shared services arrangement (SSA)
provision in the 2006 temporary
regulations as a useful mechanism for
allocation of costs from shared or
centralized services. Commentators
called into question, however, the
restriction of SSAs to covered services
priced under the SCM. In response,
Notice 2007–5 provided that a SSA may
be used for controlled services
transactions outside of the SCM context.
Specifically, Notice 2007–5 states: ‘‘This
Notice confirms that taxpayers may also
make allocations of arm’s length charges
for services ineligible for the SCM that
yield a benefit to multiple members of
a controlled group. In such a case,
however, the flexible rules under the
SCM for establishing the joint benefits
and selecting the allocation key are
inapplicable. Instead, the more robust
analysis under the general transfer
pricing rules applies for purposes of
determining the appropriate arm’s
length charges, benefits, allocation keys,
etc.’’ The Treasury Department and the
IRS considered providing additional
SSA rules to services priced under
methods other than the SCM, but
concluded that such rules would be
unnecessary. In any event, as stated in
Notice 2007–5, the flexible SSA rules
for establishing the joint benefits and
selecting the allocation key are
inapplicable in the non-SCM context.
Other commentators requested that a
SSA should be respected even if a party
that reasonably anticipates a benefit
makes a payment equivalent to its share
under an SSA to the service provider
pursuant to a different arrangement. For
example, assume that a controlled
service provider performs services to ten
taxpayers that are members of its
controlled group. Assume further that
nine of the service recipients agree in a
single written contract to allocate the
arm’s length charge based on a
reasonable allocation basis, but the
tenth service recipient pays for its share
of the services pursuant to a separate
agreement. These comments were not
adopted because whether an agreement
constitutes a SSA requires a case-bycase determination based on the facts
and circumstances.
Some commentators observed that the
SSA rules require the allocation of costs
VerDate Nov<24>2008
16:58 Aug 03, 2009
Jkt 217001
on the basis that ‘‘most reliably reflects’’
the participants’ respective shares of
reasonably anticipated benefits, but
some of the examples use the phrase
‘‘precisely known.’’ This led the
commentators to question whether the
SSA rules create an unattainable
standard or, at least, a higher standard
than the reasonable standard for
allocation of costs described in Treas.
Reg. § 1.482–9T(k) and to suggest a
change to the examples. The examples
do not create a standard based on
precisely known shares of reasonably
anticipated benefits. Rather, the
examples use hypothetical, precisely
known reasonably anticipated benefits
as a measuring stick to provide an easily
understood comparative analysis of
potential allocation keys for illustrative
purposes. The suggested changes are not
adopted.
2. Comparable Uncontrolled Services
Price Method—Treas. Reg. § 1.482–9(c)
The comparable uncontrolled services
price (CUSP) method evaluates whether
the consideration in a controlled
services transaction is arm’s length by
comparison to the price charged in a
comparable uncontrolled services
transaction. This method is closely
analogous to the comparable
uncontrolled price (CUP) method in
§ 1.482–3(b).
One commentator objected to the
statement in the second sentence of
§ 1.482–9T(c)(1) of the 2006 temporary
regulations that, to be evaluated under
the CUSP method, a controlled service
ordinarily must be ‘‘identical to or have
a high degree of similarity’’ to the
uncontrolled comparable transactions.
The commentator claimed that such
language creates a higher standard for
determining the best method than in the
rest of the section 482 regulations. For
example, both § 1.482–1(c)(1) and
§ 1.482–9T(c)(2)(i) refer to the ‘‘most
reliable measure of an arm’s length
result’’ standard. The sentence in
question was intended merely as a guide
to when the CUSP method is applicable.
It was not intended to change the
standard under the best method rule. To
avoid further confusion, the sentence is
removed, but without effecting a
substantive change.
The CUSP method in these final
regulations is substantially similar to
the corresponding method in the 2006
temporary regulations.
3. Cost of Services Plus Method—Treas.
Reg. § 1.482–9(e)
The cost of services plus method is
generally analogous to the cost plus
method for transfers of tangible property
in existing § 1.482–3(d). The cost of
PO 00000
Frm 00005
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
38833
services plus method evaluates whether
the amount charged in a controlled
services transaction is arm’s length by
reference to the gross services profit
markup realized in comparable
uncontrolled transactions. Section
1.482–9T(e)(3)(ii)(A) provides that, if
the appropriate gross services profit
markup is derived from comparable
uncontrolled services transactions of
other service providers, then, in
evaluating comparability, the controlled
taxpayer must consider the results
under this method expressed as a
markup on total services costs of the
controlled taxpayer because functional
differences may be reflected in
differences in service costs other than
those included in comparable
transactional costs.
One commentator objected to the
required consideration of the results of
the cost of services plus method
expressed as a markup on total services
costs of the controlled taxpayer when
external comparables are utilized. In the
commentator’s view, this rule requires a
confirming analysis under a comparable
profits method (CPM) and, therefore,
places an undue burden on the
taxpayer. The same commentator also
expressed the concern that the rule
would create an even greater burden by
requiring two sets of external
comparables for application of the two
methods.
These comments are not adopted for
several reasons. First, the restatement of
the price does not require researching
two sets of external comparables under
two different methods. The sole purpose
of the calculation is to determine
whether it is necessary to perform
additional evaluation of functional
comparability under the cost of services
plus method. That is, if the price
indicates a markup on the renderer’s
total services cost that is either low or
negative when restated, this may
indicate differences in functions that
have not been accounted for under the
traditional comparability factors under
the cost of services plus method. Thus,
a low or negative markup merely
suggests the need for additional inquiry,
which may lead to a determination that
the cost of services plus method is not
the most reliable measure of an arm’s
length result under the best method
rule.
The cost of services plus method is
adopted in the final regulations without
change.
4. Profit Split Method—Treas. Reg.
§§ 1.482–9(g) and 1.482–6(c)(3)(i)(B)
The final regulations provide
additional guidance concerning
application of the comparable profit
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
mstockstill on DSKH9S0YB1PROD with RULES3
38834
Federal Register / Vol. 74, No. 148 / Tuesday, August 4, 2009 / Rules and Regulations
split and the residual profit split
methods to controlled services
transactions in § 1.482–9(g) and § 1.482–
6(c)(3)(i)(B). Generally, the comparable
profit split and the residual profit split
methods evaluate whether the allocation
of the combined operating profit or loss
attributable to one or more controlled
transactions is arm’s length by reference
to the relative value of each controlled
taxpayer’s contributions to the
combined operating profit or loss.
The Treasury Department and the IRS
received several comments on the profit
split method. One commentator
requested that § 1.482–8T(b), Example
12 of the 2006 temporary regulations
explain why the profit split method is
preferable to using the financial results
of a set of publicly-traded companies
engaged in selling merchandise and
related promotion and marketing
activities. Example 12 is revised in the
final regulations to address this
comment.
Another commentator argued that the
profit split method should not apply to
a party that does not own valuable
intangible property or does not use any
such property in the related party
transaction being evaluated. The
commentator noted that other parts of
the regulations, such as the CPM, CUSP
method, and costs of services plus
method reference valuable intangible
property in the examples. The same
commentator asserted that the profit
split method should be limited to
parties that bear substantial risk in their
intercompany transactions. The
Treasury Department and the IRS
believe that limiting application of the
profit split method to contributions of
valuable intangible property or the
bearing of risks would be inappropriate.
The changes in the 2006 temporary
regulations to routine and non-routine
contributions is an appropriate standard
and conformed to the changes to
§ 1.482–6T(c)(3)(i)(B)(1), which defines
a nonroutine contribution as ‘‘a
contribution that is not accounted for as
a routine contribution.’’ In other words,
a nonroutine contribution is one for
which the return cannot be determined
by reference to market benchmarks.
The 2006 temporary regulations
provide that the residual profit split
method ordinarily is used where
multiple controlled taxpayers make
significant nonroutine contributions. A
commentator requested that this
provision be removed because it
suggests that the method always applies
where there are no market benchmarks.
The provision regarding the residual
profit split method that the
commentator requested be removed has
been changed to conform to language in
VerDate Nov<24>2008
16:58 Aug 03, 2009
Jkt 217001
the cost sharing regulations.
Accordingly, § 1.482–9(g)(1) provides
that the residual profit split method may
not be used where only one controlled
taxpayer makes significant nonroutine
contributions. The commentator also
claimed that the residual profit split
method contains an inconsistency
because, although the method applies
when there are no market benchmarks,
the method includes a market
benchmark analysis for comparability
purposes. Compare §§ 1.482–9(g)(1) and
1.482–6(c)(3)(i)(B)(2). The Treasury
Department and the IRS do not consider
that there is an inconsistency. The
method contemplates the use of market
benchmarks, if available, to determine
the profit split that will be applied to
the return to nonroutine contributions
already determined under the method.
The same commentator requested that
the sentence in § 1.482–6T(c)(2)(ii)(B) of
the 2006 temporary regulations relating
to the comparable profit split method
that states that ‘‘the comparable profit
split method may not be used if the
combined operating profit (as a
percentage of the combined assets) of
the uncontrolled comparables varies
significantly from that earned by the
controlled taxpayers’’ should be deleted.
These comments are not adopted, since
the stated condition is fundamental to
comparability under the method.
5. Contingent Payments—Treas. Reg.
§ 1.482–9(i)
The 2006 temporary regulations
provide detailed guidance concerning
contingent-payment contractual terms.
The rules built on the principle that, in
structuring controlled transactions,
taxpayers are free to choose from among
a wide range of risk allocations. The
provision acknowledged that
contingent-payment terms—terms
requiring compensation to be paid only
if specified results are obtained—may be
particularly relevant in the context of
controlled services transactions.
Commentators raised several concerns
about the substance and scope of this
provision. One commentator said that
the regulations do not address whether
a taxpayer may, in the absence of a
written agreement, present facts to
demonstrate that a contingent payment
arrangement best reflects the economic
substance of the underlying
transactions. The Treasury Department
and the IRS do not agree that an
arrangement may be treated as a
contingent payment arrangement under
§ 1.482–9(i)(2) if the arrangement does
not satisfy the requirements of the
contingent payment arrangement
provision, including the written
contract requirement. However, where
PO 00000
Frm 00006
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
the Commissioner exercises its authority
pursuant to § 1.482–1(d)(3)(ii)(B) to
impute contractual terms, the taxpayer
may present additional facts to indicate
if an alternative agreement best reflects
the economic substance of the
underlying transaction, consistent with
the parties’ course of conduct in a
particular case. See § 1.482–
1(d)(3)(ii)(C), Examples 4 and 6.
The same commentator also pointed
out that the requirement to evaluate
whether a specified contingency bears a
direct relationship to the controlled
services transaction based on all of the
facts and circumstances should be
combined with the specified
contingency requirement. The Treasury
Department and the IRS agree that the
language in § 1.482–9(i)(2) should be
clarified. Accordingly, the regulations
remove the last sentence in § 1.482–
9T(i)(2)(i)(C) of the 2006 temporary
regulations relating to a specified
contingency and combine it with the
requirement under § 1.482–
9T(i)(2)(i)(B). Thus, § 1.482–9(i)(2)(i)(B)
now requires that the contract state that
payment for a controlled services
transaction is contingent (in whole or in
part) upon the happening of a future
benefit (within the meaning of § 1.482–
9(l)(3)) for the recipient directly related
to the activity or group of activities. For
this purpose, whether the future benefit
is directly related to the activity or
group of activities is evaluated based on
all the facts and circumstances.
6. Total Services Costs—Treas. Reg.
§ 1.482–9(j)
In the 2006 temporary regulations,
total services costs include all costs
directly identified with provision of the
controlled services, as well as all other
costs reasonably allocable to such
services under § 1.482–9(k). ‘‘Costs’’
must reflect all resources expended,
used, or made available to render the
service. Generally accepted accounting
principles (GAAP) or Federal income
tax accounting rules may provide an
appropriate starting point, but neither
would necessarily be conclusive in
evaluating whether an item must be
included in total services costs.
Another commentator requested that
value added costs (that is, labor costs
and depreciation) should be
distinguished from total services costs.
The commentator stated that a markup
on value added costs may be more
reliable than a markup on total costs in
certain instances and that this could be
a useful measure for any of the transfer
pricing methods, including the cost of
services plus method. The regulations
already provide flexibility in the context
of the cost of services plus method,
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
Federal Register / Vol. 74, No. 148 / Tuesday, August 4, 2009 / Rules and Regulations
mstockstill on DSKH9S0YB1PROD with RULES3
which is determined by reference to
comparable transactional costs, the
comparable profits method, and
unspecified methods. Consequently, the
comment is not adopted. The definition
of total services costs in these
regulations is, thus, similar to the
provisions in the 2006 temporary
regulations.
Section 1.482–9T(j) of the 2006
temporary regulations explicitly states
that total services costs include stockbased compensation, and Examples 3
through 6 of § 1.482–9T(f)(3) illustrate
when stock-based compensation
constitutes a material difference
requiring adjustments for comparability
and reliability purposes. Commentators
requested further guidance regarding the
valuation, comparability, and reliability
considerations for stock-based
compensation. Other commentators
objected to the explicit statement that
stock-based compensation can be a total
services cost. These final regulations do
not provide further guidance regarding
stock-based compensation. The
Treasury Department and the IRS
continue to consider technical issues
involving stock-based compensation in
the services and other contexts and
intend to address those issues in a
subsequent guidance project.
7. Controlled Services Transactions and
Shareholder Activities—Treas. Reg.
§ 1.482–9(l)
Section 1.482–9(l) sets forth a
threshold test for determining whether
an activity constitutes a controlled
services transaction subject to the
general framework of § 1.482–9. Section
1.482–9(l)(3) provides rules for
determining whether an activity
provides a benefit. Paragraphs (l)(3)(ii)
through (v) provide guidelines that
indicate the presence or absence of a
benefit. Section 1.482–9T(l)(3)(iv) of the
2006 temporary regulations provides
that an activity is a shareholder activity
if the sole effect of that activity is either
to protect the renderer’s capital
investment in the recipient or in other
members of the controlled group, or to
facilitate compliance by the renderer
with reporting, legal, or regulatory
requirements applicable specifically to
the renderer, or both.
The Treasury Department and the IRS
received comments on shareholder
activities. Some commentators asserted
that the ‘‘sole effect’’ language is too
restrictive and that the language should
be replaced by a ‘‘primary effect’’
standard. Other commentators argued
that the language appropriately
encompasses shareholder activities.
Another commentator requested a
change to the regulations such that a
VerDate Nov<24>2008
16:58 Aug 03, 2009
Jkt 217001
38835
shareholder activity should be
considered to have a sole effect only if
the benefits provided to the other
controlled group members are either (i)
indirect or remote or (ii) duplicative.
The Treasury Department and the IRS
believe that the ‘‘sole effect’’ language is
appropriate. The ‘‘primary effect’’
language in the 2003 proposed
regulations could inappropriately
include activities that are not true
shareholder activities and may even
consist of substantial activities that are
non-shareholder activities. An activity
that is described in § 1.482–9(l)(3)(ii)
through (iv) does not produce a benefit,
but the mere fact that an activity is not
described in § 1.482–9(l)(3)(ii) through
(iv) does not mean that the activity
necessarily provides a benefit. An
activity not described in § 1.482–
9(l)(3)(ii) through (iv) provides a benefit
only if it satisfies the incremental value
standard of § 1.482–9(l)(3)(i).
Furthermore, for that purpose, it may be
more reliable, depending on the facts
and circumstances, to measure
incremental value on a functional
aggregate activity, rather than a
component activity-by-activity basis.
9. Coordination With Other Transfer
Pricing Rules—Treas. Reg. § 1.482–9(m)
and Guarantees
Section 1.482–9(m) provides
coordination rules applicable to a
controlled services transaction that is
combined with, or includes elements of,
a non-services transaction. These
coordination rules rely on the best
method rule in existing § 1.482–1(c)(1)
to determine which method or methods
would provide the most reliable
measure of an arm’s length result for a
particular controlled transaction.
8. Third Party Costs—Treas. Reg.
§ 1.482–9(l)(4)
b. Global Dealing Operations
The Treasury Department and the IRS
are working on new global dealing
regulations. The intent of the Treasury
Department and the IRS is that, when
final global dealing regulations are
issued, those regulations will govern the
evaluation of the activities performed by
a global dealing operation. Pending the
issuance of new global dealing
regulations, taxpayers may rely on the
proposed global dealing regulations to
govern financial transactions entered
into in connection with a global dealing
operation as defined in proposed
§ 1.482–8. Thus, the cross-reference
under proposed § 1.482–9(m)(6) (71 FR
44247), which provides that a controlled
services transaction does not include a
financial transaction entered into in
connection with a global dealing
operation as defined in proposed
§ 1.482–8, remains in proposed form.
Section 1.482–9(m)(6) in these final
regulations is reserved pending issuance
of global dealing regulations.
Under § 1.482–9T(l)(4) of the 2006
temporary regulations, a controlled
services transaction may be analyzed as
a single transaction or as two separate
transactions depending on which
approach provides the most reliable
measure of the arm’s length result under
the best method rule in existing § 1.482–
1(c). Two examples are provided
illustrating different alternatives when a
controlled services transaction included
expenses related to a third-party
contract (third party costs) with a
controlled taxpayer. In both examples,
third party costs that could be reliably
disaggregated could be charged at cost.
Commentators requested that all third
party costs be treated as ‘‘pass through’’
items that are not subject to a markup
applicable to costs incurred by the
renderer in its capacity as service
provider.
The Treasury Department and the IRS
continue to maintain the view that
whether to consider ‘‘pass through’’
items as disaggregated from, or
aggregated with, other functions and
costs, depends on which analysis most
reliably reflects an arm’s length result.
Therefore, the rules of § 1.482–9(l)(4) are
adopted without change.
PO 00000
Frm 00007
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
a. Services Subject to a Qualified Cost
Sharing Arrangement—Treas. Reg.
§ 1.482–9(m)(3)
Section 1.482–9T(m)(3) of the 2006
temporary regulations states that
services provided by a controlled
participant under a qualified cost
sharing arrangement are subject to
existing § 1.482–7. As part of the
temporary cost sharing regulations (TD
9441, 2009–7 I.R.B. 460, 74 FR 340)
published on January 5, 2009, the
Treasury Department and the IRS
replaced the coordination rules with
new § 1.482–9T(m)(3). Section 1.482–
9(m)(3) is reserved pending finalization
of the cost sharing regulations.
c. Guarantees, Including Financial
Guarantees
Financial transactions, including
guarantees, are explicitly excluded from
eligibility for the SCM by § 1.482–
9(b)(4)(viii). However, no inference is
intended that financial transactions
(including guarantees) would otherwise
be considered the provision of services
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
38836
Federal Register / Vol. 74, No. 148 / Tuesday, August 4, 2009 / Rules and Regulations
for transfer pricing purposes. The
Treasury Department and the IRS intend
to issue future guidance regarding
financial guarantees.
mstockstill on DSKH9S0YB1PROD with RULES3
B. Income Attributable to Intangible
Property—Treas. Reg. § 1.482–4(f)(3)
and (4)
Paragraphs (3) and (4) of § 1.482–4(f)
provide rules for determining the owner
of intangible property for purposes of
section 482 and also provide rules for
determining the arm’s length
compensation in situations where a
controlled party other than the owner
makes contributions to the value of
intangible property. Section 1.482–
4(f)(3)(i)(A) provides that the legal
owner of intangible property pursuant
to the intellectual property law of the
relevant jurisdiction, or the holder of
rights constituting intangible property
pursuant to contractual terms (such as
the terms of a license) or other legal
provision, will be considered the sole
owner of intangible property for
purposes of this section unless such
ownership is inconsistent with the
economic substance of the underlying
transactions. Some commentators
believe that the rules should specify that
a holder of bare legal title to intangible
property should not be presumed to be
the owner when other parties have all
of the other benefits and burdens of
ownership. After considering the public
comments, the Treasury Department
and the IRS continue to believe that the
legal ownership standard as set forth in
§ 1.482–4(f)(3)(i)(A) is the appropriate
framework for determining ownership
of intangible property under section
482.
The provisions of § 1.482–4(f)(3) and
(4) are adopted without change.
C. Economic Substance
A number of commentators expressed
similar and sometimes interrelated
concerns regarding economic substance
considerations, imputation of
contractual terms, the realistic
alternatives principle, and the rules for
income attributable to intangible
property. The common thread running
through these comments is a concern
that the IRS will inappropriately treat
taxpayers as having engaged in
transactions different from those in
which they actually engaged.
Section 1.482–4(f)(3)(i)(A) provides
that, if no owner of intangible property
is identified under the intellectual
property law of the relevant jurisdiction,
or pursuant to contractual terms
(including terms imputed pursuant to
§ 1.482–1(d)(3)(ii)(B)) or other legal
provision, then the controlled taxpayer
that has control of intangible property,
VerDate Nov<24>2008
16:58 Aug 03, 2009
Jkt 217001
based on all the facts and
circumstances, will be considered the
sole owner of intangible property for
purposes of this section. One
commentator believes that the control
rule for determining ownership of nonlegally protected intangibles allows the
IRS to attribute ownership of intangible
property in a manner that is
inconsistent with economic substance.
Accordingly, the comment suggests that
such control determinations must be
consistent with economic substance in
all cases. In the context of the control
rule in § 1.482–4(f)(3)(i)(A), this is
already reflected in the language
‘‘including terms imputed pursuant to
§ 1.482–1(d)(3)(ii)(B).’’
Section 1.482–9T(h) of the 2006
temporary regulations provides that,
consistent with the specified methods,
an unspecified method should take into
account the general principle that
uncontrolled taxpayers compare the
terms of a particular transaction to the
realistic alternatives to that transaction,
including economically similar
transactions structured as other than
services transactions, and only enter
into a transaction if none of the
alternatives is preferable to it. The
realistic alternatives concept was
imported from § 1.482–1(f)(2)(ii) to be
consistent with the general aim to
coordinate the analyses under the
various sections of the regulations under
section 482. This provision allows
flexibility to consider non-services
alternatives to a services transaction, for
example, a transfer or license of
intangible property, if such an approach
provides the most reliable measure of an
arm’s length result.
Commentators suggested that the
realistic alternative principle be
clarified so that only transactions
actually engaged in by the controlled
taxpayer can constitute realistic
alternatives or that the principle be
removed altogether on the grounds that
it inappropriately treats taxpayers as
engaging in transactions other than
those they chose. The Treasury
Department and the IRS do not agree
with the assertion that consideration of
realistic alternatives improperly
disregards a taxpayer’s chosen
arrangement and that the realistic
alternative principle is limited to
internal comparables. It is a
longstanding principle under § 1.482–
1(f)(2)(ii)(A) and in the valuation field,
generally, that, although the
Commissioner will evaluate the results
of a transaction as actually structured by
the taxpayer unless it lacks economic
substance, the Commissioner may
consider alternatives available in
determining the arm’s length valuation
PO 00000
Frm 00008
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
of the controlled transaction. The
realistic alternatives principle does not
recast the transaction. Rather, it assumes
that taxpayers are rational and will not
choose to price an arrangement in a
manner that makes them worse off
economically than another available
alternative. Thus, if the price associated
with a realistic alternative appears
preferable in comparison with the price
associated with the chosen arrangement,
the logical implication is that the actual
arrangement has been priced incorrectly
through a flawed application of the best
method rule. This is further reflected in
the example in § 1.482–9T(h), which
illustrates when realistic alternatives
may be considered to evaluate the arm’s
length consideration, and explicitly
states that the best method rule of
§ 1.482–1(c) governs the analysis.
The unspecified method provisions in
these final regulations are adopted
without change.
Section 1.482–9(i)(3) provides that,
consistent with the authority in § 1.482–
1(d)(3)(ii)(B), the Commissioner may
impute contingent-payment contractual
terms in a controlled services
transaction if the economic substance of
the transaction is consistent with the
existence of such terms. When the 2003
proposed regulations were issued,
commentators expressed concerns with
the rule for imputing contingent
payment terms to the extent that it
permits the IRS to recast arrangements
if there is a disagreement about the
pricing of a service. The temporary
regulations responded to this concern
by providing a new Example 5 in
§ 1.482–1T(d)(3)(ii)(C) to illustrate that
if a taxpayer’s pricing is outside of the
arm’s length range, that fact alone
would not support imputation of
additional contractual terms based on
economic substance grounds.
Commentators responded, however, that
the last sentence of Example 5
perpetuated the same problem of
allowing the IRS to recast arrangements
if there were pricing disputes between
a taxpayer and the IRS.
The Treasury Department and the IRS
agree that the last sentence of Example
5 in § 1.482–1T(d)(3)(ii)(C) did not
clearly convey its intended meaning,
which is that a transfer pricing method
and the price derived from the
application of that method do not
inform the terms of the transaction or
the risks borne by the entities. Rather,
the selection and application of a
transfer pricing method should be based
on a comparability analysis of the
transaction, which must consider the
risks borne by each entity in the
transaction. Thus, the last sentence in
§ 1.482–1T(d)(3)(ii)(C) Example 5,
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
Federal Register / Vol. 74, No. 148 / Tuesday, August 4, 2009 / Rules and Regulations
paragraph (iv), was intended to explain
that the IRS is not required to accept the
transfer pricing method and form of
payment terms of a transaction as
represented by a taxpayer if they are
inconsistent with the conduct of the
entities and the economic substance of
the transaction. Because this sentence
caused confusion, it has been removed.
However, the Treasury Department and
the IRS affirm that the IRS may impute
contingent-payment terms where the
economic substance of the transaction is
consistent with the existence of such
terms.
D. Stewardship Expenses—§ 1.861–8
The regulations under § 1.861–8(e)(4)
conform to, and are consistent with, the
language relating to controlled services
transactions as set forth in § 1.482–9(l).
The regulations under § 1.861–8(e)(4)
are applicable for taxable years
beginning after December 31, 2006.
mstockstill on DSKH9S0YB1PROD with RULES3
E. Effective/Applicability Date—§ 1.482–
9(n)
These regulations are applicable for
taxable years beginning after July 31,
2009. Controlled taxpayers may elect to
apply retroactively all of the provisions
of these regulations to any taxable year
beginning after September 10, 2003.
Such election will be effective for the
year of the election and all subsequent
taxable years.
Special Analyses
It has been determined that this
Treasury decision is not a significant
regulatory action as defined in
Executive Order 12866. Therefore, a
regulatory assessment is not required. It
also has been determined that section
553(b) of the Administrative Procedure
Act (5 U.S.C. chapter 5) does not apply
to this regulation. It is hereby certified
that the collections of information in
this regulation will not have a
significant economic impact on a
substantial number of small entities.
This certification is based on the fact
that the collections of information are
related to elective provisions for
determining taxable income that
simplify and reduce compliance
burdens in connection with controlled
services transactions. When collection
of information is required, it is expected
to take taxpayers approximately 2 hours
to comply, and the administrative and
economic costs will be nominal in
comparison with the resulting
simplification and reduction of
compliance burdens. Thus, the
economic impact of the collections of
information will not be significant.
Similarly, while some small entities
may be subject to the collections of
VerDate Nov<24>2008
16:58 Aug 03, 2009
Jkt 217001
information if they elect one of the
provisions, the collections of
information are not expected to affect a
substantial number of small entities.
Accordingly, a regulatory flexibility
analysis under the Regulatory
Flexibility Act (5 U.S.C. chapter 6) is
not required. Pursuant to section 7805(f)
of the Internal Revenue Code, the notice
of proposed rulemaking preceding these
regulations was submitted to the Small
Business Administration for comment
on its impact on small business.
Drafting Information
The principal authors of these
regulations are Carol B. Tan and Gregory
A. Spring, Office of Associate Chief
Counsel (International) for matters
relating to section 482, and Richard L.
Chewning, Office of Associate Chief
Counsel (International) for matters
relating to stewardship expenses.
38837
(c)(3)(i)(B), (c)(3)(ii)(D), and (d) are
revised
■ 7. The entry for § 1.482–8(c) is added.
■ 8. The entries for § 1.482–9 are
revised.
The addition and revisions read as
follows:
§ 1.482–0 Outline of regulations under
section 482.
This section contains major captions
for §§ 1.482–1 through 1.482–9.
§ 1.482–1 Allocation of income and
deductions among taxpayers.
Adoption of Amendments to the
Regulations
(a) * * *
(1) Purpose and scope.
*
*
*
*
*
(d) * * *
(3) * * *
(ii) * * *
(C) Examples.
*
*
*
*
*
(v) Property or services.
*
*
*
*
*
(f) * * *
(2) * * *
(ii) * * *
(A) In general.
*
*
*
*
*
(iii) * * *
(A) * * *
(B) Circumstances warranting
consideration of multiple year data.
*
*
*
*
*
(g) * * *
(4) * * *
(iii) Examples.
*
*
*
*
*
(i) Definitions.
(j) Effective/applicability date.
Accordingly, 26 CFR parts 1, 31, and
602 are amended as follows:
§ 1.482–2 Determination of taxable income
in specific situations.
PART 1—INCOME TAXES
*
List of Subjects
26 CFR Part 1
Income taxes, Reporting and
recordkeeping requirements.
26 CFR Part 31
Employment taxes, Income taxes,
Penalties, Pensions, Railroad retirement,
Reporting and recordkeeping
requirements, Social Security and
Unemployment compensation.
26 CFR Part 602
Reporting and recordkeeping
requirements.
■
■ Paragraph 1. The authority citation
for part 1 is amended by adding an entry
in numerical order to read in part as
follows:
Authority: 26 U.S.C. 7805 * * *.
Section 1.482–9 also issued under 26
U.S.C. 482. * * *
Par. 2. Section 1.482–0 is amended as
follows:
■ 1. The introductory text is revised.
■ 2. The entries for § 1.482–1(a)(1),
(d)(3)(ii)(C), (d)(3)(v), (f)(2)(ii)(A),
(f)(2)(iii)(B), (g)(4)(iii), (i) and (j) are
revised.
■ 3. The entries for § 1.482–2(b), (e) and
(f) are revised.
■ 4. The entries for § 1.482–4(f)(3), (f)(4),
(g), and (h) are revised.
■ 5. The entry for § 1.482–4(f)(7) is
removed.
■ 6. The entries for § 1.482–
6(c)(2)(ii)(B)(1), (c)(2)(ii)(D), (c)(3)(i)(A),
■
PO 00000
Frm 00009
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
*
*
*
*
(b) Rendering of services.
*
*
*
*
*
(e) [Reserved]. For further guidance,
see § 1.482–0T, the entry for § 1.482–
2T(e).
(f) Effective/applicability date.
*
*
*
*
*
§ 1.482–4 Methods to determine taxable
income in connection with a transfer of
intangible property.
*
*
*
*
*
(f) * * *
(3) Ownership of intangible property.
(i) Identification of owner.
(A) In general.
(B) [Reserved]. For further guidance,
see § 1.482–0T, the entry for § 1.482–
4T(f)(3)(i)(B).
(ii) Examples.
(4) Contribution to the value of
intangible property owned by another.
(i) In general.
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
38838
Federal Register / Vol. 74, No. 148 / Tuesday, August 4, 2009 / Rules and Regulations
(ii) Examples.
*
*
*
*
(g) [Reserved]. For further guidance,
see § 1.482–0T, the entry for § 1.482–
4T(g).
(h) Effective/applicability date.
*
*
*
*
*
*
§ 1.482–6
Profit split method.
*
*
*
*
*
(c) * * *
(2) * * *
(ii) * * *
(B) * * *.
(1) In general.
*
*
*
*
*
(D) Other factors affecting reliability.
*
*
*
*
*
(3) * * *
(i) * * *
(A) Allocate income to routine
contributions.
(B) Allocate residual profit.
(1) Nonroutine contributions
generally.
(2) Nonroutine contributions of
intangible property.
(ii) * * *
(D) Other factors affecting reliability.
*
*
*
*
*
(d) Effective/applicability date.
§ 1.482–8
rule.
*
Examples of the best method
*
*
*
*
(c) Effective/applicability date.
mstockstill on DSKH9S0YB1PROD with RULES3
§ 1.482–9 Methods to determine taxable
income in connection with a controlled
services transaction.
(a) In general.
(b) Services cost method.
(1) In general.
(2) Eligibility for the services cost
method.
(3) Covered services.
(i) Specified covered services.
(ii) Low margin covered services.
(4) Excluded activities.
(5) Not services that contribute
significantly to fundamental risks of
business success or failure.
(6) Adequate books and records.
(7) Shared services arrangement.
(i) In general.
(ii) Requirements for shared services
arrangement.
(A) Eligibility.
(B) Allocation.
(C) Documentation.
(iii) Definitions and special rules.
(A) Participant.
(B) Aggregation.
(C) Coordination with cost sharing
arrangements.
(8) Examples.
(c) Comparable uncontrolled services
price method.
(1) In general.
VerDate Nov<24>2008
16:58 Aug 03, 2009
Jkt 217001
(2) Comparability and reliability
considerations.
(i) In general.
(ii) Comparability.
(A) In general.
(B) Adjustments for differences
between controlled and uncontrolled
transactions.
(iii) Data and assumptions.
(3) Arm’s length range.
(4) Examples.
(5) Indirect evidence of the price of a
comparable uncontrolled services
transaction.
(i) In general.
(ii) Example.
(d) Gross services margin method.
(1) In general.
(2) Determination of arm’s length
price.
(i) In general.
(ii) Relevant uncontrolled transaction.
(iii) Applicable uncontrolled price.
(iv) Appropriate gross services profit.
(v) Arm’s length range.
(3) Comparability and reliability
considerations.
(i) In general.
(ii) Comparability.
(A) Functional comparability.
(B) Other comparability factors.
(C) Adjustments for differences
between controlled and uncontrolled
transactions.
(D) Buy-sell distributor.
(iii) Data and assumptions.
(A) In general.
(B) Consistency in accounting.
(4) Examples.
(e) Cost of services plus method.
(1) In general.
(2) Determination of arm’s length
price.
(i) In general.
(ii) Appropriate gross services profit.
(iii) Comparable transactional costs.
(iv) Arm’s length range.
(3) Comparability and reliability
considerations.
(i) In general.
(ii) Comparability.
(A) Functional comparability.
(B) Other comparability factors.
(C) Adjustments for differences
between the controlled and
uncontrolled transactions.
(iii) Data and assumptions.
(A) In general.
(B) Consistency in accounting.
(4) Examples.
(f) Comparable profits method.
(1) In general.
(2) Determination of arm’s length
result.
(i) Tested party.
(ii) Profit level indicators.
(iii) Comparability and reliability
considerations—Data and
assumptions—Consistency
PO 00000
Frm 00010
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
in accounting.
(3) Examples.
(g) Profit split method.
(1) In general.
(2) Examples.
(h) Unspecified methods.
(i) Contingent-payment contractual
terms for services.
(1) Contingent-payment contractual
terms recognized in general.
(2) Contingent-payment arrangement.
(i) General requirements.
(A) Written contract.
(B) Specified contingency.
(C) Basis for payment.
(ii) Economic substance and conduct.
(3) Commissioner’s authority to
impute contingent-payment terms.
(4) Evaluation of arm’s length charge.
(5) Examples.
(j) Total services costs.
(k) Allocation of costs.
(1) In general.
(2) Appropriate method of allocation
and apportionment.
(i) Reasonable method standard.
(ii) Use of general practices.
(3) Examples.
(l) Controlled services transaction.
(1) In general.
(2) Activity.
(3) Benefit.
(i) In general.
(ii) Indirect or remote benefit.
(iii) Duplicative activities.
(iv) Shareholder activities.
(v) Passive association.
(4) Disaggregation of transactions.
(5) Examples.
(m) Coordination with transfer pricing
rules for other transactions.
(1) Services transactions that include
other types of transactions.
(2) Services transactions that effect a
transfer of intangible property.
(3) [Reserved]. For further guidance,
see § 1.482–0T, the entry for § 1.482–
9T(m)(3).
(4) Other types of transactions that
include controlled services transactions.
(5) Examples.
(n) Effective/applicability date.
(1) In general.
(2) Election to apply regulations to
earlier taxable years.
■ Par. 3. Section 1.482–0T is amended
as follows:
■ 1. Revise the section heading and
introductory text.
■ 2. Revise the section headings for
§§ 1.482–1T, 1.482–4T and 1.482.9T and
the entries for §§ 1.482–1T, 1.482–2T,
1.482–4T and 1.482.9T.
■ 3. Remove the entries for § 1.482–6T.
The revisions read as follows:
§ 1.482–0T Outline of regulations under
section 482 (temporary).
This section contains major captions
for §§ 1.482–1T, 1.482–2T, 1.482–4T,
1.482–7T, 1.482–8T, and 1.482–9T.
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
Federal Register / Vol. 74, No. 148 / Tuesday, August 4, 2009 / Rules and Regulations
§ 1.482–1T Allocation of income and
deductions among taxpayers (temporary).
(a) through (b)(2) [Reserved]. For
further guidance, see § 1.482–0, the
entries for § 1.482–1(a) through (b)(2).
(i) Methods.
(ii) [Reserved]. For further guidance,
see § 1.482–0, the entry for § 1.482–
1(b)(2)(ii).
(iii) Coordination of methods
applicable to certain intangible
development arrangements.
(c) through (i) [Reserved]. For further
guidance, see § 1.482–0, the entries for
§ 1.482–1(c) through (i).
(j) Effective/applicability date.
(k) Expiration date.
§ 1.482–2T Determination of taxable
income in specific situations (temporary).
(a) through (d) [Reserved]. For further
guidance, see § 1.482–0, the entries for
§ 1.482–2(a) through (d).
(e) Cost sharing arrangement.
(f) Effective/applicability date.
(1) In general.
(2) Election to apply regulation to
earlier taxable years.
(3) Expiration date.
§ 1.482–4T Methods to determine taxable
income in connection with a transfer of
intangible property (temporary).
(a) through (f)(3)(i)(A) [Reserved]. For
further guidance, see § 1.482–0, the
entries for § 1.482–4(a) through
(f)(3)(i)(A).
(B) Cost sharing arrangements.
(f)(3)(ii) through (f)(6) [Reserved]. For
further guidance, see § 1.482–0, the
entries for § 1.482–4(f)(3)(ii) through
(f)(6).
(g) Coordination with rules governing
cost sharing arrangements.
(h) Effective/applicability date.
(i) Expiration date.
*
*
*
*
*
mstockstill on DSKH9S0YB1PROD with RULES3
§ 1.482–9T Methods to determine taxable
income in connection with a controlled
services transaction (temporary).
(a) through (m)(2) [Reserved]. For
further guidance, see § 1.482–0, the
entries for § 1.482–9(a) through (m)(2).
(3) Coordination with rules governing
cost sharing arrangements.
(n) Effective/applicability dates.
(o) Expiration date.
■ Par. 4. Section 1.482–1 is amended by
revising paragraphs (a)(1), (d)(3)(ii)(C)
Examples 3, 4, 5, and 6, (d)(3)(v),
(f)(2)(ii)(A), (f)(2)(iii)(B), (g)(4)(i),
(g)(4)(iii) Example 1, (i), and (j)(6) to
read as follows:
§ 1.482–1 Allocation of income and
deductions among taxpayers.
(a) In general—(1) Purpose and scope.
The purpose of section 482 is to ensure
that taxpayers clearly reflect income
VerDate Nov<24>2008
16:58 Aug 03, 2009
Jkt 217001
attributable to controlled transactions
and to prevent the avoidance of taxes
with respect to such transactions.
Section 482 places a controlled taxpayer
on a tax parity with an uncontrolled
taxpayer by determining the true taxable
income of the controlled taxpayer. This
section sets forth general principles and
guidelines to be followed under section
482. Section 1.482–2 provides rules for
the determination of the true taxable
income of controlled taxpayers in
specific situations, including controlled
transactions involving loans or advances
or the use of tangible property. Sections
1.482–3 through 1.482–6 provide rules
for the determination of the true taxable
income of controlled taxpayers in cases
involving the transfer of property.
Section 1.482–7T sets forth the cost
sharing provisions applicable to taxable
years beginning on or after January 5,
2009. Section 1.482–8 provides
examples illustrating the application of
the best method rule. Finally, § 1.482–
9 provides rules for the determination of
the true taxable income of controlled
taxpayers in cases involving the
performance of services.
*
*
*
*
*
(d) * * *
(3) * * *
(ii) * * *
(C) * * *
Example 3. Contractual terms imputed
from economic substance. (i) FP, a foreign
producer of wristwatches, is the registered
holder of the YY trademark in the United
States and in other countries worldwide. In
year 1, FP enters the United States market by
selling YY wristwatches to its newly
organized United States subsidiary, USSub,
for distribution in the United States market.
USSub pays FP a fixed price per wristwatch.
USSub and FP undertake, without separate
compensation, marketing activities to
establish the YY trademark in the United
States market. Unrelated foreign producers of
trademarked wristwatches and their
authorized United States distributors
respectively undertake similar marketing
activities in independent arrangements
involving distribution of trademarked
wristwatches in the United States market. In
years 1 through 6, USSub markets and sells
YY wristwatches in the United States.
Further, in years 1 through 6, USSub
undertakes incremental marketing activities
in addition to the activities similar to those
observed in the independent distribution
transactions in the United States market. FP
does not directly or indirectly compensate
USSub for performing these incremental
activities during years 1 through 6. Assume
that, aside from these incremental activities,
and after any adjustments are made to
improve the reliability of the comparison, the
price paid per wristwatch by the
independent, authorized distributors of
wristwatches would provide the most
reliable measure of the arm’s length price
paid per YY wristwatch by USSub.
PO 00000
Frm 00011
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
38839
(ii) By year 7, the wristwatches with the
YY trademark generate a premium return in
the United States market, as compared to
wristwatches marketed by the independent
distributors. In year 7, substantially all the
premium return from the YY trademark in
the United States market is attributed to FP,
for example through an increase in the price
paid per watch by USSub, or by some other
means.
(iii) In determining whether an allocation
of income is appropriate in year 7, the
Commissioner may consider the economic
substance of the arrangements between
USSub and FP, and the parties’ course of
conduct throughout their relationship. Based
on this analysis, the Commissioner
determines that it is unlikely that, ex ante,
an uncontrolled taxpayer operating at arm’s
length would engage in the incremental
marketing activities to develop or enhance
intangible property owned by another party
unless it received contemporaneous
compensation or otherwise had a reasonable
anticipation of receiving a future benefit from
those activities. In this case, USSub’s
undertaking the incremental marketing
activities in years 1 through 6 is a course of
conduct that is inconsistent with the parties’
attribution to FP in year 7 of substantially all
the premium return from the enhanced YY
trademark in the United States market.
Therefore, the Commissioner may impute
one or more agreements between USSub and
FP, consistent with the economic substance
of their course of conduct, which would
afford USSub an appropriate portion of the
premium return from the YY trademark
wristwatches. For example, the
Commissioner may impute a separate
services agreement that affords USSub
contingent-payment compensation for its
incremental marketing activities in years 1
through 6, which benefited FP by
contributing to the value of the trademark
owned by FP. In the alternative, the
Commissioner may impute a long-term,
exclusive agreement to exploit the YY
trademark in the United States that allows
USSub to benefit from the incremental
marketing activities it performed. As another
alternative, the Commissioner may require
FP to compensate USSub for terminating
USSub’s imputed long-term, exclusive
agreement to exploit the YY trademark in the
United States, an agreement that USSub
made more valuable at its own expense and
risk. The taxpayer may present additional
facts that could indicate which of these or
other alternative agreements best reflects the
economic substance of the underlying
transactions, consistent with the parties’
course of conduct in the particular case.
Example 4. Contractual terms imputed
from economic substance. (i) FP, a foreign
producer of athletic gear, is the registered
holder of the AA trademark in the United
States and in other countries worldwide. In
year 1, FP enters into a licensing agreement
that affords its newly organized United States
subsidiary, USSub, exclusive rights to certain
manufacturing and marketing intangible
property (including the AA trademark) for
purposes of manufacturing and marketing
athletic gear in the United States under the
AA trademark. The contractual terms of this
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
mstockstill on DSKH9S0YB1PROD with RULES3
38840
Federal Register / Vol. 74, No. 148 / Tuesday, August 4, 2009 / Rules and Regulations
agreement obligate USSub to pay FP a royalty
based on sales, and also obligate both FP and
USSub to undertake without separate
compensation specified types and levels of
marketing activities. Unrelated foreign
businesses license independent United States
businesses to manufacture and market
athletic gear in the United States, using
trademarks owned by the unrelated foreign
businesses. The contractual terms of these
uncontrolled transactions require the
licensees to pay royalties based on sales of
the merchandise, and obligate the licensors
and licensees to undertake without separate
compensation specified types and levels of
marketing activities. In years 1 through 6,
USSub manufactures and sells athletic gear
under the AA trademark in the United States.
Assume that, after adjustments are made to
improve the reliability of the comparison for
any material differences relating to marketing
activities, manufacturing or marketing
intangible property, and other comparability
factors, the royalties paid by independent
licensees would provide the most reliable
measure of the arm’s length royalty owed by
USSub to FP, apart from the additional facts
in paragraph (ii) of this Example 4.
(ii) In years 1 through 6, USSub performs
incremental marketing activities with respect
to the AA trademark athletic gear, in addition
to the activities required under the terms of
the license agreement with FP, that are also
incremental as compared to those observed
in the comparables. FP does not directly or
indirectly compensate USSub for performing
these incremental activities during years 1
through 6. By year 7, AA trademark athletic
gear generates a premium return in the
United States, as compared to similar athletic
gear marketed by independent licensees. In
year 7, USSub and FP enter into a separate
services agreement under which FP agrees to
compensate USSub on a cost basis for the
incremental marketing activities that USSub
performed during years 1 through 6, and to
compensate USSub on a cost basis for any
incremental marketing activities it may
perform in year 7 and subsequent years. In
addition, the parties revise the license
agreement executed in year 1, and increase
the royalty to a level that attributes to FP
substantially all the premium return from
sales of the AA trademark athletic gear in the
United States.
(iii) In determining whether an allocation
of income is appropriate in year 7, the
Commissioner may consider the economic
substance of the arrangements between
USSub and FP and the parties’ course of
conduct throughout their relationship. Based
on this analysis, the Commissioner
determines that it is unlikely that, ex ante, an
uncontrolled taxpayer operating at arm’s
length would engage in the incremental
marketing activities to develop or enhance
intangible property owned by another party
unless it received contemporaneous
compensation or otherwise had a reasonable
anticipation of a future benefit. In this case,
USSub’s undertaking the incremental
marketing activities in years 1 through 6 is
a course of conduct that is inconsistent with
the parties’ adoption in year 7 of contractual
terms by which FP compensates USSub on a
cost basis for the incremental marketing
VerDate Nov<24>2008
16:58 Aug 03, 2009
Jkt 217001
activities that it performed. Therefore, the
Commissioner may impute one or more
agreements between USSub and FP,
consistent with the economic substance of
their course of conduct, which would afford
USSub an appropriate portion of the
premium return from the AA trademark
athletic gear. For example, the Commissioner
may impute a separate services agreement
that affords USSub contingent-payment
compensation for the incremental activities it
performed during years 1 through 6, which
benefited FP by contributing to the value of
the trademark owned by FP. In the
alternative, the Commissioner may impute a
long-term, exclusive United States license
agreement that allows USSub to benefit from
the incremental activities. As another
alternative, the Commissioner may require
FP to compensate USSub for terminating
USSub’s imputed long-term United States
license agreement, a license that USSub
made more valuable at its own expense and
risk. The taxpayer may present additional
facts that could indicate which of these or
other alternative agreements best reflects the
economic substance of the underlying
transactions, consistent with the parties’
course of conduct in this particular case.
Example 5. Non-arm’s length
compensation. (i) The facts are the same as
in paragraph (i) of Example 4. As in Example
4, assume that, after adjustments are made to
improve the reliability of the comparison for
any material differences relating to marketing
activities, manufacturing or marketing
intangible property, and other comparability
factors, the royalties paid by independent
licensees would provide the most reliable
measure of the arm’s length royalty owed by
USSub to FP, apart from the additional facts
described in paragraph (ii) of this Example 5.
(ii) In years 1 through 4, USSub performs
certain incremental marketing activities with
respect to the AA trademark athletic gear, in
addition to the activities required under the
terms of the basic license agreement, that are
also incremental as compared with those
activities observed in the comparables. At the
start of year 1, FP enters into a separate
services agreement with USSub, which states
that FP will compensate USSub quarterly, in
an amount equal to specified costs plus X%,
for these incremental marketing functions.
Further, these written agreements reflect the
intent of the parties that USSub receive such
compensation from FP throughout the term
of the agreement, without regard to the
success or failure of the promotional
activities. During years 1 through 4, USSub
performs marketing activities pursuant to the
separate services agreement and in each year
USSub receives the specified compensation
from FP on a cost of services plus basis.
(iii) In evaluating year 4, the Commissioner
performs an analysis of independent parties
that perform promotional activities
comparable to those performed by USSub
and that receive separately-stated
compensation on a current basis without
contingency. The Commissioner determines
that the magnitude of the specified cost plus
X% is outside the arm’s length range in each
of years 1 through 4. Based on an evaluation
of all the facts and circumstances, the
Commissioner makes an allocation to require
PO 00000
Frm 00012
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
payment of compensation to USSub for the
promotional activities performed in year 4,
based on the median of the interquartile
range of the arm’s length markups charged by
the uncontrolled comparables described in
paragraph (e)(3) of this section.
(iv) Given that based on facts and
circumstances, the terms agreed by the
controlled parties were that FP would bear
all risks associated with the promotional
activities performed by USSub to promote
the AA trademark product in the United
States market, and given that the parties’
conduct during the years examined was
consistent with this allocation of risk, the fact
that the cost of services plus markup on
USSub’s services was outside the arm’s
length range does not, without more, support
imputation of additional contractual terms
based on alternative views of the economic
substance of the transaction, such as terms
indicating that USSub, rather than FP, bore
the risk associated with these activities.
Example 6. Contractual terms imputed
from economic substance. (i) Company X is
a member of a controlled group that has been
in operation in the pharmaceutical sector for
many years. In years 1 through 4, Company
X undertakes research and development
activities. As a result of those activities,
Company X developed a compound that may
be more effective than existing medications
in the treatment of certain conditions.
(ii) Company Y is acquired in year 4 by the
controlled group that includes Company X.
Once Company Y is acquired, Company X
makes available to Company Y a large
amount of technical data concerning the new
compound, which Company Y uses to
register patent rights with respect to the
compound in several jurisdictions, making
Company Y the legal owner of such patents.
Company Y then enters into licensing
agreements with group members that afford
Company Y 100% of the premium return
attributable to use of the intangible property
by its subsidiaries.
(iii) In determining whether an allocation
is appropriate in year 4, the Commissioner
may consider the economic substance of the
arrangements between Company X and
Company Y, and the parties’ course of
conduct throughout their relationship. Based
on this analysis, the Commissioner
determines that it is unlikely that an
uncontrolled taxpayer operating at arm’s
length would make available the results of its
research and development or perform
services that resulted in transfer of valuable
know how to another party unless it received
contemporaneous compensation or otherwise
had a reasonable anticipation of receiving a
future benefit from those activities. In this
case, Company X’s undertaking the research
and development activities and then
providing technical data and know-how to
Company Y in year 4 is inconsistent with the
registration and subsequent exploitation of
the patent by Company Y. Therefore, the
Commissioner may impute one or more
agreements between Company X and
Company Y consistent with the economic
substance of their course of conduct, which
would afford Company X an appropriate
portion of the premium return from the
patent rights. For example, the Commissioner
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
Federal Register / Vol. 74, No. 148 / Tuesday, August 4, 2009 / Rules and Regulations
may impute a separate services agreement
that affords Company X contingent-payment
compensation for its services in year 4 for the
benefit of Company Y, consisting of making
available to Company Y technical data,
know-how, and other fruits of research and
development conducted in previous years.
These services benefited Company Y by
giving rise to and contributing to the value
of the patent rights that were ultimately
registered by Company Y. In the alternative,
the Commissioner may impute a transfer of
patentable intangible property rights from
Company X to Company Y immediately
preceding the registration of patent rights by
Company Y. The taxpayer may present
additional facts that could indicate which of
these or other alternative agreements best
reflects the economic substance of the
underlying transactions, consistent with the
parties’ course of conduct in the particular
case.
mstockstill on DSKH9S0YB1PROD with RULES3
*
*
*
*
*
(v) Property or services. Evaluating the
degree of comparability between
controlled and uncontrolled
transactions requires a comparison of
the property or services transferred in
the transactions. This comparison may
include any intangible property that is
embedded in tangible property or
services being transferred (embedded
intangibles). The comparability of the
embedded intangibles will be analyzed
using the factors listed in § 1.482–
4(c)(2)(iii)(B)(1) (comparable intangible
property). The relevance of product
comparability in evaluating the relative
reliability of the results will depend on
the method applied. For guidance
concerning the specific comparability
considerations applicable to transfers of
tangible and intangible property and
performance of services, see §§ 1.482–3
through 1.482–6 and § 1.482–9; see also
§§ 1.482–3(f), 1.482–4(f)(4), and 1.482–
9(m), dealing with the coordination of
the intangible and tangible property and
performance of services rules.
*
*
*
*
*
(f) * * *
(2) * * *
(ii) Allocation based on taxpayer’s
actual transactions–(A) In general. The
Commissioner will evaluate the results
of a transaction as actually structured by
the taxpayer unless its structure lacks
economic substance. However, the
Commissioner may consider the
alternatives available to the taxpayer in
determining whether the terms of the
controlled transaction would be
acceptable to an uncontrolled taxpayer
faced with the same alternatives and
operating under comparable
circumstances. In such cases the
Commissioner may adjust the
consideration charged in the controlled
transaction based on the cost or profit of
an alternative as adjusted to account for
VerDate Nov<24>2008
16:58 Aug 03, 2009
Jkt 217001
material differences between the
alternative and the controlled
transaction, but will not restructure the
transaction as if the alternative had been
adopted by the taxpayer. See paragraph
(d)(3) of this section (factors for
determining comparability; contractual
terms and risk); §§ 1.482–3(e), 1.482–
4(d), and 1.482–9(h) (unspecified
methods).
*
*
*
*
*
(iii) * * *
(B) Circumstances warranting
consideration of multiple year data. The
extent to which it is appropriate to
consider multiple year data depends on
the method being applied and the issue
being addressed. Circumstances that
may warrant consideration of data from
multiple years include the extent to
which complete and accurate data are
available for the taxable year under
review, the effect of business cycles in
the controlled taxpayer’s industry, or
the effects of life cycles of the product
or intangible property being examined.
Data from one or more years before or
after the taxable year under review must
ordinarily be considered for purposes of
applying the provisions of paragraph
(d)(3)(iii) of this section (risk),
paragraph (d)(4)(i) of this section
(market share strategy), § 1.482–4(f)(2)
(periodic adjustments), § 1.482–5
(comparable profits method), § 1.482–
9(f) (comparable profits method for
services), and § 1.482–9(i) (contingentpayment contractual terms for services).
On the other hand, multiple year data
ordinarily will not be considered for
purposes of applying the comparable
uncontrolled price method of § 1.482–
3(b) or the comparable uncontrolled
services price method of § 1.482–9(c)
(except to the extent that risk or market
share strategy issues are present).
*
*
*
*
*
(g) * * *
(4) Setoffs—(i) In general. If an
allocation is made under section 482
with respect to a transaction between
controlled taxpayers, the Commissioner
will take into account the effect of any
other non-arm’s length transaction
between the same controlled taxpayers
in the same taxable year which will
result in a setoff against the original
section 482 allocation. Such setoff,
however, will be taken into account
only if the requirements of paragraph
(g)(4)(ii) of this section are satisfied. If
the effect of the setoff is to change the
characterization or source of the income
or deductions, or otherwise distort
taxable income, in such a manner as to
affect the U.S. tax liability of any
member, adjustments will be made to
reflect the correct amount of each
PO 00000
Frm 00013
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
38841
category of income or deductions. For
purposes of this setoff provision, the
term arm’s length refers to the amount
defined in paragraph (b) of this section
(arm’s length standard), without regard
to the rules in § 1.482–2(a) that treat
certain interest rates as arm’s length
rates of interest.
*
*
*
*
*
(iii) * * *
Example 1. P, a U.S. corporation, renders
construction services to S, its foreign
subsidiary in Country Y, in connection with
the construction of S’s factory. An arm’s
length charge for such services determined
under § 1.482–9 would be $100,000. During
the same taxable year P makes available to S
the use of a machine to be used in the
construction of the factory, and the arm’s
length rental value of the machine is $25,000.
P bills S $125,000 for the services, but does
not charge S for the use of the machine. No
allocation will be made with respect to the
undercharge for the machine if P notifies the
district director of the basis of the claimed
setoff within 30 days after the date of the
letter from the district director transmitting
the examination report notifying P of the
proposed adjustment, establishes that the
excess amount charged for services was equal
to an arm’s length charge for the use of the
machine and that the taxable income and
income tax liabilities of P are not distorted,
and documents the correlative allocations
resulting from the proposed setoff.
*
*
*
*
*
(i) Definitions. The definitions set
forth in paragraphs (i)(1) through (i)(10)
of this section apply to this section and
§§ 1.482–2 through 1.482–9.
*
*
*
*
*
(j) * * *
(6)(i) The provisions of paragraphs
(a)(1), (d)(3)(ii)(C) Example 3, Example
4, Example 5, and Example 6, (d)(3)(v),
(f)(2)(ii)(A), (f)(2)(iii)(B), (g)(4)(i),
(g)(4)(iii), and (i) of this section are
generally applicable for taxable years
beginning after July 31, 2009.
(ii) A person may elect to apply the
provisions of paragraphs (a)(1), (b)(2)(i),
(d)(3)(ii)(C) Example 3, Example 4,
Example 5, and Example 6, (d)(3)(v),
(f)(2)(ii)(A), (f)(2)(iii)(B), (g)(4)(i),
(g)(4)(iii), and (i) of this section to
earlier taxable years in accordance with
the rules set forth in § 1.482–9(n)(2).
■ Par. 5. Section 1.482–1T is amended
by revising paragraphs (a), (b)(1), the
first sentence in paragraph (b)(2)(i),
(b)(2)(ii), the second sentence in
paragraph (b)(2)(iii), (c), (d), (e), (f), (g),
(h), (i), and (j) to read as follows:
§ 1.482–1T Allocation of income and
deductions among taxpayers (temporary).
(a) through (b)(1) [Reserved]. For
further guidance, see § 1.482–1(a)
through (b)(1).
(b)(2) * * * (i) * * * Sections 1.482–
2 through 1.482–6, 1.482–7T and 1.482–
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
38842
Federal Register / Vol. 74, No. 148 / Tuesday, August 4, 2009 / Rules and Regulations
9 provide specific methods to be used
to evaluate whether transactions
between or among members of the
controlled group satisfy the arm’s length
standard, and if they do not, to
determine the arm’s length result. * * *
(ii) [Reserved]. For further guidance,
see § 1.482–1(b)(2)(ii).
(iii) * * * Sections 1.482–4 and
1.482–9, as appropriate, provide the
specific methods to be used to
determine arm’s length results of
arrangements, including partnerships,
for sharing the costs and risks of
developing intangible property, other
that a cost sharing arrangement covered
by § 1.482–7T. * * *
(c) through (j)(5) [Reserved]. For
further guidance, see § 1.482–1(c)
through (j)(5).
(j)(6)(i) The provisions of paragraphs
(b)(2)(i) and (b)(2)(iii) of this section are
generally applicable on January 5, 2009.
(ii) [Reserved]. For further guidance,
see § 1.482–1(j)(6)(ii).
(iii) The applicability of paragraphs
(b)(2)(i) and (b)(2)(iii) of this section
expires on or before December 30, 2011.
■ Par. 6. Section 1.482–2 is amended by
revising paragraph (b), (e), and adding
paragraph (f) to read as follows:
§ 1.482–2 Determination of taxable income
in specific situations.
mstockstill on DSKH9S0YB1PROD with RULES3
*
*
*
*
*
(b) Rendering of services. For rules
governing allocations under section 482
to reflect an arm’s length charge for
controlled transactions involving the
rendering of services, see § 1.482–9.
*
*
*
*
*
(e) [Reserved]. For further guidance,
see § 1.482–2T(e).
(f) Effective/applicability date—(1) In
general. The provision of paragraph (b)
of this section is generally applicable for
taxable years beginning after July 31,
2009.
(2) Election to apply regulation to
earlier taxable years. A person may elect
to apply the provisions of paragraph (b)
of this section to earlier taxable years in
accordance with the rules set forth in
§ 1.482–9(n)(2).
■ Par. 7. Section 1.482–2T is amended
as follows:
■ 1. Revise paragraphs (a), (b), (c), (d),
and (f)(2).
■ 2. Remove the first sentence in both
paragraphs (f)(1) and (f)(3).
The revisions read as follows:
§ 1.482–2T Determination of taxable
income in specific situations (temporary).
(a) through (d) [Reserved]. For further
guidance, see § 1.482–2(a) through (d).
*
*
*
*
*
(f) * * *
VerDate Nov<24>2008
16:58 Aug 03, 2009
Jkt 217001
(2) [Reserved]. For further guidance,
see § 1.482–2(f)(2).
*
*
*
*
*
■ Par. 8. Section 1.482–4 is amended as
follows:
■ 1. Revise paragraphs (f)(3) and (f)(4).
■ 2. Add paragraphs (g) and (h).
The revisions and addition read as
follows:
§ 1.482–4 Methods to determine taxable
income in connection with a transfer of
intangible property.
*
*
*
*
*
(f) * * *
(3) Ownership of intangible
property—(i) Identification of owner—
(A) In general. The legal owner of
intangible property pursuant to the
intellectual property law of the relevant
jurisdiction, or the holder of rights
constituting an intangible property
pursuant to contractual terms (such as
the terms of a license) or other legal
provision, will be considered the sole
owner of the respective intangible
property for purposes of this section
unless such ownership is inconsistent
with the economic substance of the
underlying transactions. See § 1.482–
1(d)(3)(ii)(B) (identifying contractual
terms). If no owner of the respective
intangible property is identified under
the intellectual property law of the
relevant jurisdiction, or pursuant to
contractual terms (including terms
imputed pursuant to § 1.482–
1(d)(3)(ii)(B)) or other legal provision,
then the controlled taxpayer who has
control of the intangible property, based
on all the facts and circumstances, will
be considered the sole owner of the
intangible property for purposes of this
section.
(B) [Reserved]. For further guidance,
see § 1.482–4T(f)(3)(i)(B).
(ii) Examples. The principles of this
paragraph (f)(3) are illustrated by the
following examples:
Example 1. FP, a foreign corporation, is the
registered holder of the AA trademark in the
United States. FP licenses to its U.S.
subsidiary, USSub, the exclusive rights to
manufacture and market products in the
United States under the AA trademark. FP is
the owner of the trademark pursuant to
intellectual property law. USSub is the
owner of the license pursuant to the terms of
the license, but is not the owner of the
trademark. See paragraphs (b)(3) and (4) of
this section (defining an intangible as, among
other things, a trademark or a license).
Example 2. The facts are the same as in
Example 1. As a result of its sales and
marketing activities, USSub develops a list of
several hundred creditworthy customers that
regularly purchase AA trademarked
products. Neither the terms of the contract
between FP and USSub nor the relevant
intellectual property law specify which party
PO 00000
Frm 00014
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
owns the customer list. Because USSub has
knowledge of the contents of the list, and has
practical control over its use and
dissemination, USSub is considered the sole
owner of the customer list for purposes of
this paragraph (f)(3).
(4) Contribution to the value of
intangible property owned by another—
(i) In general. The arm’s length
consideration for a contribution by one
controlled taxpayer that develops or
enhances the value, or may be
reasonably anticipated to develop or
enhance the value, of intangible
property owned by another controlled
taxpayer will be determined in
accordance with the applicable rules
under section 482. If the consideration
for such a contribution is embedded
within the contractual terms for a
controlled transaction that involves
such intangible property, then
ordinarily no separate allocation will be
made with respect to such contribution.
In such cases, pursuant to § 1.482–
1(d)(3), the contribution must be
accounted for in evaluating the
comparability of the controlled
transaction to uncontrolled
comparables, and accordingly in
determining the arm’s length
consideration in the controlled
transaction.
(ii) Examples. The principles of this
paragraph (f)(4) are illustrated by the
following examples:
Example 1. A, a member of a controlled
group, allows B, another member of the
controlled group, to use tangible property,
such as laboratory equipment, in connection
with B’s development of an intangible that B
owns. By furnishing tangible property, A
makes a contribution to the development of
intangible property owned by another
controlled taxpayer, B. Pursuant to paragraph
(f)(4)(i) of this section, the arm’s length
charge for A’s furnishing of tangible property
will be determined under the rules for use of
tangible property in § 1.482–2(c).
Example 2. (i) Facts. FP, a foreign producer
of wristwatches, is the registered holder of
the YY trademark in the United States and
in other countries worldwide. FP enters into
an exclusive, five-year, renewable agreement
with its newly organized U.S. subsidiary,
USSub. The contractual terms of the
agreement grant USSub the exclusive right to
re-sell YY trademark wristwatches in the
United States, obligate USSub to pay a fixed
price per wristwatch throughout the entire
term of the contract, and obligate both FP and
USSub to undertake without separate
compensation specified types and levels of
marketing activities.
(ii) The consideration for FP’s and USSub’s
marketing activities, as well as the
consideration for the exclusive right to re-sell
YY trademarked merchandise in the United
States, are embedded in the transfer price
paid for the wristwatches. Accordingly,
pursuant to paragraph (f)(4)(i) of this section,
ordinarily no separate allocation would be
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
mstockstill on DSKH9S0YB1PROD with RULES3
Federal Register / Vol. 74, No. 148 / Tuesday, August 4, 2009 / Rules and Regulations
appropriate with respect to these embedded
contributions.
(iii) Whether an allocation is warranted
with respect to the transfer price for the
wristwatches is determined under §§ 1.482–
1, 1.482–3, and this section through § 1.482–
6. The comparability analysis would include
consideration of all relevant factors,
including the nature of the intangible
property embedded in the wristwatches and
the nature of the marketing activities
required under the agreement. This analysis
would also take into account that the
compensation for the activities performed by
USSub and FP, as well as the consideration
for USSub’s use of the YY trademark, is
embedded in the transfer price for the
wristwatches, rather than provided for in
separate agreements. See §§ 1.482–3(f) and
1.482–9(m)(4).
Example 3. (i) Facts. FP, a foreign producer
of athletic gear, is the registered holder of the
AA trademark in the United States and in
other countries. In year 1, FP licenses to a
newly organized U.S. subsidiary, USSub, the
exclusive rights to use certain manufacturing
and marketing intangible property to
manufacture and market athletic gear in the
United States under the AA trademark. The
license agreement obligates USSub to pay a
royalty based on sales of trademarked
merchandise. The license agreement also
obligates FP and USSub to perform without
separate compensation specified types and
levels of marketing activities. In year 1,
USSub manufactures and sells athletic gear
under the AA trademark in the United States.
(ii) The consideration for FP’s and USSub’s
respective marketing activities is embedded
in the contractual terms of the license for the
AA trademark. Accordingly, pursuant to
paragraph (f)(4)(i) of this section, ordinarily
no separate allocation would be appropriate
with respect to the embedded contributions
in year 1. See § 1.482–9(m)(4).
(iii) Whether an allocation is warranted
with respect to the royalty under the license
agreement would be analyzed under § 1.482–
1, and this section through § 1.482–6. The
comparability analysis would include
consideration of all relevant factors, such as
the term and geographical exclusivity of the
license, the nature of the intangible property
subject to the license, and the nature of the
marketing activities required to be
undertaken pursuant to the license. Pursuant
to paragraph (f)(4)(i) of this section, the
analysis would also take into account the fact
that the compensation for the marketing
services is embedded in the royalty paid for
use of the AA trademark, rather than
provided for in a separate services agreement.
For illustrations of application of the best
method rule, see § 1.482–8 Examples 10, 11,
and 12.
Example 4. (i) Facts. The year 1 facts are
the same as in Example 3, with the following
exceptions. In year 2, USSub undertakes
certain incremental marketing activities in
addition to those required by the contractual
terms of the license for the AA trademark
executed in year 1. The parties do not
execute a separate agreement with respect to
these incremental marketing activities
performed by USSub. The license agreement
executed in year 1 is of sufficient duration
VerDate Nov<24>2008
16:58 Aug 03, 2009
Jkt 217001
that it is reasonable to anticipate that USSub
will obtain the benefit of its incremental
activities, in the form of increased sales or
revenues of trademarked products in the U.S.
market.
(ii) To the extent that it was reasonable to
anticipate that USSub’s incremental
marketing activities would increase the value
only of USSub’s intangible property (that is,
USSub’s license to use the AA trademark for
a specified term), and not the value of the AA
trademark owned by FP, USSub’s
incremental activities do not constitute a
contribution for which an allocation is
warranted under paragraph (f)(4)(i) of this
section.
Example 5. (i) Facts. The year 1 facts are
the same as in Example 3. In year 2, FP and
USSub enter into a separate services
agreement that obligates USSub to perform
certain incremental marketing activities to
promote AA trademark athletic gear in the
United States, above and beyond the
activities specified in the license agreement
executed in year 1. In year 2, USSub begins
to perform these incremental activities,
pursuant to the separate services agreement
with FP.
(ii) Whether an allocation is warranted
with respect to USSub’s incremental
marketing activities covered by the separate
services agreement would be evaluated under
§§ 1.482–1 and 1.482–9, including a
comparison of the compensation provided for
the services with the results obtained under
a method pursuant to § 1.482–9, selected and
applied in accordance with the best method
rule of § 1.482–1(c).
(iii) Whether an allocation is warranted
with respect to the royalty under the license
agreement is determined under § 1.482–1,
and this section through § 1.482–6. The
comparability analysis would include
consideration of all relevant factors, such as
the term and geographical exclusivity of the
license, the nature of the intangible property
subject to the license, and the nature of the
marketing activities required to be
undertaken pursuant to the license. The
comparability analysis would take into
account that the compensation for the
incremental activities by USSub is provided
for in the separate services agreement, rather
than embedded in the royalty paid for use of
the AA trademark. For illustrations of
application of the best method rule, see
§ 1.482–8 Examples 10, 11, and 12.
Example 6. (i) Facts. The year 1 facts are
the same as in Example 3. In year 2, FP and
USSub enter into a separate services
agreement that obligates FP to perform
incremental marketing activities, not
specified in the year 1 license, by advertising
AA trademarked athletic gear in selected
international sporting events, such as the
Olympics and the soccer World Cup. FP’s
corporate advertising department develops
and coordinates these special promotions.
The separate services agreement obligates
USSub to pay an amount to FP for the benefit
to USSub that may reasonably be anticipated
as the result of FP’s incremental activities.
The separate services agreement is not a
qualified cost sharing arrangement under
§ 1.482–7T. FP begins to perform the
incremental activities in year 2 pursuant to
the separate services agreement.
PO 00000
Frm 00015
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
38843
(ii) Whether an allocation is warranted
with respect to the incremental marketing
activities performed by FP under the separate
services agreement would be evaluated under
§ 1.482–9. Under the circumstances, it is
reasonable to anticipate that FP’s activities
would increase the value of USSub’s license
as well as the value of FP’s trademark.
Accordingly, the incremental activities by FP
may constitute in part a controlled services
transaction for which USSub must
compensate FP. The analysis of whether an
allocation is warranted would include a
comparison of the compensation provided for
the services with the results obtained under
a method pursuant to § 1.482–9, selected and
applied in accordance with the best method
rule of § 1.482–1(c).
(iii) Whether an allocation is appropriate
with respect to the royalty under the license
agreement would be evaluated under
§§ 1.482–1 through 1.482–3, this section, and
§§ 1.482–5 and 1.482–6. The comparability
analysis would include consideration of all
relevant factors, such as the term and
geographical exclusivity of USSub’s license,
the nature of the intangible property subject
to the license, and the marketing activities
required to be undertaken by both FP and
USSub pursuant to the license. This
comparability analysis would take into
account that the compensation for the
incremental activities performed by FP was
provided for in the separate services
agreement, rather than embedded in the
royalty paid for use of the AA trademark. For
illustrations of application of the best method
rule, see § 1.482–8, Example 10, Example 11,
and Example 12.
*
*
*
*
*
(g) [Reserved]. For further guidance,
see § 1.482–4T(g).
(h) Effective/applicability date—(1) In
general. The provisions of paragraphs
(f)(3)(i)(A), (f)(3)(ii), and (f)(4) of this
section are generally applicable for
taxable years beginning after July 31,
2009.
(2) Election to apply regulation to
earlier taxable years. A person may elect
to apply the provisions of paragraphs
(f)(3)(i)(A), (f)(3)(ii), and (f)(4) of this
section to earlier taxable years in
accordance with the rules set forth in
§ 1.482–9(n)(2).
■ Par. 9. Section 1.482–4T is amended
as follows:
1. Revise paragraphs (a), (b), (c), (d),
(e), (f)(1), (f)(2), (f)(3)(i)(A), (f)(3)(ii),
(f)(4), (f)(5), (f)(6), and (h)(3).
■ 2. Redesignate paragraph (h)(1) as
paragraph (h), revise the heading and
remove the first sentence in newlydesignated paragraph (h).
■ 3. Remove paragraph (h)(2).
■ 4. Redesignate paragraph (h)(3) as
paragraph (i).
The revisions read as follows:
■
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
38844
Federal Register / Vol. 74, No. 148 / Tuesday, August 4, 2009 / Rules and Regulations
§ 1.482–4T Methods to determine taxable
income in connection with a transfer of
intangible property (temporary).
(a) through (f)(3)(i)(A) [Reserved]. For
further guidance, see § 1.482–4(a)
through (f)(3)(i)(A).
(B) * * *
(f)(3)(ii) through (f)(6) [Reserved]. For
further guidance, see § 1.482–4(f)(3)(ii)
through (f)(6)
(g) * * *
(h) Effective/applicability date. * * *
*
*
*
*
*
■ Par. 10. Section 1.482–6 is amended
by revising paragraphs (c)(2)(ii)(B)(1),
(c)(2)(ii)(D), (c)(3)(i)(A), (c)(3)(i)(B),
(c)(3)(ii)(D), and adding paragraph (d) to
read as follows:
§ 1.482–6
Profit split method.
mstockstill on DSKH9S0YB1PROD with RULES3
*
*
*
*
*
(c) * * *
(2) * * *
(ii) * * *
(B) Comparability—(1) In general. The
degree of comparability between the
controlled and uncontrolled taxpayers is
determined by applying the
comparability provisions of § 1.482–
1(d). The comparable profit split
compares the division of operating
profits among the controlled taxpayers
to the division of operating profits
among uncontrolled taxpayers engaged
in similar activities under similar
circumstances. Although all of the
factors described in § 1.482–1(d)(3) must
be considered, comparability under this
method is particularly dependent on the
considerations described under the
comparable profits method in § 1.482–
5(c)(2) or § 1.482–9(f)(2)(iii) because this
method is based on a comparison of the
operating profit of the controlled and
uncontrolled taxpayers. In addition,
because the contractual terms of the
relationship among the participants in
the relevant business activity will be a
principal determinant of the allocation
of functions and risks among them,
comparability under this method also
depends particularly on the degree of
similarity of the contractual terms of the
controlled and uncontrolled taxpayers.
Finally, the comparable profit split may
not be used if the combined operating
profit (as a percentage of the combined
assets) of the uncontrolled comparables
varies significantly from that earned by
the controlled taxpayers.
*
*
*
*
*
(D) Other factors affecting reliability.
Like the methods described in §§ 1.482–
3, 1.482–4, 1.482–5, and 1.482–9, the
comparable profit split relies
exclusively on external market
benchmarks. As indicated in § 1.482–
1(c)(2)(i), as the degree of comparability
between the controlled and
VerDate Nov<24>2008
16:58 Aug 03, 2009
Jkt 217001
uncontrolled transactions increases, the
relative weight accorded the analysis
under this method will increase. In
addition, the reliability of the analysis
under this method may be enhanced by
the fact that all parties to the controlled
transaction are evaluated under the
comparable profit split. However, the
reliability of the results of an analysis
based on information from all parties to
a transaction is affected by the
reliability of the data and the
assumptions pertaining to each party to
the controlled transaction. Thus, if the
data and assumptions are significantly
more reliable with respect to one of the
parties than with respect to the others,
a different method, focusing solely on
the results of that party, may yield more
reliable results.
*
*
*
*
*
(3) * * *
(i) * * *
(A) Allocate income to routine
contributions. The first step allocates
operating income to each party to the
controlled transactions to provide a
market return for its routine
contributions to the relevant business
activity. Routine contributions are
contributions of the same or a similar
kind to those made by uncontrolled
taxpayers involved in similar business
activities for which it is possible to
identify market returns. Routine
contributions ordinarily include
contributions of tangible property,
services and intangible property that are
generally owned by uncontrolled
taxpayers engaged in similar activities.
A functional analysis is required to
identify these contributions according to
the functions performed, risks assumed,
and resources employed by each of the
controlled taxpayers. Market returns for
the routine contributions should be
determined by reference to the returns
achieved by uncontrolled taxpayers
engaged in similar activities, consistent
with the methods described in §§ 1.482–
3, 1.482–4, 1.482–5 and 1.482–9.
(B) Allocate residual profit—(1)
Nonroutine contributions generally. The
allocation of income to the controlled
taxpayer’s routine contributions will not
reflect profits attributable to each
controlled taxpayer’s contributions to
the relevant business activity that are
not routine (nonroutine contributions).
A nonroutine contribution is a
contribution that is not accounted for as
a routine contribution. Thus, in cases
where such nonroutine contributions
are present there normally will be an
unallocated residual profit after the
allocation of income described in
paragraph (c)(3)(i)(A) of this section.
Under this second step, the residual
PO 00000
Frm 00016
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
profit generally should be divided
among the controlled taxpayers based
upon the relative value of their
nonroutine contributions to the relevant
business activity. The relative value of
the nonroutine contributions of each
taxpayer should be measured in a
manner that most reliably reflects each
nonroutine contribution made to the
controlled transaction and each
controlled taxpayer’s role in the
nonroutine contributions. If the
nonroutine contribution by one of the
controlled taxpayers is also used in
other business activities (such as
transactions with other controlled
taxpayers), an appropriate allocation of
the value of the nonroutine contribution
must be made among all the business
activities in which it is used.
(2) Nonroutine contributions of
intangible property. In many cases,
nonroutine contributions of a taxpayer
to the relevant business activity may be
contributions of intangible property. For
purposes of paragraph (c)(3)(i)(B)(1) of
this section, the relative value of
nonroutine intangible property
contributed by taxpayers may be
measured by external market
benchmarks that reflect the fair market
value of such intangible property.
Alternatively, the relative value of
nonroutine intangible property
contributions may be estimated by the
capitalized cost of developing the
intangible property and all related
improvements and updates, less an
appropriate amount of amortization
based on the useful life of each
intangible property. Finally, if the
intangible property development
expenditures of the parties are relatively
constant over time and the useful life of
the intangible property contributed by
all parties is approximately the same,
the amount of actual expenditures in
recent years may be used to estimate the
relative value of nonroutine intangible
property contributions.
*
*
*
*
*
(ii) * * *
(D) Other factors affecting reliability.
Like the methods described in §§ 1.482–
3, 1.482–4, 1.482–5, and 1.482–9, the
first step of the residual profit split
relies exclusively on external market
benchmarks. As indicated in § 1.482–
1(c)(2)(i), as the degree of comparability
between the controlled and
uncontrolled transactions increases, the
relative weight accorded the analysis
under this method will increase. In
addition, to the extent the allocation of
profits in the second step is not based
on external market benchmarks, the
reliability of the analysis will be
decreased in relation to an analysis
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
Federal Register / Vol. 74, No. 148 / Tuesday, August 4, 2009 / Rules and Regulations
under a method that relies on market
benchmarks. Finally, the reliability of
the analysis under this method may be
enhanced by the fact that all parties to
the controlled transaction are evaluated
under the residual profit split. However,
the reliability of the results of an
analysis based on information from all
parties to a transaction is affected by the
reliability of the data and the
assumptions pertaining to each party to
the controlled transaction. Thus, if the
data and assumptions are significantly
more reliable with respect to one of the
parties than with respect to the others,
a different method, focusing solely on
the results of that party, may yield more
reliable results.
*
*
*
*
*
(d) Effective/applicability date—(1) In
general. The provisions of paragraphs
(c)(2)(ii)(B)(1) and (D), (c)(3)(i)(A) and
(B), and (c)(3)(ii)(D) of this section are
generally applicable for taxable years
beginning after July 31, 2009.
(2) Election to apply regulation to
earlier taxable years. A person may elect
to apply the provisions of paragraphs
(c)(2)(ii)(B)(1) and (D), (c)(3)(i)(A) and
(B), and (c)(3)(ii)(D) of this section to
earlier taxable years in accordance with
the rules set forth in § 1.482–9(n)(2).
§ 1.482–6T
[Removed]
Par. 11. Section 1.482–6T is removed.
■ Par. 12. Section 1.482–8 is amended
by revising paragraph (b) Examples 10,
11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17 and 18, and
adding paragraph (c) to read as follows:
■
§ 1.482–8
rule.
mstockstill on DSKH9S0YB1PROD with RULES3
*
Examples of the best method
*
*
(b) * * *
*
*
Example 10. Cost of services plus method
preferred to other methods. (i) FP designs
and manufactures consumer electronic
devices that incorporate advanced
technology. In year 1, FP introduces Product
X, an entertainment device targeted primarily
at the youth market. FP’s wholly-owned,
exclusive U.S. distributor, USSub, sells
Product X in the U.S. market. USSub hires
an independent marketing firm, Agency A, to
promote Product X in the U.S. market.
Agency A has successfully promoted other
electronic products on behalf of other
uncontrolled parties. USSub executes a oneyear, renewable contract with Agency A that
requires it to develop the market for Product
X, within an annual budget set by USSub. In
years 1 through 3, Agency A develops
advertising, buys media, and sponsors events
featuring Product X. Agency A receives a
markup of 25% on all expenses of promoting
Product X, with the exception of media buys,
which are reimbursed at cost. During year 3,
sales of Product X decrease sharply, as
Product X is displaced by competitors’
products. At the end of year 3, sales of
Product X are discontinued.
VerDate Nov<24>2008
16:58 Aug 03, 2009
Jkt 217001
(ii) Prior to the start of year 4, FP develops
a new entertainment device, Product Y. Like
Product X, Product Y is intended for sale to
the youth market, but it is marketed under a
new trademark distinct from that used for
Product X. USSub decides to perform all U.S.
market promotion for Product Y. USSub hires
key Agency A staff members who handled
the successful Product X campaign. To
promote Product Y, USSub intends to use
methods similar to those used successfully
by Agency A to promote Product X (print
advertising, media, event sponsorship, etc.).
FP and USSub enter into a one-year,
renewable agreement concerning promotion
of Product Y in the U.S. market. Under the
agreement, FP compensates USSub for
promoting Product Y, based on a cost of
services plus markup of A%. Third-party
media buys by USSub in connection with
Product Y are reimbursed at cost.
(iii) Assume that under the contractual
arrangements between FP and USSub, the
arm’s length consideration for Product Y and
the trademark or other intangible property
may be determined reliably under one or
more transfer pricing methods. At issue in
this example is the separate evaluation of the
arm’s length compensation for the year 4
promotional activities performed by USSub
pursuant to its contract with FP.
(iv) USSub’s accounting records contain
reliable data that separately state the costs
incurred to promote Product Y. A functional
analysis indicates that USSub’s activities to
promote Product Y in year 4 are similar to
activities performed by Agency A during
years 1 through 3 under the contract with FP.
In other respects, no material differences
exist in the market conditions or the
promotional activities performed in year 4, as
compared to those in years 1 through 3.
(v) It is possible to identify uncontrolled
distributors or licensees of electronic
products that perform, as one component of
their business activities, promotional
activities similar to those performed by
USSub. However, it is unlikely that publicly
available accounting data from these
companies would allow computation of the
comparable transactional costs or total
services costs associated with the marketing
or promotional activities that these entities
perform, as one component of business
activities. If that were possible, the
comparable profits method for services might
provide a reliable measure of an arm’s length
result. The functional analysis of the
marketing activities performed by USSub in
year 4 indicates that they are similar to the
activities performed by Agency A in years 1
through 3 for Product X. Because reliable
information is available concerning the
markup on costs charged in a comparable
uncontrolled transaction, the most reliable
measure of an arm’s length price is the cost
of services plus method in § 1.482–9(e).
Example 11. CPM for services preferred to
other methods. (i) FP manufactures furniture
and accessories for residential use. FP sells
its products to retailers in Europe under the
trademark, ‘‘Moda.’’ FP holds all worldwide
rights to the trademark, including in the
United States. USSub is FP’s wholly-owned
subsidiary in the U.S. market and the
exclusive U.S. distributor of FP’s
PO 00000
Frm 00017
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
38845
merchandise. Historically, USSub dealt only
with specialized designers in the U.S. market
and advertised in trade publications targeted
to this market. Although items sold in the
U.S. and Europe are physically identical,
USSub’s U.S. customers generally resell the
merchandise as non-branded merchandise.
(ii) FP retains an independent firm to
evaluate the feasibility of selling FP’s
trademarked merchandise in the general
wholesale and retail market in the United
States. The study concludes that this segment
of the U.S. market, which is not exploited by
USSub, may generate substantial profits.
Based on this study, FP enters into a separate
agreement with USSub, which provides that
USSub will develop this market in the
United States for the benefit of FP. USSub
separately accounts for personnel expenses,
overhead, and out-of-pocket costs attributable
to the initial stage of the marketing campaign
(Phase I). USSub receives as compensation its
costs, plus a markup of X%, for activities in
Phase I. At the end of Phase I, FP will
evaluate the program. If success appears
likely, USSub will begin full-scale
distribution of trademarked merchandise in
the new market segment, pursuant to
agreements negotiated with FP at that time.
(iii) Assume that under the contractual
arrangements in effect between FP and
USSub, the arm’s length consideration for the
merchandise and the trademark or other
intangible property may be determined
reliably under one or more transfer pricing
methods. At issue in this example is the
separate evaluation of the arm’s length
compensation for the marketing activities
conducted by USSub in years 1 and
following.
(iv) A functional analysis reveals that
USSub’s activities consist primarily of
modifying the promotional materials created
by FP, negotiating media buys, and arranging
promotional events. FP separately
compensates USSub for all Phase I activities,
and detailed accounting information is
available regarding the costs of these
activities. The Phase I activities of USSub are
similar to those of uncontrolled companies
that perform, as their primary business
activity, a range of advertising and media
relations activities on a contract basis for
uncontrolled parties.
(v) No information is available concerning
the comparable uncontrolled prices for
services in transactions similar to those
engaged in by FP and USSub. Nor is any
information available concerning
uncontrolled transactions that would allow
application of the cost of services plus
method. It is possible to identify
uncontrolled distributors or licensees of
home furnishings that perform, as one
component of their business activities,
promotional activities similar to those
performed by USSub. However, it is unlikely
that publicly available accounting data from
these companies would allow computation of
the comparable transactional costs or total
services costs associated with the marketing
or promotional activities that these entities
performed, as one component of their
business activities. On the other hand, it is
possible to identify uncontrolled advertising
and media relations companies, the principal
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
mstockstill on DSKH9S0YB1PROD with RULES3
38846
Federal Register / Vol. 74, No. 148 / Tuesday, August 4, 2009 / Rules and Regulations
business activities of which are similar to the
Phase I activities of USSub. Under these
circumstances, the most reliable measure of
an arm’s length price is the comparable
profits method of § 1.482–9(f). The
uncontrolled advertising comparables’
treatment of material items, such as
classification of items as cost of goods sold
or selling, general, and administrative
expenses, may differ from that of USSub.
Such inconsistencies in accounting treatment
between the uncontrolled comparables and
the tested party, or among the comparables,
are less important when using the ratio of
operating profit to total services costs under
the comparable profits method for services in
§ 1.482–9(f). Under this method, the
operating profit of USSub from the Phase I
activities is compared to the operating profit
of uncontrolled parties that perform general
advertising and media relations as their
primary business activity.
Example 12. Residual profit split preferred
to other methods. (i) USP is a manufacturer
of athletic apparel sold under the AA
trademark, to which FP owns the worldwide
rights. USP sells AA trademark apparel in
countries throughout the world, but prior to
year 1, USP did not sell its merchandise in
Country X. In year 1, USP acquires an
uncontrolled Country X company which
becomes its wholly-owned subsidiary, XSub.
USP enters into an exclusive distribution
arrangement with XSub in Country X. Before
being acquired by USP in year 1, XSub
distributed athletic apparel purchased from
uncontrolled suppliers and resold that
merchandise to retailers. After being acquired
by USP in year 1, XSub continues to
distribute merchandise from uncontrolled
suppliers and also begins to distribute AA
trademark apparel. Under a separate
agreement with USP, XSub uses its best
efforts to promote the AA trademark in
Country X, with the goal of maximizing sales
volume and revenues from AA merchandise.
(ii) Prior to year 1, USP executed long-term
endorsement contracts with several
prominent professional athletes. These
contracts give USP the right to use the names
and likenesses of the athletes in any country
in which AA merchandise is sold during the
term of the contract. These contracts remain
in effect for five years, starting in year 1.
Before being acquired by USP, XSub renewed
a long-term agreement with SportMart, an
uncontrolled company that owns a
nationwide chain of sporting goods retailers
in Country X. XSub has been SportMart’s
primary supplier from the time that
SportMart began operations. Under the
agreement, SportMart will provide AA
merchandise preferred shelf-space and will
feature AA merchandise at no charge in its
print ads and seasonal promotions. In
consideration for these commitments, USP
and XSub grant SportMart advance access to
new products and the right to use the
professional athletes under contract with
USP in SportMart advertisements featuring
AA merchandise (subject to approval of
content by USP).
(iii) Assume that it is possible to segregate
all transactions by XSub that involve
distribution of merchandise acquired from
uncontrolled distributors (non-controlled
VerDate Nov<24>2008
16:58 Aug 03, 2009
Jkt 217001
transactions). In addition, assume that, apart
from the activities undertaken by USP and
XSub to promote AA apparel in Country X,
the arm’s length compensation for other
functions performed by USP and XSub in the
Country X market in years 1 and following
can be reliably determined. At issue in this
Example 12 is the application of the residual
profit split analysis to determine the
appropriate division between USP and XSub
of the balance of the operating profits from
the Country X market, that is the portion
attributable to nonroutine contributions to
the marketing and promotional activities.
(iv) A functional analysis of the marketing
and promotional activities conducted in the
Country X market, as described in this
example, indicates that both USP and XSub
made nonroutine contributions to the
business activity. USP contributed the longterm endorsement contracts with
professional athletes. XSub contributed its
long-term contractual rights with SportMart,
which were made more valuable by its
successful, long-term relationship with
SportMart.
(v) Based on the facts and circumstances,
including the fact that both USP and XSub
made valuable nonroutine contributions to
the marketing and promotional activities and
an analysis of the availability (or lack thereof)
of comparable and reliable market
benchmarks, the Commissioner determines
that the most reliable measure of an arm’s
length result is the residual profit split
method in § 1.482–9(g). The residual profit
split analysis would take into account both
routine and nonroutine contributions by USP
and XSub, in order to determine an
appropriate allocation of the combined
operating profits in the Country X market
from the sale of AA merchandise and from
related promotional and marketing activities.
Examples 13 through 18. [Reserved].
For further guidance, see § 1.482–8T(b)
Examples 13 through 18.
(c) Effective/applicability date—(1) In
general. The provisions of paragraph (b)
Examples 10, 11, and 12 of this section
are generally applicable for taxable
years beginning after July 31, 2009.
(2) Election to apply regulation to
earlier taxable years. A person may elect
to apply the provisions of paragraph (b)
Examples 10, 11, and 12 of this section
to earlier taxable years in accordance
with the rules set forth in § 1.482–
9(n)(2).
■ Par. 13. Section 1.482–8T is amended
as follows:
■ 1. Revise paragraph (b) Examples 1, 2,
3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11 and 12.
■ 2. Redesignate paragraph (c)(1) as
paragraph (c), revise the heading and
remove the first sentence in newlydesignated paragraph (c).
■ 3. Remove paragraph (c)(2).
■ 4. Redesignate paragraph (c)(3) as
paragraph (d) and remove the first
sentence.
The revisions read as follows:
PO 00000
Frm 00018
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
§ 1.482–8T Examples of the best method
rule (temporary).
*
*
*
*
*
(b) Examples 1 through 12.
[Reserved]. For further guidance, see
§ 1.482–8(b) Examples 1 through 12.
*
*
*
*
*
(c) Effective/applicability date. * * *
*
*
*
*
*
■ Par. 14. Section 1.482–9 is added to
read as follows:
§ 1.482–9 Methods to determine taxable
income in connection with a controlled
services transaction.
(a) In general. The arm’s length
amount charged in a controlled services
transaction must be determined under
one of the methods provided for in this
section. Each method must be applied
in accordance with the provisions of
§ 1.482–1, including the best method
rule of § 1.482–1(c), the comparability
analysis of § 1.482–1(d), and the arm’s
length range of § 1.482–1(e), except as
those provisions are modified in this
section. The methods are—
(1) The services cost method,
described in paragraph (b) of this
section;
(2) The comparable uncontrolled
services price method, described in
paragraph (c) of this section;
(3) The gross services margin method,
described in paragraph (d) of this
section;
(4) The cost of services plus method,
described in paragraph (e) of this
section;
(5) The comparable profits method,
described in § 1.482–5 and in paragraph
(f) of this section;
(6) The profit split method, described
in § 1.482–6 and in paragraph (g) of this
section; and
(7) Unspecified methods, described in
paragraph (h) of this section.
(b) Services cost method—(1) In
general. The services cost method
evaluates whether the amount charged
for certain services is arm’s length by
reference to the total services costs (as
defined in paragraph (j) of this section)
with no markup. If a taxpayer applies
the services cost method in accordance
with the rules of this paragraph (b), then
it will be considered the best method for
purposes of § 1.482–1(c), and the
Commissioner’s allocations will be
limited to adjusting the amount charged
for such services to the properly
determined amount of such total
services costs.
(2) Eligibility for the services cost
method. To apply the services cost
method to a service in accordance with
the rules of this paragraph (b), all of the
following requirements must be
satisfied with respect to the service—
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
mstockstill on DSKH9S0YB1PROD with RULES3
Federal Register / Vol. 74, No. 148 / Tuesday, August 4, 2009 / Rules and Regulations
(i) The service is a covered service as
defined in paragraph (b)(3) of this
section;
(ii) The service is not an excluded
activity as defined in paragraph (b)(4) of
this section;
(iii) The service is not precluded from
constituting a covered service by the
business judgment rule described in
paragraph (b)(5) of this section; and
(iv) Adequate books and records are
maintained as described in paragraph
(b)(6) of this section.
(3) Covered services. For purposes of
this paragraph (b), covered services
consist of a controlled service
transaction or a group of controlled
service transactions (see § 1.482–
1(f)(2)(i) (aggregation of transactions))
that meet the definition of specified
covered services or low margin covered
services.
(i) Specified covered services.
Specified covered services are
controlled services transactions that the
Commissioner specifies by revenue
procedure. Services will be included in
such revenue procedure based upon the
Commissioner’s determination that the
specified covered services are support
services common among taxpayers
across industry sectors and generally do
not involve a significant median
comparable markup on total services
costs. For the definition of the median
comparable markup on total services
costs, see paragraph (b)(3)(ii) of this
section. The Commissioner may add to,
subtract from, or otherwise revise the
specified covered services described in
the revenue procedure by subsequent
revenue procedure, which amendments
will ordinarily be prospective only in
effect.
(ii) Low margin covered services. Low
margin covered services are controlled
services transactions for which the
median comparable markup on total
services costs is less than or equal to
seven percent. For purposes of this
paragraph (b), the median comparable
markup on total services costs means
the excess of the arm’s length price of
the controlled services transaction
determined under the general section
482 regulations without regard to this
paragraph (b), using the interquartile
range described in § 1.482–1(e)(2)(iii)(C)
and as necessary adjusting to the
median of such interquartile range, over
total services costs, expressed as a
percentage of total services costs.
(4) Excluded activity. The following
types of activities are excluded
activities:
(i) Manufacturing.
(ii) Production.
(iii) Extraction, exploration, or
processing of natural resources.
VerDate Nov<24>2008
16:58 Aug 03, 2009
Jkt 217001
(iv) Construction.
(v) Reselling, distribution, acting as a
sales or purchasing agent, or acting
under a commission or other similar
arrangement.
(vi) Research, development, or
experimentation.
(vii) Engineering or scientific.
(viii) Financial transactions, including
guarantees.
(ix) Insurance or reinsurance.
(5) Not services that contribute
significantly to fundamental risks of
business success or failure. A service
cannot constitute a covered service
unless the taxpayer reasonably
concludes in its business judgment that
the service does not contribute
significantly to key competitive
advantages, core capabilities, or
fundamental risks of success or failure
in one or more trades or businesses of
the controlled group, as defined in
§ 1.482–1(i)(6). In evaluating the
reasonableness of the conclusion
required by this paragraph (b)(5),
consideration will be given to all the
facts and circumstances.
(6) Adequate books and records.
Permanent books of account and records
are maintained for as long as the costs
with respect to the covered services are
incurred by the renderer. Such books
and records must include a statement
evidencing the taxpayer’s intention to
apply the services cost method to
evaluate the arm’s length charge for
such services. Such books and records
must be adequate to permit verification
by the Commissioner of the total
services costs incurred by the renderer,
including a description of the services
in question, identification of the
renderer and the recipient of such
services, and sufficient documentation
to allow verification of the methods
used to allocate and apportion such
costs to the services in question in
accordance with paragraph (k) of this
section.
(7) Shared services arrangement—(i)
In general. If the services cost method is
used to evaluate the amount charged for
covered services, and such services are
the subject of a shared services
arrangement, then the arm’s length
charge to each participant for such
services will be the portion of the total
costs of the services otherwise
determined under the services cost
method of this paragraph (b) that is
properly allocated to such participant
pursuant to the arrangement.
(ii) Requirements for shared services
arrangement. A shared services
arrangement must meet the
requirements described in this
paragraph (b)(7).
PO 00000
Frm 00019
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
38847
(A) Eligibility. To be eligible for
treatment under this paragraph (b)(7), a
shared services arrangement must—
(1) Include two or more participants;
(2) Include as participants all
controlled taxpayers that reasonably
anticipate a benefit (as defined under
paragraph (l)(3)(i) of this section) from
one or more covered services specified
in the shared services arrangement; and
(3) Be structured such that each
covered service (or each reasonable
aggregation of services within the
meaning of paragraph (b)(7)(iii)(B) of
this section) confers a benefit on at least
one participant in the shared services
arrangement.
(B) Allocation. The costs for covered
services must be allocated among the
participants based on their respective
shares of the reasonably anticipated
benefits from those services, without
regard to whether the anticipated
benefits are in fact realized. Reasonably
anticipated benefits are benefits as
defined in paragraph (l)(3)(i) of this
section. The allocation of costs must
provide the most reliable measure of the
participants’ respective shares of the
reasonably anticipated benefits under
the principles of the best method rule.
See § 1.482–1(c). The allocation must be
applied on a consistent basis for all
participants and services. The allocation
to each participant in each taxable year
must reasonably reflect that
participant’s respective share of
reasonably anticipated benefits for such
taxable year. If the taxpayer reasonably
concluded that the shared services
arrangement (including any aggregation
pursuant to paragraph (b)(7)(iii)(B) of
this section) allocated costs for covered
services on a basis that most reliably
reflects the participants’ respective
shares of the reasonably anticipated
benefits attributable to such services, as
provided for in this paragraph (b)(7),
then the Commissioner may not adjust
such allocation basis.
(C) Documentation. The taxpayer
must maintain sufficient documentation
to establish that the requirements of this
paragraph (b)(7) are satisfied, and
include—
(1) A statement evidencing the
taxpayer’s intention to apply the
services cost method to evaluate the
arm’s length charge for covered services
pursuant to a shared services
arrangement;
(2) A list of the participants and the
renderer or renderers of covered
services under the shared services
arrangement;
(3) A description of the basis of
allocation to all participants, consistent
with the participants’ respective shares
of reasonably anticipated benefits; and
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
mstockstill on DSKH9S0YB1PROD with RULES3
38848
Federal Register / Vol. 74, No. 148 / Tuesday, August 4, 2009 / Rules and Regulations
(4) A description of any aggregation of
covered services for purposes of the
shared services arrangement, and an
indication whether this aggregation (if
any) differs from the aggregation used to
evaluate the median comparable
markup for any low margin covered
services described in paragraph (b)(3)(ii)
of this section.
(iii) Definitions and special rules—(A)
Participant. A participant is a controlled
taxpayer that reasonably anticipates
benefits from covered services subject to
a shared services arrangement that
substantially complies with the
requirements described in this
paragraph (b)(7).
(B) Aggregation. Two or more covered
services may be aggregated in a
reasonable manner taking into account
all the facts and circumstances,
including whether the relative
magnitude of reasonably anticipated
benefits of the participants sharing the
costs of such aggregated services may be
reasonably reflected by the allocation
basis employed pursuant to paragraph
(b)(7)(ii)(B) of this section. The
aggregation of services under a shared
services arrangement may differ from
the aggregation used to evaluate the
median comparable markup for any low
margin covered services described in
paragraph (b)(3)(ii) of this section,
provided that such alternative
aggregation can be implemented on a
reasonable basis, including
appropriately identifying and isolating
relevant costs, as necessary.
(C) Coordination with cost sharing
arrangements. To the extent that an
allocation is made to a participant in a
shared services arrangement that is also
a participant in a cost sharing
arrangement subject to § 1.482–7T, such
amount with respect to covered services
is first allocated pursuant to the shared
services arrangement under this
paragraph (b)(7). Costs allocated
pursuant to a shared services
arrangement may (if applicable) be
further allocated between the intangible
property development activity under
§ 1.482–7T and other activities of the
participant.
(8) Examples. The application of this
section is illustrated by the following
examples. No inference is intended
whether the presence or absence of one
or more facts is determinative of the
conclusion in any example. For
purposes of Examples 1 through 14,
assume that Company P and its
subsidiaries, Company Q and Company
R, are corporations and members of the
same group of controlled entities (PQR
Controlled Group). For purposes of
Example 15, assume that Company P
and its subsidiary, Company S, are
VerDate Nov<24>2008
16:58 Aug 03, 2009
Jkt 217001
corporations and members of the same
group of controlled entities (PS
Controlled Group). For purposes of
Examples 16 through 24, assume that
Company P and its subsidiaries,
Company X, Company Y, and Company
Z, are corporations and members of the
same group of controlled entities (PXYZ
Group) and that Company P and its
subsidiaries satisfy all of the
requirements for a shared services
arrangement specified in paragraphs
(b)(7)(ii) and (iii) of this section.
Example 1. Data entry services. (i)
Company P, Company Q, and Company R
own and operate hospitals. Each owns an
electronic database of medical information
gathered by doctors and nurses during
interviews and treatment of its patients. All
three databases are maintained and updated
by Company P’s administrative support
employees who perform data entry activities
by entering medical information from the
paper records of Company P, Company Q,
and Company R into their respective
databases.
(ii) Assume that these services relating to
data entry are specified covered services
within the meaning of paragraph (b)(3)(i) of
this section. Under the facts and
circumstances of the business of the PQR
Controlled Group, the taxpayer could
reasonably conclude that these services do
not contribute significantly to the controlled
group’s key competitive advantages, core
capabilities, or fundamental risks of success
or failure in the group’s business. If these
services meet the other requirements of this
paragraph (b), Company P will be eligible to
charge these services to Company Q and
Company R in accordance with the services
cost method.
Example 2. Data entry services. (i)
Company P, Company Q, and Company R
specialize in data entry, data processing, and
data conversion. Company Q and Company
R’s data entry activities involve converting
medical information data contained in paper
records to a digital format. Company P
specializes in data entry activities. This
specialization reflects, in part, proprietary
quality control systems and specially trained
data entry experts used to ensure the highest
degree of accuracy of data entry services.
Company P is engaged by Company Q and
Company R to perform these data entry
activities for them. Company Q and Company
R then charge their customers for the data
entry activities performed by Company P.
(ii) Assume that these services performed
by Company P relating to data entry are
specified covered services within the
meaning of paragraph (b)(3)(i) of this section.
Under the facts and circumstances, the
taxpayer is unable to reasonably conclude
that these services do not contribute
significantly to the controlled group’s key
competitive advantages, core capabilities, or
fundamental risks of success or failure in the
group’s business. Company P is not eligible
to charge these services to Company Q and
Company R in accordance with the services
cost method.
Example 3. Recruiting services. (i)
Company P, Company Q, and Company R are
PO 00000
Frm 00020
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
manufacturing companies that sell their
products to unrelated retail establishments.
Company P’s human resources department
recruits mid-level managers and engineers for
itself as well as for Company Q and Company
R by attending job fairs and other recruitment
events. For recruiting higher-level managers
and engineers, each of these companies uses
recruiters from unrelated executive search
firms.
(ii) Assume that these services relating to
recruiting are specified covered services
within the meaning of paragraph (b)(3)(i) of
this section. Under the facts and
circumstances of the business of the PQR
Controlled Group, the taxpayer could
reasonably conclude that these services do
not contribute significantly to the controlled
group’s key competitive advantages, core
capabilities, or fundamental risks of success
or failure in the group’s business. If these
services meet the other requirements of this
paragraph (b), Company P will be eligible to
charge these services to Company Q and
Company R in accordance with the services
cost method.
Example 4. Recruiting services. (i)
Company Q and Company R are executive
recruiting service companies that are hired
by other companies to recruit professionals.
Company P is a recruiting agency that is
engaged by Company Q and Company R to
perform recruiting activities on their behalf
in certain geographic areas.
(ii) Assume that the services performed by
Company P are specified covered services
within the meaning of paragraph (b)(3)(i) of
this section. Under the facts and
circumstances, the taxpayer is unable to
reasonably conclude that these services do
not contribute significantly to the controlled
group’s key competitive advantages, core
capabilities, or fundamental risks of success
or failure in the group’s business. Company
P is not eligible to charge these services to
Company Q and Company R in accordance
with the services cost method.
Example 5. Credit analysis services. (i)
Company P is a manufacturer and distributor
of clothing for retail stores. Company Q and
Company R are distributors of clothing for
retail stores. As part of its operations,
personnel in Company P perform credit
analysis on its customers. Most of the
customers have a history of purchases from
Company P, and the credit analysis involves
a review of the recent payment history of the
customer’s account. For new customers, the
personnel in Company P perform a basic
credit check of the customer using reports
from a credit reporting agency. On behalf of
Company Q and Company R, Company P
performs credit analysis on customers who
order clothing from Company Q and
Company R using the same method as
Company P uses for itself.
(ii) Assume that these services relating to
credit analysis are specified covered services
within the meaning of paragraph (b)(3)(i) of
this section. Under the facts and
circumstances of the business of the PQR
Controlled Group, the taxpayer could
reasonably conclude that these services do
not contribute significantly to the controlled
group’s key competitive advantages, core
capabilities, or fundamental risks of success
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
mstockstill on DSKH9S0YB1PROD with RULES3
Federal Register / Vol. 74, No. 148 / Tuesday, August 4, 2009 / Rules and Regulations
or failure in the group’s business. If these
services meet the other requirements of this
paragraph (b), Company P will be eligible to
charge these services to Company Q and
Company R in accordance with the services
cost method.
Example 6. Credit analysis services. (i)
Company P, Company Q, and Company R
lease furniture to retail customers who
present a significant credit risk and are
generally unable to lease furniture from other
providers. As part of its leasing operations,
personnel in Company P perform credit
analysis on each of the potential lessees. The
personnel have developed special expertise
in determining whether a particular customer
who presents a significant credit risk (as
indicated by credit reporting agencies) will
be likely to make the requisite lease
payments on a timely basis. Also, as part of
its operations, Company P performs similar
credit analysis services for Company Q and
Company R, which charge correspondingly
high monthly lease payments.
(ii) Assume that these services relating to
credit analysis are specified covered services
within the meaning of paragraph (b)(3)(i) of
this section. Under the facts and
circumstances, the taxpayer is unable to
reasonably conclude that these services do
not contribute significantly to the controlled
group’s key competitive advantages, core
capabilities, or fundamental risks of success
or failure in the group’s business. Company
P is not eligible to charge these services to
Company Q and Company R in accordance
with the services cost method.
Example 7. Credit analysis services. (i)
Company P is a large full-service bank, which
provides products and services to corporate
and consumer markets, including unsecured
loans, secured loans, lines of credit, letters of
credit, conversion of foreign currency,
consumer loans, trust services, and sales of
certificates of deposit. Company Q makes
routine consumer loans to individuals, such
as auto loans and home equity loans.
Company R makes only business loans to
small businesses.
(ii) Company P performs credit analysis
and prepares credit reports for itself, as well
as for Company Q and Company R. Company
P, Company Q and Company R regularly
employ these credit reports in the ordinary
course of business in making decisions
regarding extensions of credit to potential
customers (including whether to lend, rate of
interest, and loan terms).
(iii) Assume that these services relating to
credit analysis are specified covered services
within the meaning of paragraph (b)(3)(i) of
this section. Under the facts and
circumstances, the credit analysis services
constitute part of a ‘‘financial transaction’’
described in paragraph (b)(4)(viii) of this
section. Company P is not eligible to charge
these services to Company Q and Company
R in accordance with the services cost
method.
Example 8. Data verification services. (i)
Company P, Company Q and Company R are
manufacturers of industrial supplies.
Company P’s accounting department
performs periodic reviews of the accounts
payable information of Company P, Company
Q and Company R, and identifies any
VerDate Nov<24>2008
16:58 Aug 03, 2009
Jkt 217001
inaccuracies in the records, such as doublepayments and double-charges.
(ii) Assume that these services relating to
verification of data are specified covered
services within the meaning of paragraph
(b)(3)(i) of this section. Under the facts and
circumstances of the business of the PQR
Controlled Group, the taxpayer could
reasonably conclude that these services do
not contribute significantly to the controlled
group’s key competitive advantages, core
capabilities, or fundamental risks of success
or failure in the group’s business. If these
services meet the other requirements of this
paragraph (b), Company P will be eligible to
charge these services to Company Q and
Company R in accordance with the services
cost method.
Example 9. Data verification services. (i)
Company P gathers and inputs information
regarding accounts payable and accounts
receivable from unrelated parties and utilizes
its own computer system to analyze that
information for purposes of identifying errors
in payment and receipts (data mining).
Company P is compensated for these services
based on a fee that reflects a percentage of
amounts collected by customers as a result of
the data mining services. These activities
constitute a significant portion of Company
P’s business. Company P performs similar
activities for Company Q and Company R by
analyzing their accounts payable and
accounts receivable records.
(ii) Assume that these services relating to
data mining are specified covered services
within the meaning of paragraph (b)(3)(i) of
this section. Under the facts and
circumstances, the taxpayer is unable to
reasonably conclude that these services do
not contribute significantly to the controlled
group’s key competitive advantages, core
capabilities, or fundamental risks of success
or failure in the group’s business. Company
P is not eligible to charge these services to
Company Q and Company R in accordance
with the services cost method.
Example 10. Legal services. (i) Company P
is a domestic corporation with two whollyowned foreign subsidiaries, Company Q and
Company R. Company P and its subsidiaries
manufacture and distribute equipment used
by industrial customers. Company P
maintains an in-house legal department
consisting of attorneys experienced in a wide
range of business and commercial matters.
Company Q and Company R maintain small
legal departments, consisting of attorneys
experienced in matters that most frequently
arise in the normal course of business of
Company Q and Company R in their
respective jurisdictions.
(ii) Company P seeks to maintain in-house
legal staff with the ability to address the
majority of legal matters that arise in the
United States with respect to the operations
of Company P, as well as any U.S. reporting
or compliance obligations of Company Q or
Company R. These include the preparation
and review of corporate contracts relating to,
for example, product sales, equipment
purchases and leases, business liability
insurance, real estate, employee salaries and
benefits. Company P relies on outside
attorneys for major business transactions and
highly technical matters such as patent
PO 00000
Frm 00021
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
38849
licenses. The in-house legal staffs of
Company Q and Company R are much more
limited. It is necessary for Company P to
retain several local law firms to handle
litigation and business disputes arising from
the activities of Company Q and Company R.
Although Company Q and Company R pay
the fees of these law firms, the hiring
authority and general oversight of the firms’
representation is in the legal department of
Company P.
(iii) In determining what portion of the
legal expenses of Company P may be
allocated to Company Q and Company R,
Company P first excludes any expenses
relating to legal services that constitute
shareholder activities and other items that
are not properly analyzed as controlled
services. Assume that the remaining services
relating to general legal functions performed
by in-house legal counsel are specified
covered services within the meaning of
paragraph (b)(3)(i) of this section. Under the
facts and circumstances of the business of the
PQR Controlled Group, the taxpayer could
reasonably conclude that these latter services
do not contribute significantly to the
controlled group’s key competitive
advantages, core capabilities, or fundamental
risks of success or failure in the group’s
business. If these services meet the other
requirements of this paragraph (b), Company
P will be eligible to charge these services to
Company Q and Company R in accordance
with the services cost method.
Example 11. Legal services. (i) Company P
is a domestic holding company whose
operating companies, Company Q and
Company R, generate electric power for
consumers by operating nuclear plants.
Assume that, although Company P owns
100% of the stock of Companies Q and R, the
companies do not elect to file a consolidated
Federal income tax return with Company P.
(ii) Company P maintains an in-house legal
department that includes attorneys who are
experts in the areas of Federal utilities
regulation, Federal labor and environmental
law, and securities law. Companies Q and R
maintain their own, smaller in-house legal
staffs comprising experienced attorneys in
the areas of state and local utilities
regulation, state labor and employment law,
and general commercial law. The legal
department of Company P performs general
oversight of the legal affairs of the company
and determines whether a particular matter
would be more efficiently handled by the
Company P legal department, by the legal
staffs in the operating companies, or in rare
cases, by retained outside counsel. In general,
Company P has succeeded in minimizing
duplication and overlap of functions between
the legal staffs of the various companies or
by retained outside counsel.
(iii) The domestic nuclear power plant
operations of Companies Q and R are subject
to extensive regulation by the U.S. Nuclear
Regulatory Commission (NRC). Operators are
required to obtain pre-construction approval,
operating licenses, and, at the end of the
operational life of the nuclear reactor,
nuclear decommissioning certificates.
Company P files consolidated financial
statements on behalf of itself, as well as
Companies Q and R, with the United States
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
mstockstill on DSKH9S0YB1PROD with RULES3
38850
Federal Register / Vol. 74, No. 148 / Tuesday, August 4, 2009 / Rules and Regulations
Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC).
In these SEC filings, Company P discloses
that failure to obtain any of these licenses
(and the related periodic renewals) or
agreeing to licenses on terms less favorable
than those granted to competitors would
have a material adverse impact on the
operations of Company Q or Company R.
Company Q and Company R do not have inhouse legal staff with experience in the NRC
area. Company P maintains a group of inhouse attorneys with specialized expertise in
the NRC area that exclusively represents
Company Q and Company R before the NRC.
Although Company P occasionally hires an
outside law firm or industry expert to assist
on particular NRC matters, the majority of the
work is performed by the specialized legal
staff of Company P.
(iv) Certain of the legal services performed
by Company P constitute duplicative or
shareholder activities that do not confer a
benefit on the other companies and therefore
do not need to be allocated to the other
companies, while certain other legal services
are eligible to be charged to Company Q and
Company R in accordance with the services
cost method.
(v) Assume that the specialized legal
services relating to nuclear licenses
performed by in-house legal counsel of
Company P are specified covered services
within the meaning of paragraph (b)(3)(i) of
this section. Under the facts and
circumstances, the taxpayer is unable to
reasonably conclude that these services do
not contribute significantly to the controlled
group’s key competitive advantages, core
capabilities, or fundamental risks of success
or failure in the group’s business. Company
P is not eligible to charge these services to
Company Q and Company R in accordance
with the services cost method.
Example 12. Group of services. (i)
Company P, Company Q, and Company R are
manufacturing companies that sell their
products to unrelated retail establishments.
Company P has an enterprise resource
planning (ERP) system that maintains data
relating to accounts payable and accounts
receivable information for all three
companies. Company P’s personnel perform
the daily operations on this ERP system such
as inputting data relating to accounts payable
and accounts receivable into the system and
extracting data relating to accounts receivable
and accounts payable in the form of reports
or electronic media and providing those data
to all three companies. Periodically,
Company P’s computer specialists also
modify the ERP system to adapt to changing
business functions in all three companies.
Company P’s computer specialists make
these changes by either modifying the
underlying software program or by
purchasing additional software or hardware
from unrelated third party vendors.
(ii) Assume that the services relating to
accounts payable and accounts receivable are
specified covered services within the
meaning of paragraph (b)(3)(i) of this section.
Under the facts and circumstances of the
business of the PQR Controlled Group, the
taxpayer could reasonably conclude that
these services do not contribute significantly
to the controlled group’s key competitive
VerDate Nov<24>2008
16:58 Aug 03, 2009
Jkt 217001
advantages, core capabilities, or fundamental
risks of success or failure in the group’s
business. If these services meet the other
requirements of this paragraph (b), Company
P will be eligible to charge these services to
Company Q and Company R in accordance
with the services cost method.
(iii) Assume that the services performed by
Company P’s computer specialists that relate
to modifying the ERP system are specifically
excluded from the services described in a
revenue procedure referenced in paragraph
(b)(3) of this section as developing hardware
or software solutions (such as systems
integration, Web site design, writing
computer programs, modifying general
applications software, or recommending the
purchase of commercially available hardware
or software). If these services do not
constitute low margin covered services
within the meaning of paragraph (b)(3)(ii) of
this section, then Company P is not eligible
to charge these services to Company Q and
Company R in accordance with the services
cost method.
Example 13. Group of services. (i)
Company P manufactures and sells widgets
under an exclusive contract to Customer 1.
Company Q and Company R sell widgets
under exclusive contracts to Customer 2 and
Customer 3, respectively. At least one year in
advance, each of these customers can
accurately forecast its need for widgets.
Using these forecasts, each customer over the
course of the year places orders for widgets
with the appropriate company, Company P,
Company Q, or Company R. A customer’s
actual need for widgets seldom deviates from
that customer’s forecasted need.
(ii) It is most efficient for the PQR
Controlled Group companies to manufacture
and store an inventory of widgets in advance
of delivery. Although all three companies sell
widgets, only Company P maintains a
centralized warehouse for widgets. Pursuant
to a contract, Company P provides storage of
these widgets to Company Q and Company
R at an arm’s length price.
(iii) Company P’s personnel also obtain
orders from all three companies’ customers to
draw up purchase orders for widgets as well
as make payment to suppliers for widget
replacement parts. In addition, Company P’s
personnel use data entry to input information
regarding orders and sales of widgets and
replacement parts for all three companies
into a centralized computer system.
Company P’s personnel also maintain the
centralized computer system and extract data
for all three companies when necessary.
(iv) Assume that these services relating to
tracking purchases and sales of inventory are
specified covered services within the
meaning of paragraph (b)(3)(i) of this section.
Under the facts and circumstances of the
business of the PQR Controlled Group, the
taxpayer could reasonably conclude that
these services do not contribute significantly
to the controlled group’s key competitive
advantages, core capabilities, or fundamental
risks of success or failure in the group’s
business. If these services meet the other
requirements of this paragraph (b), Company
P will be eligible to charge these services to
Company Q and Company R in accordance
with the services cost method.
PO 00000
Frm 00022
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
Example 14. Group of services. (i)
Company P, Company Q, and Company R
assemble and sell gadgets to unrelated
customers. Each of these companies
purchases the components necessary for
assembly of the gadgets from unrelated
suppliers. As a service to its subsidiaries,
Company P’s personnel obtain orders for
components from all three companies,
prepare purchase orders, and make payment
to unrelated suppliers for the components. In
addition, Company P’s personnel use data
entry to input information regarding orders
and sales of gadgets for all three companies
into a centralized computer. Company P’s
personnel also maintain the centralized
computer system and extract data for all
three companies on an as-needed basis. The
services provided by Company P personnel,
in conjunction with the centralized computer
system, constitute a state-of-the-art inventory
management system that allows Company P
to order components necessary for assembly
of the gadgets on a ‘‘just-in-time’’ basis.
(ii) Unrelated suppliers deliver the
components directly to Company P,
Company Q and Company R. Each company
stores the components in its own facilities for
use in filling specific customer orders. The
companies do not maintain any inventory
that is not identified in specific customer
orders. Because of the efficiencies associated
with services provided by personnel of
Company P, all three companies are able to
significantly reduce their inventory-related
costs. Company P’s Chief Executive Officer
makes a statement in one of its press
conferences with industry analysts that its
inventory management system is critical to
the company’s success.
(iii) Assume that these services relating to
tracking purchases and sales of inventory are
specified covered services within the
meaning of paragraph (b)(3)(i) of this section.
Under the facts and circumstances, the
taxpayer is unable to reasonably conclude
that these services do not contribute
significantly to the controlled group’s key
competitive advantages, core capabilities, or
fundamental risks of success or failure in the
group’s business. Company P is not eligible
to charge these services to Company Q and
Company R in accordance with the services
cost method.
Example 15. Low margin covered services.
Company P renders certain accounting
services to Company S. Company P uses the
services cost method for the accounting
services, and determines the amount charged
as its total cost of rendering the services, with
no markup. Based on an application of the
section 482 regulations without regard to this
paragraph (b), the interquartile range of arm’s
length markups on total services costs for
these accounting services is between 3% and
9%, and the median is 6%. Because the
median comparable markup on total services
costs is 6%, which is less than 7%, the
accounting services constitute low margin
covered services within the meaning of
paragraph (b)(3)(ii) of this section.
Example 16. Shared services arrangement
and reliable measure of reasonably
anticipated benefit (allocation key). (i)
Company P operates a centralized data
processing facility that performs automated
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
mstockstill on DSKH9S0YB1PROD with RULES3
Federal Register / Vol. 74, No. 148 / Tuesday, August 4, 2009 / Rules and Regulations
invoice processing and order generation for
all of its subsidiaries, Companies X, Y, Z,
pursuant to a shared services arrangement.
(ii) In evaluating the shares of reasonably
anticipated benefits from the centralized data
processing services, the total value of the
merchandise on the invoices and orders may
not provide the most reliable measure of
reasonably anticipated benefits shares,
because value of merchandise sold does not
bear a relationship to the anticipated benefits
from the underlying covered services.
(iii) The total volume of orders and
invoices processed may provide a more
reliable basis for evaluating the shares of
reasonably anticipated benefits from the data
processing services. Alternatively, depending
on the facts and circumstances, total central
processing unit time attributable to the
transactions of each subsidiary may provide
a more reliable basis on which to evaluate the
shares of reasonably anticipated benefits.
Example 17. Shared services arrangement
and reliable measure of reasonably
anticipated benefit (allocation key). (i)
Company P operates a centralized center that
performs human resources functions, such as
administration of pension, retirement, and
health insurance plans that are made
available to employees of its subsidiaries,
Companies X, Y, Z, pursuant to a shared
services arrangement.
(ii) In evaluating the shares of reasonably
anticipated benefits from these centralized
services, the total revenues of each subsidiary
may not provide the most reliable measure of
reasonably anticipated benefit shares,
because total revenues do not bear a
relationship to the shares of reasonably
anticipated benefits from the underlying
services.
(iii) Employee headcount or total
compensation paid to employees may
provide a more reliable basis for evaluating
the shares of reasonably anticipated benefits
from the covered services.
Example 18. Shared services arrangement
and reliable measure of reasonably
anticipated benefit (allocation key). (i)
Company P performs human resource
services (service A) on behalf of the PXYZ
Group that qualify for the services cost
method. Under that method, Company P
determines the amount charged for these
services pursuant to a shared services
arrangement based on an application of
paragraph (b)(7) of this section. Service A
constitutes a specified covered service
described in a revenue procedure pursuant to
paragraph (b)(3)(i) of this section. The total
services costs for service A otherwise
determined under the services cost method is
300.
(ii) Companies X, Y and Z reasonably
anticipate benefits from service A. Company
P does not reasonably anticipate benefits
from service A. Assume that if relative
reasonably anticipated benefits were
precisely known, the appropriate allocation
of charges pursuant to paragraph (k) of this
section to Company X, Y and Z for service
A is as follows:
VerDate Nov<24>2008
16:58 Aug 03, 2009
Jkt 217001
38851
(iii) The total number of employees
(employee headcount) in each company is as
follows:
Company X—600 employees.
Company Y—250 employees.
Company Z—250 employees.
(iv) Company P allocates the 300 total
services costs of service A based on employee
headcount as follows:
(iii) The total number of employees
(employee headcount) in each company
is as follows:
Company X—600.
Company Y—200.
Company Z—200.
(iv) The total number of transactions
(transaction volume) with uncontrolled
customers by each company is as
follows:
Company X—2,000.
Company Y—4,000.
Company Z—3,500.
(v) If Company P allocated the 500
total services costs of service B based on
employee headcount, the resulting
allocation would be as follows:
SERVICE A
[Total cost 300]
SERVICE B
[Total cost 500]
SERVICE A
[Total cost 300]
Company
X ...........................................
Y ...........................................
Z ............................................
Allocation
key
150
75
75
Company
Headcount
X ...............
Y ...............
Z ................
600
250
250
Amount
164
68
68
(v) Based on these facts, Company P
may reasonably conclude that the
employee headcount allocation basis
most reliably reflects the participants’
respective shares of the reasonably
anticipated benefits attributable to
service A.
Example 19. Shared services arrangement
and reliable measure of reasonably
anticipated benefit (allocation key). (i)
Company P performs accounts payable
services (service B) on behalf of the PXYZ
Group and determines the amount charged
for the services under such method pursuant
to a shared services arrangement based on an
application of paragraph (b)(7) of this section.
Service B is a specified covered service
described in a revenue procedure pursuant to
paragraph (b)(3)(i) of this section. The total
services costs for service B otherwise
determined under the services cost method is
500.
(ii) Companies X, Y and Z reasonably
anticipate benefits from service B.
Company P does not reasonably
anticipate benefits from service B.
Assume that if relative reasonably
anticipated benefits were precisely
known, the appropriate allocation of
charges pursuant to paragraph (k) of this
section to Companies X, Y and Z for
service B is as follows:
SERVICE B
[Total cost 500]
Company
X ...........................................
Y ...........................................
Z ............................................
PO 00000
Frm 00023
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
125
205
170
Allocation
key
X ...............
Y ...............
Z ................
Company
Headcount
600
200
200
Amount
300
100
100
(vi) In contrast, if Company P used
volume of transactions with
uncontrolled customers as the allocation
basis under the shared services
arrangement, the allocation would be as
follows:
SERVICE B
[Total cost 500]
Company
Allocation
key
X ...............
Y ...............
Z ................
Transaction
Volume
2,000
4,000
3,500
Amount
105
211
184
(vii) Based on these facts, Company P
may reasonably conclude that the
transaction volume, but not the
employee headcount, allocation basis
most reliably reflects the participants’
respective shares of the reasonably
anticipated benefits attributable to
service B.
Example 20. Shared services arrangement
and aggregation. (i) Company P performs
human resource services (service A) and
accounts payable services (service B) on
behalf of the PXYZ Group that qualify for the
services cost method. Company P determines
the amount charged for these services under
such method pursuant to a shared services
arrangement based on an application of
paragraph (b)(7) of this section. Service A
and service B are specified covered services
described in a revenue procedure pursuant to
paragraph (b)(3)(i) of this section. The total
services costs otherwise determined under
the services cost method for service A is 300
and for service B is 500; total services costs
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
38852
Federal Register / Vol. 74, No. 148 / Tuesday, August 4, 2009 / Rules and Regulations
for services A and B are 800. Company P
determines that aggregation of services A and
B for purposes of the arrangement is
appropriate.
(ii) Companies X, Y and Z reasonably
anticipate benefits from services A and
B. Company P does not reasonably
anticipate benefits from services A and
B. Assume that if relative reasonably
anticipated benefits were precisely
known, the appropriate allocation of
total charges pursuant to paragraph (k)
of this section to Companies X, Y and
Z for services A and B is as follows:
Company Z—4,000.
[Total cost 800]
(iv) The total number of employees in
each company is as follows:
Company
Company X—600.
X ...........................................
350
Company Y—200.
Y ...........................................
100
Company Z—200.
Z ............................................
350
(v) If Company P allocated the 800
total services costs of services A and B
(iii) The total volume of transactions
with uncontrolled customers in each
based on transaction volume or
company is as follows:
employee headcount, the resulting
Company X—2,000.
allocation would be as follows:
Company Y—4,000.
SERVICES A AND B
AGGREGATED SERVICES AB
[Total cost 800]
Allocation key
Company
Transaction
volume
X .......................................................................................................................
Y .......................................................................................................................
Z .......................................................................................................................
(vi) In contrast, if aggregated services
AB were allocated by reference to the
total U.S. dollar value of sales to
uncontrolled parties (trade sales) by
each company, the following results
would obtain:
AGGREGATED SERVICES AB
[Total costs 800]
Allocation key
Company
X ...............
Y ...............
Z ................
Trade sales
(millions)
Amount
$400
120
500
314
94
392
Amount
2,000
4,000
4,000
Services A–M
(cost 490)
mstockstill on DSKH9S0YB1PROD with RULES3
[Total costs 500]
Allocation key
Company
Transaction
volume
X ...............
Y ...............
Z ................
2,000
4,500
3,500
Amount
100
225
175
(v) Based on these facts, Company P may
reasonably conclude that the transaction
volume allocation basis most reliably reflects
VerDate Nov<24>2008
16:58 Aug 03, 2009
Jkt 217001
PO 00000
Frm 00024
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
Services N–P
(cost 10)
90
240
160
AGGREGATED SERVICES A–Z
Amount
600
200
200
480
160
160
The total services costs for services A
through P otherwise determined under the
services cost method is 500. Company P
determines that aggregation of services A
through P for purposes of the arrangement is
appropriate.
(ii) Companies X and Y reasonably
anticipate benefits from services A through P
and Company Z reasonably anticipates
benefits from services A through M but not
from services N through P (Company Z
performs services similar to services N
through P on its own behalf). Company P
does not reasonably anticipate benefits from
services A through P. Assume that if relative
reasonably anticipated benefits were
precisely known, the appropriate allocation
of total charges pursuant to paragraph (k) of
this section to Company X, Y, and Z for
services A through P is as follows:
Example 21. Shared services arrangement
and aggregation. (i) Company P performs
services A through P on behalf of the PXYZ
Group that qualify for the services cost
method. Company P determines the amount
charged for these services under such method
pursuant to a shared services arrangement
based on an application of paragraph (b)(7)
of this section. All of these services A
through P constitute either specified covered
services or low margin covered services
described in paragraph (b)(3) of this section.
X ...........................................................................................................................
Y ...........................................................................................................................
Z ...........................................................................................................................
Headcount
160
320
320
(vii) Based on these facts, Company P
may reasonably conclude that the trade
sales, but not the transaction volume or
the employee headcount, allocation
basis most reliably reflects the
participants’ respective shares of the
reasonably anticipated benefits
attributable to services AB.
Company
(iii) The total volume of transactions with
uncontrolled customers in each company is
as follows:
Company X—2,000.
Company Y—4,500.
Company Z—3,500.
(iv) Company P allocates the 500 total
services costs of services A through P based
on transaction volume as follows:
Allocation key
5
5
................................
Services A–P
(total cost 500)
95
245
160
the participants’ respective shares of the
reasonably anticipated benefits attributable to
services A through P.
Example 22. Renderer reasonably
anticipates benefits. (i) Company P renders
services on behalf of the PXYZ Group that
qualify for the services cost method.
Company P determines the amount charged
for these services under such method.
Company P’s share of reasonably anticipated
benefits from services A, B, C, and D is 20%
of the total reasonably anticipated benefits of
all participants. Company P’s total services
cost for services A, B, C, and D charged
within the Group is 100.
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
mstockstill on DSKH9S0YB1PROD with RULES3
Federal Register / Vol. 74, No. 148 / Tuesday, August 4, 2009 / Rules and Regulations
(ii) Based on an application of paragraph
(b)(7) of this section, Company P charges 80
which is allocated among Companies X, Y,
and Z. No charge is made to Company P
under the shared services arrangement for
activities that it performs on its own behalf.
Example 23. Coordination with cost
sharing arrangement. (i) Company P
performs human resource services (service A)
on behalf of the PXYZ Group that qualify for
the services cost method. Company P
determines the amount charged for these
services under such method pursuant to a
shared services arrangement based on an
application of paragraph (b)(7) of this section.
Service A constitutes a specified covered
service described in a revenue procedure
pursuant to paragraph (b)(3)(i) of this section.
The total services costs for service A
otherwise determined under the services cost
method is 300.
(ii) Company X, Y, Z, and P reasonably
anticipate benefits from service A. Using a
basis of allocation that is consistent with the
controlled participants’ respective shares of
the reasonably anticipated benefits from the
shared services, the total charge of 300 is
allocated as follows:
X—100.
Y—50.
Z—25.
P—125.
(ii) In addition to performing services, P
undertakes 500 of R&D and incurs
manufacturing and other costs of 1,000.
(iii) Companies P and X enter into a cost
sharing arrangement in accordance with
§ 1.482–7T. Under the arrangement,
Company P will undertake all intangible
property development activities. All of
Company P’s research and development
(R&D) activity is devoted to the intangible
property development activity under the cost
sharing arrangement. Company P will
manufacture, market, and otherwise exploit
the product in its defined territory.
Companies P and X will share intangible
property development costs in accordance
with their reasonably anticipated benefits
from the intangible property, and Company
X will make payments to Company P as
required under § 1.482–7T. Company X will
manufacture, market, and otherwise exploit
the product in the rest of the world.
(iv) A portion of the charge under the
shared services arrangement is in turn
allocable to the intangible property
development activity undertaken by
Company P. The most reliable estimate of the
proportion allocable to the intangible
property development activity is determined
to be 500 (Company P’s R&D expenses)
divided by 1,500 (Company P’s total noncovered services costs), or one-third.
Accordingly, one-third of Company P’s
charge of 125, or 42, is allocated to the
intangible property development activity.
Companies P and X must share the intangible
property development costs of the cost
shared intangible property (including the
charge of 42 that is allocated under the
shared services arrangement) in proportion to
their respective shares of reasonably
anticipated benefits under the cost sharing
arrangement. That is, the reasonably
anticipated benefit shares under the cost
VerDate Nov<24>2008
16:58 Aug 03, 2009
Jkt 217001
sharing arrangement are determined
separately from reasonably anticipated
benefit shares under the shared services
arrangement.
Example 24. Coordination with cost
sharing arrangement. (i) The facts and
analysis are the same as in Example 25,
except that Company X also performs
intangible property development activities
related to the cost sharing arrangement.
Using a basis of allocation that is consistent
with the controlled participants’ respective
shares of the reasonably anticipated benefits
from the shared services, the 300 of service
costs is allocated as follows:
X—100.
Y—50.
Z—25.
P—125.
(ii) In addition to performing services,
Company P undertakes 500 of R&D and
incurs manufacturing and other costs of
1,000. Company X undertakes 400 of R&D
and incurs manufacturing and other costs of
600.
(iii) Companies P and X enter into a cost
sharing arrangement in accordance with
§ 1.482–7T. Under the arrangement, both
Companies P and X will undertake intangible
property development activities. All of the
research and development activity conducted
by Companies P and X is devoted to the
intangible property development activity
under the cost sharing arrangement. Both
Companies P and X will manufacture,
market, and otherwise exploit the product in
their respective territories and will share
intangible property development costs in
accordance with their reasonably anticipated
benefits from the intangible property, and
both will make payments as required under
§ 1.482–7T.
(iv) A portion of the charge under the
shared services arrangement is in turn
allocable to the intangible property
development activities undertaken by
Companies P and X. The most reliable
estimate of the portion allocable to Company
P’s intangible property development activity
is determined to be 500 (Company P’s R&D
expenses) divided by 1,500 (P’s total noncovered services costs), or one-third.
Accordingly, one-third of Company P’s
allocated services cost method charge of 125,
or 42, is allocated to its intangible property
development activity.
(v) In addition, it is necessary to determine
the portion of the charge under the shared
services arrangement to Company X that
should be further allocated to Company X’s
intangible property development activities
under the cost sharing arrangement. The
most reliable estimate of the portion allocable
to Company X’s intangible property
development activity is 400 (Company X’s
R&D expenses) divided by 1,000 (Company
X’s costs), or 40%. Accordingly, 40% of the
100 that was allocated to Company X, or 40,
is allocated in turn to Company X’s
intangible property development activities.
Company X makes a payment to Company P
of 100 under the shared services arrangement
and includes 40 of services cost method
charges in the pool of intangible property
development costs.
PO 00000
Frm 00025
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
38853
(vi) The parties’ respective contributions to
intangible property development costs under
the cost sharing arrangement are as follows:
P: 500 + (0.333 * 125) = 542
X: 400 + (0.40 * 100) = 440
(c) Comparable uncontrolled services
price method—(1) In general. The
comparable uncontrolled services price
method evaluates whether the amount
charged in a controlled services
transaction is arm’s length by reference
to the amount charged in a comparable
uncontrolled services transaction.
(2) Comparability and reliability
considerations—(i) In general. Whether
results derived from application of this
method are the most reliable measure of
the arm’s length result must be
determined using the factors described
under the best method rule in § 1.482–
1(c). The application of these factors
under the comparable uncontrolled
services price method is discussed in
paragraphs (c)(2)(ii) and (iii) of this
section.
(ii) Comparability—(A) In general.
The degree of comparability between
controlled and uncontrolled
transactions is determined by applying
the provisions of § 1.482–1(d). Although
all of the factors described in § 1.482–
1(d)(3) must be considered, similarity of
the services rendered, and of the
intangible property (if any) used in
performing the services, generally will
have the greatest effects on
comparability under this method. In
addition, because even minor
differences in contractual terms or
economic conditions could materially
affect the amount charged in an
uncontrolled transaction, comparability
under this method depends on close
similarity with respect to these factors,
or adjustments to account for any
differences. The results derived from
applying the comparable uncontrolled
services price method generally will be
the most direct and reliable measure of
an arm’s length price for the controlled
transaction if an uncontrolled
transaction has no differences from the
controlled transaction that would affect
the price, or if there are only minor
differences that have a definite and
reasonably ascertainable effect on price
and for which appropriate adjustments
are made. If such adjustments cannot be
made, or if there are more than minor
differences between the controlled and
uncontrolled transactions, the
comparable uncontrolled services price
method may be used, but the reliability
of the results as a measure of the arm’s
length price will be reduced. Further, if
there are material differences for which
reliable adjustments cannot be made,
this method ordinarily will not provide
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
38854
Federal Register / Vol. 74, No. 148 / Tuesday, August 4, 2009 / Rules and Regulations
mstockstill on DSKH9S0YB1PROD with RULES3
a reliable measure of an arm’s length
result.
(B) Adjustments for differences
between controlled and uncontrolled
transactions. If there are differences
between the controlled and
uncontrolled transactions that would
affect price, adjustments should be
made to the price of the uncontrolled
transaction according to the
comparability provisions of § 1.482–
1(d)(2). Specific examples of factors that
may be particularly relevant to
application of this method include—
(1) Quality of the services rendered;
(2) Contractual terms (for example,
scope and terms of warranties or
guarantees regarding the services,
volume, credit and payment terms,
allocation of risks, including any
contingent-payment terms and whether
costs were incurred without a provision
for current reimbursement);
(3) Intangible property (if any) used in
rendering the services;
(4) Geographic market in which the
services are rendered or received;
(5) Risks borne (for example, costs
incurred to render the services, without
provision for current reimbursement);
(6) Duration or quantitative measure
of services rendered;
(7) Collateral transactions or ongoing
business relationships between the
renderer and the recipient, including
arrangement for the provision of
tangible property in connection with the
services; and
(8) Alternatives realistically available
to the renderer and the recipient.
(iii) Data and assumptions. The
reliability of the results derived from the
comparable uncontrolled services price
method is affected by the completeness
and accuracy of the data used and the
reliability of the assumptions made to
apply the method. See § 1.482–1(c) (best
method rule).
(3) Arm’s length range. See § 1.482–
1(e)(2) for the determination of an arm’s
length range.
(4) Examples. The principles of this
paragraph (c) are illustrated by the
following examples:
Example 1. Internal comparable
uncontrolled services price. Company A, a
United States corporation, performs
shipping, stevedoring, and related services
for controlled and uncontrolled parties on a
short-term or as-needed basis. Company A
charges uncontrolled parties in Country X a
uniform fee of $60 per container to place
loaded cargo containers in Country X on
oceangoing vessels for marine transportation.
Company A also performs identical services
in Country X for its wholly-owned
subsidiary, Company B, and there are no
substantial differences between the
controlled and uncontrolled transactions. In
evaluating the appropriate measure of the
VerDate Nov<24>2008
16:58 Aug 03, 2009
Jkt 217001
arm’s length price for the container-loading
services performed for Company B, because
Company A renders substantially identical
services in Country X to both controlled and
uncontrolled parties, it is determined that the
comparable uncontrolled services price
constitutes the best method for determining
the arm’s length price for the controlled
services transaction. Based on the reliable
data provided by Company A concerning the
price charged for services in comparable
uncontrolled transactions, a loading charge of
$60 per cargo container will be considered
the most reliable measure of the arm’s length
price for the services rendered to Company
B. See paragraph (c)(2)(ii)(A) of this section.
Example 2. External comparable
uncontrolled services price. (i) The facts are
the same as in Example 1, except that
Company A performs services for Company
B, but not for uncontrolled parties. Based on
information obtained from unrelated parties
(which is determined to be reliable under the
comparability standards set forth in
paragraph (c)(2) of this section), it is
determined that uncontrolled parties in
Country X perform services comparable to
those rendered by Company A to Company
B, and that such parties charge $60 per cargo
container.
(ii) In evaluating the appropriate measure
of an arm’s length price for the loading
services that Company A renders to Company
B, the $60 per cargo container charge is
considered evidence of a comparable
uncontrolled services price. See paragraph
(c)(2)(ii)(A) of this section.
Example 3. External comparable
uncontrolled services price. The facts are the
same as in Example 2, except that
uncontrolled parties in Country X render
similar loading and stevedoring services, but
only under contracts that have a minimum
term of one year. If the difference in the
duration of the services has a material effect
on prices, adjustments to account for these
differences must be made to the results of the
uncontrolled transactions according to the
provisions of § 1.482–1(d)(2), and such
adjusted results may be used as a measure of
the arm’s length result.
Example 4. Use of valuable intangible
property. (i) Company A, a United States
corporation in the biotechnology sector,
renders research and development services
exclusively to its affiliates. Company B is
Company A’s wholly-owned subsidiary in
Country X. Company A renders research and
development services to Company B.
(ii) In performing its research and
development services function, Company A
uses proprietary software that it developed
internally. Company A uses the software to
evaluate certain genetically engineered
compounds developed by Company B.
Company A owns the copyright on this
software and does not license it to
uncontrolled parties.
(iii) No uncontrolled parties can be
identified that perform services identical or
with a high degree of similarity to those
performed by Company A. Because there are
material differences for which reliable
adjustments cannot be made, the comparable
uncontrolled services price method is
unlikely to provide a reliable measure of the
PO 00000
Frm 00026
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
arm’s length price. See paragraph (c)(2)(ii)(A)
of this section.
Example 5. Internal comparable. (i)
Company A, a United States corporation, and
its subsidiaries render computer consulting
services relating to systems integration and
networking to business clients in various
countries. Company A and its subsidiaries
render only consulting services, and do not
manufacture computer hardware or software
nor distribute such products. The controlled
group is organized according to industry
specialization, with key industry specialists
working for Company A. These personnel
typically form the core consulting group that
teams with consultants from the localcountry subsidiaries to serve clients in the
subsidiaries’ respective countries.
(ii) Company A and its subsidiaries
sometimes undertake engagements directly
for clients, and sometimes work as
subcontractors to unrelated parties on more
extensive supply-chain consulting
engagements for clients. In undertaking the
latter engagements with third party
consultants, Company A typically prices its
services based on consulting hours worked
multiplied by a rate determined for each
category of employee. The company also
charges, at no markup, for out-of-pocket
expenses such as travel, lodging, and data
acquisition charges. The Company has
established the following schedule of hourly
rates:
Category
Rate
Project managers .................
Technical staff ......................
$400 per hour.
$300 per hour.
(iii) Thus, for example, a project involving
100 hours of the time of project managers and
400 hours of technical staff time would result
in the following project fees (without regard
to any out-of-pocket expenses): ([100 hrs. ×
$400/hr.] + [400 hrs. × $300/hr.]) = $40,000
+ $120,000 = $160,000.
(iv) Company B, a Country X subsidiary of
Company A, contracts to perform consulting
services for a Country X client in the banking
industry. In undertaking this engagement,
Company B uses its own consultants and also
uses Company A project managers and
technical staff that specialize in the banking
industry for 75 hours and 380 hours,
respectively. In determining an arm’s length
charge, the price that Company A charges for
consulting services as a subcontractor in
comparable uncontrolled transactions will be
considered evidence of a comparable
uncontrolled services price. Thus, in this
case, a payment of $144,000, (or [75 hrs. ×
$400/hr.] + [380 hrs. × $300/hr.] = $30,000
+ $114,000) may be used as a measure of the
arm’s length price for the work performed by
Company A project mangers and technical
staff. In addition, if the comparable
uncontrolled services price method is used,
then, consistent with the practices employed
by the comparables with respect to similar
types of expenses, Company B must
reimburse Company A for appropriate out-ofpocket expenses. See paragraph (c)(2)(ii)(A)
of this section.
Example 6. Adjustments for differences. (i)
The facts are the same as in Example 5,
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
Federal Register / Vol. 74, No. 148 / Tuesday, August 4, 2009 / Rules and Regulations
mstockstill on DSKH9S0YB1PROD with RULES3
except that the engagement is undertaken
with the client on a fixed fee basis. That is,
prior to undertaking the engagement
Company B and Company A estimate the
resources required to undertake the
engagement, and, based on hourly fee rates,
charge the client a single fee for completion
of the project. Company A’s portion of the
engagement results in fees of $144,000.
(ii) The engagement, once undertaken,
requires 20% more hours by each of
Companies A and B than originally
estimated. Nevertheless, the unrelated client
pays the fixed fee that was agreed upon at the
start of the engagement. Company B pays
Company A $144,000, in accordance with the
fixed fee arrangement.
(iii) Company A often enters into similar
fixed fee engagements with clients. In
addition, Company A’s records for similar
engagements show that when it experiences
cost overruns, it does not collect additional
fees from the client for the difference
between projected and actual hours.
Accordingly, in evaluating whether the fees
paid by Company B to Company A are arm’s
length, it is determined that no adjustments
to the intercompany service charge are
warranted. See § 1.482–1(d)(3)(ii) and
paragraph (c)(2)(ii)(A) of this section.
(5) Indirect evidence of the price of a
comparable uncontrolled services
transaction—(i) In general. The price of
a comparable uncontrolled services
transaction may be derived based on
indirect measures of the price charged
in comparable uncontrolled services
transactions, but only if—
(A) The data are widely and routinely
used in the ordinary course of business
in the particular industry or market
segment for purposes of determining
prices actually charged in comparable
uncontrolled services transactions;
(B) The data are used to set prices in
the controlled services transaction in
the same way they are used to set prices
in uncontrolled services transactions of
the controlled taxpayer, or in the same
way they are used by uncontrolled
taxpayers to set prices in uncontrolled
services transactions; and
(C) The amount charged in the
controlled services transaction may be
reliably adjusted to reflect differences in
quality of the services, contractual
terms, market conditions, risks borne
(including contingent-payment terms),
duration or quantitative measure of
services rendered, and other factors that
may affect the price to which
uncontrolled taxpayers would agree.
(ii) Example. The following example
illustrates this paragraph (c)(5):
Example. Indirect evidence of comparable
uncontrolled services price.
(i) Company A is a United States insurance
company. Company A’s wholly-owned
Country X subsidiary, Company B, performs
specialized risk analysis for Company A as
well as for uncontrolled parties. In
determining the price actually charged to
VerDate Nov<24>2008
16:58 Aug 03, 2009
Jkt 217001
uncontrolled entities for performing such risk
analysis, Company B uses a proprietary,
multi-factor computer program, which relies
on the gross value of the policies in the
customer’s portfolio, the relative composition
of those policies, their location, and the
estimated number of personnel hours
necessary to complete the project.
Uncontrolled companies that perform
comparable risk analysis in the same
industry or market-segment use similar
proprietary computer programs to price
transactions with uncontrolled customers
(the competitors’ programs may incorporate
different inputs, or may assign different
weights or values to individual inputs, in
arriving at the price).
(ii) During the taxable year subject to audit,
Company B performed risk analysis for
uncontrolled parties as well as for Company
A. Because prices charged to uncontrolled
customers reflected the composition of each
customer’s portfolio together with other
factors, the prices charged in Company B’s
uncontrolled transactions do not provide a
reliable basis for determining the comparable
uncontrolled services price for the similar
services rendered to Company A. However,
in evaluating an arm’s length price for the
studies performed by Company B for
Company A, Company B’s proprietary
computer program may be considered as
indirect evidence of the comparable
uncontrolled services price that would be
charged to perform the services for Company
A. The reliability of the results obtained by
application of this internal computer
program as a measure of an arm’s length
price for the services will be increased to the
extent that Company A used the internal
computer program to generate actual
transaction prices for risk-analysis studies
performed for uncontrolled parties during the
same taxable year under audit; Company A
used data that are widely and routinely used
in the ordinary course of business in the
insurance industry to determine the price
charged; and Company A reliably adjusted
the price charged in the controlled services
transaction to reflect differences that may
affect the price to which uncontrolled
taxpayers would agree.
(d) Gross services margin method—(1)
In general. The gross services margin
method evaluates whether the amount
charged in a controlled services
transaction is arm’s length by reference
to the gross profit margin realized in
comparable uncontrolled transactions.
This method ordinarily is used in cases
where a controlled taxpayer performs
services or functions in connection with
an uncontrolled transaction between a
member of the controlled group and an
uncontrolled taxpayer. This method
may be used where a controlled
taxpayer renders services (agent
services) to another member of the
controlled group in connection with a
transaction between that other member
and an uncontrolled taxpayer. This
method also may be used in cases where
a controlled taxpayer contracts to
PO 00000
Frm 00027
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
38855
provide services to an uncontrolled
taxpayer (intermediary function) and
another member of the controlled group
actually performs a portion of the
services provided.
(2) Determination of arm’s length
price—(i) In general. The gross services
margin method evaluates whether the
price charged or amount retained by a
controlled taxpayer in the controlled
services transaction in connection with
the relevant uncontrolled transaction is
arm’s length by determining the
appropriate gross profit of the controlled
taxpayer.
(ii) Relevant uncontrolled transaction.
The relevant uncontrolled transaction is
a transaction between a member of the
controlled group and an uncontrolled
taxpayer as to which the controlled
taxpayer performs agent services or an
intermediary function.
(iii) Applicable uncontrolled price.
The applicable uncontrolled price is the
price paid or received by the
uncontrolled taxpayer in the relevant
uncontrolled transaction.
(iv) Appropriate gross services profit.
The appropriate gross services profit is
computed by multiplying the applicable
uncontrolled price by the gross services
profit margin in comparable
uncontrolled transactions. The
determination of the appropriate gross
services profit will take into account
any functions performed by other
members of the controlled group, as
well as any other relevant factors
described in § 1.482–1(d)(3). The
comparable gross services profit margin
may be determined by reference to the
commission in an uncontrolled
transaction, where that commission is
stated as a percentage of the price
charged in the uncontrolled transaction.
(v) Arm’s length range. See § 1.482–
1(e)(2) for determination of the arm’s
length range.
(3) Comparability and reliability
considerations—(i) In general. Whether
results derived from application of this
method are the most reliable measure of
the arm’s length result must be
determined using the factors described
under the best method rule in § 1.482–
1(c). The application of these factors
under the gross services margin method
is discussed in paragraphs (d)(3)(ii) and
(iii) of this section.
(ii) Comparability—(A) Functional
comparability. The degree of
comparability between an uncontrolled
transaction and a controlled transaction
is determined by applying the
comparability provisions of § 1.482–
1(d). A gross services profit provides
compensation for services or functions
that bear a relationship to the relevant
uncontrolled transaction, including an
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
mstockstill on DSKH9S0YB1PROD with RULES3
38856
Federal Register / Vol. 74, No. 148 / Tuesday, August 4, 2009 / Rules and Regulations
operating profit in return for the
investment of capital and the
assumption of risks by the controlled
taxpayer performing the services or
functions under review. Therefore,
although all of the factors described in
§ 1.482–1(d)(3) must be considered,
comparability under this method is
particularly dependent on similarity of
services or functions performed, risks
borne, intangible property (if any) used
in providing the services or functions,
and contractual terms, or adjustments to
account for the effects of any such
differences. If possible, the appropriate
gross services profit margin should be
derived from comparable uncontrolled
transactions by the controlled taxpayer
under review, because similar
characteristics are more likely found
among different transactions by the
same controlled taxpayer than among
transactions by other parties. In the
absence of comparable uncontrolled
transactions involving the same
controlled taxpayer, an appropriate
gross services profit margin may be
derived from transactions of
uncontrolled taxpayers involving
comparable services or functions with
respect to similarly related transactions.
(B) Other comparability factors.
Comparability under this method is not
dependent on close similarity of the
relevant uncontrolled transaction to the
related transactions involved in the
uncontrolled comparables. However,
substantial differences in the nature of
the relevant uncontrolled transaction
and the relevant transactions involved
in the uncontrolled comparables, such
as differences in the type of property
transferred or service provided in the
relevant uncontrolled transaction, may
indicate significant differences in the
services or functions performed by the
controlled and uncontrolled taxpayers
with respect to their respective relevant
transactions. Thus, it ordinarily would
be expected that the services or
functions performed in the controlled
and uncontrolled transactions would be
with respect to relevant transactions
involving the transfer of property within
the same product categories or the
provision of services of the same general
type (for example, informationtechnology systems design).
Furthermore, significant differences in
the intangible property (if any) used by
the controlled taxpayer in the controlled
services transaction as distinct from the
uncontrolled comparables may also
affect the reliability of the comparison.
Finally, the reliability of profit measures
based on gross services profit may be
adversely affected by factors that have
less effect on prices. For example, gross
VerDate Nov<24>2008
16:58 Aug 03, 2009
Jkt 217001
services profit may be affected by a
variety of other factors, including cost
structures or efficiency (for example,
differences in the level of experience of
the employees performing the service in
the controlled and uncontrolled
transactions). Accordingly, if material
differences in these factors are
identified based on objective evidence,
the reliability of the analysis may be
affected.
(C) Adjustments for differences
between controlled and uncontrolled
transactions. If there are material
differences between the controlled and
uncontrolled transactions that would
affect the gross services profit margin,
adjustments should be made to the gross
services profit margin, according to the
comparability provisions of § 1.482–
1(d)(2). For this purpose, consideration
of the total services costs associated
with functions performed and risks
assumed may be necessary because
differences in functions performed are
often reflected in these costs. If there are
differences in functions performed,
however, the effect on gross services
profit of such differences is not
necessarily equal to the differences in
the amount of related costs. Specific
examples of factors that may be
particularly relevant to this method
include—
(1) Contractual terms (for example,
scope and terms of warranties or
guarantees regarding the services or
function, volume, credit and payment
terms, and allocation of risks, including
any contingent-payment terms);
(2) Intangible property (if any) used in
performing the services or function;
(3) Geographic market in which the
services or function are performed or in
which the relevant uncontrolled
transaction takes place; and
(4) Risks borne, including, if
applicable, inventory-type risk.
(D) Buy-sell distributor. If a controlled
taxpayer that performs an agent service
or intermediary function is comparable
to a distributor that takes title to goods
and resells them, the gross profit margin
earned by such distributor on
uncontrolled sales, stated as a
percentage of the price for the goods,
may be used as the comparable gross
services profit margin.
(iii) Data and assumptions—(A) In
general. The reliability of the results
derived from the gross services margin
method is affected by the completeness
and accuracy of the data used and the
reliability of the assumptions made to
apply this method. See § 1.482–1(c)
(best method rule).
(B) Consistency in accounting. The
degree of consistency in accounting
practices between the controlled
PO 00000
Frm 00028
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
transaction and the uncontrolled
comparables that materially affect the
gross services profit margin affects the
reliability of the results under this
method.
(4) Examples. The principles of this
paragraph (d) are illustrated by the
following examples:
Example 1. Agent services. Company A and
Company B are members of a controlled
group. Company A is a foreign manufacturer
of industrial equipment. Company B is a U.S.
company that acts as a commission agent for
Company A by arranging for Company A to
make direct sales of the equipment it
manufactures to unrelated purchasers in the
U.S. market. Company B does not take title
to the equipment but instead receives from
Company A commissions that are determined
as a specified percentage of the sales price for
the equipment that is charged by Company
A to the unrelated purchaser. Company B
also arranges for direct sales of similar
equipment by unrelated foreign
manufacturers to unrelated purchasers in the
U.S. market. Company B charges these
unrelated foreign manufacturers a
commission fee of 5% of the sales price
charged by the unrelated foreign
manufacturers to the unrelated U.S.
purchasers for the equipment. Information
regarding the comparable agent services
provided by Company B to unrelated foreign
manufacturers is sufficiently complete to
conclude that it is likely that all material
differences between the controlled and
uncontrolled transactions have been
identified and adjustments for such
differences have been made. If the
comparable gross services profit margin is
5% of the price charged in the relevant
transactions involved in the uncontrolled
comparables, then the appropriate gross
services profit that Company B may earn and
the arm’s length price that it may charge
Company A for its agent services is equal to
5% of the applicable uncontrolled price
charged by Company A in sales of equipment
in the relevant uncontrolled transactions.
Example 2. Agent services. The facts are
the same as in Example 1, except that
Company B does not act as a commission
agent for unrelated parties and it is not
possible to obtain reliable information
concerning commission rates charged by
uncontrolled commission agents that engage
in comparable transactions with respect to
relevant sales of property. It is possible,
however, to obtain reliable information
regarding the gross profit margins earned by
unrelated parties that briefly take title to and
then resell similar property in uncontrolled
transactions, in which they purchase the
property from foreign manufacturers and
resell the property to purchasers in the U.S.
market. Analysis of the facts and
circumstances indicates that, aside from
certain minor differences for which
adjustments can be made, the uncontrolled
parties that resell property perform similar
functions and assume similar risks as
Company B performs and assumes when it
acts as a commission agent for Company A’s
sales of property. Under these circumstances,
the gross profit margin earned by the
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
mstockstill on DSKH9S0YB1PROD with RULES3
Federal Register / Vol. 74, No. 148 / Tuesday, August 4, 2009 / Rules and Regulations
unrelated distributors on the purchase and
resale of property may be used, subject to any
adjustments for any material differences
between the controlled and uncontrolled
transactions, as a comparable gross services
profit margin. The appropriate gross services
profit that Company B may earn and the
arm’s length price that it may charge
Company A for its agent services is therefore
equal to this comparable gross services
margin, multiplied by the applicable
uncontrolled price charged by Company A in
its sales of equipment in the relevant
uncontrolled transactions.
Example 3. Agent services. (i) Company A
and Company B are members of a controlled
group. Company A is a U.S. corporation that
renders computer consulting services,
including systems integration and
networking, to business clients.
(ii) In undertaking engagements with
clients, Company A in some cases pays a
commission of 3% of its total fees to
unrelated parties that assist Company A in
obtaining consulting engagements. Typically,
such fees are paid to non-computer
consulting firms that provide strategic
management services for their clients. When
Company A obtains a consulting engagement
with a client of a non-computer consulting
firm, Company A does not subcontract with
the other consulting firm, nor does the other
consulting firm play any role in Company A’s
consulting engagement.
(iii) Company B, a Country X subsidiary of
Company A, assists Company A in obtaining
an engagement to perform computer
consulting services for a Company B banking
industry client in Country X. Although
Company B has an established relationship
with its Country X client and was
instrumental in arranging for Company A’s
engagement with the client, Company A’s
particular expertise was the primary
consideration in motivating the client to
engage Company A. Based on the relative
contributions of Companies A and B in
obtaining and undertaking the engagement,
Company B’s role was primarily to facilitate
the consulting engagement between
Company A and the Country X client.
Information regarding the commissions paid
by Company A to unrelated parties for
providing similar services to facilitate
Company A’s consulting engagements is
sufficiently complete to conclude that it is
likely that all material differences between
these uncontrolled transactions and the
controlled transaction between Company B
and Company A have been identified and
that appropriate adjustments have been made
for any such differences. If the comparable
gross services margin earned by unrelated
parties in providing such agent services is
3% of total fees charged in the relevant
transactions involved in the uncontrolled
comparables, then the appropriate gross
services profit that Company B may earn and
the arm’s length price that it may charge
Company A for its agent services is equal to
this comparable gross services margin (3%),
multiplied by the applicable uncontrolled
price charged by Company A in its relevant
uncontrolled consulting engagement with
Company B’s client.
Example 4. Intermediary function. (i) The
facts are the same as in Example 3, except
VerDate Nov<24>2008
16:58 Aug 03, 2009
Jkt 217001
that Company B contracts directly with its
Country X client to provide computer
consulting services and Company A performs
the consulting services on behalf of Company
B. Company A does not enter into a
consulting engagement with Company B’s
Country X client. Instead, Company B
charges its Country X client an uncontrolled
price for the consulting services, and
Company B pays a portion of the
uncontrolled price to Company A for
performing the consulting services on behalf
of Company B.
(ii) Analysis of the relative contributions of
Companies A and B in obtaining and
undertaking the consulting contract indicates
that Company B functioned primarily as an
intermediary contracting party, and the gross
services margin method is the most reliable
method for determining the amount that
Company B may retain as compensation for
its intermediary function with respect to
Company A’s consulting services. In this
case, therefore, because Company B entered
into the relevant uncontrolled transaction to
provide services, Company B receives the
applicable uncontrolled price that is paid by
the Country X client for the consulting
services. Company A technically performs
services for Company B when it performs, on
behalf of Company B, the consulting services
Company B contracted to provide to the
Country X client. The arm’s length amount
that Company A may charge Company B for
performing the consulting services on
Company B’s behalf is equal to the applicable
uncontrolled price received by Company B in
the relevant uncontrolled transaction, less
Company B’s appropriate gross services
profit, which is the amount that Company B
may retain as compensation for performing
the intermediary function.
(iii) Reliable data concerning the
commissions that Company A paid to
uncontrolled parties for assisting it in
obtaining engagements to provide consulting
services similar to those it has provided on
behalf of Company B provide useful
information in applying the gross services
margin method. However, consideration
should be given to whether the third party
commission data may need to be adjusted to
account for any additional risk that Company
B may have assumed as a result of its
function as an intermediary contracting
party, compared with the risk it would have
assumed if it had provided agent services to
assist Company A in entering into an
engagement to provide its consulting service
directly. In this case, the information
regarding the commissions paid by Company
A to unrelated parties for providing agent
services to facilitate its performance of
consulting services for unrelated parties is
sufficiently complete to conclude that all
material differences between these
uncontrolled transactions and the controlled
performance of an intermediary function,
including possible differences in the amount
of risk assumed in connection with
performing that function, have been
identified and that appropriate adjustments
have been made. If the comparable gross
services margin earned by unrelated parties
in providing such agent services is 3% of
total fees charged in Company B’s relevant
PO 00000
Frm 00029
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
38857
uncontrolled transactions, then the
appropriate gross services profit that
Company B may retain as compensation for
performing an intermediary function (and the
amount, therefore, that is deducted from the
applicable uncontrolled price to arrive at the
arm’s length price that Company A may
charge Company B for performing consulting
services on Company B’s behalf) is equal to
this comparable gross services margin (3%),
multiplied by the applicable uncontrolled
price charged by Company B in its contract
to provide services to the uncontrolled party.
Example 5. External comparable. (i) The
facts are the same as in Example 4, except
that neither Company A nor Company B
engages in transactions with third parties that
facilitate similar consulting engagements.
(ii) Analysis of the relative contributions of
Companies A and B in obtaining and
undertaking the contract indicates that
Company B’s role was primarily to facilitate
the consulting arrangement between
Company A and the Country X client.
Although no reliable internal data are
available regarding comparable transactions
with uncontrolled entities, reliable data exist
regarding commission rates for similar
facilitating services between uncontrolled
parties. These data indicate that a 3%
commission (3% of total engagement fee) is
charged in such transactions. Information
regarding the uncontrolled comparables is
sufficiently complete to conclude that it is
likely that all material differences between
the controlled and uncontrolled transactions
have been identified and adjusted for. If the
appropriate gross services profit margin is
3% of total fees, then an arm’s length result
of the controlled services transaction is for
Company B to retain an amount equal to 3%
of total fees paid to it.
(e) Cost of services plus method—(1)
In general. The cost of services plus
method evaluates whether the amount
charged in a controlled services
transaction is arm’s length by reference
to the gross services profit markup
realized in comparable uncontrolled
transactions. The cost of services plus
method is ordinarily used in cases
where the controlled service renderer
provides the same or similar services to
both controlled and uncontrolled
parties. This method is ordinarily not
used in cases where the controlled
services transaction involves a
contingent-payment arrangement, as
described in paragraph (i)(2) of this
section.
(2) Determination of arm’s length
price—(i) In general. The cost of
services plus method measures an arm’s
length price by adding the appropriate
gross services profit to the controlled
taxpayer’s comparable transactional
costs.
(ii) Appropriate gross services profit.
The appropriate gross services profit is
computed by multiplying the controlled
taxpayer’s comparable transactional
costs by the gross services profit
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
mstockstill on DSKH9S0YB1PROD with RULES3
38858
Federal Register / Vol. 74, No. 148 / Tuesday, August 4, 2009 / Rules and Regulations
markup, expressed as a percentage of
the comparable transactional costs
earned in comparable uncontrolled
transactions.
(iii) Comparable transactional costs.
Comparable transactional costs consist
of the costs of providing the services
under review that are taken into account
as the basis for determining the gross
services profit markup in comparable
uncontrolled transactions. Depending
on the facts and circumstances, such
costs typically include all compensation
attributable to employees directly
involved in the performance of such
services, materials and supplies
consumed or made available in
rendering such services, and may
include as well other costs of rendering
the services. Comparable transactional
costs must be determined on a basis that
will facilitate comparison with the
comparable uncontrolled transactions.
For that reason, comparable
transactional costs may not necessarily
equal total services costs, as defined in
paragraph (j) of this section, and in
appropriate cases may be a subset of
total services costs. Generally accepted
accounting principles or Federal income
tax accounting rules (where Federal
income tax data for comparable
transactions or business activities are
available) may provide useful guidance
but will not conclusively establish the
appropriate comparable transactional
costs for purposes of this method.
(iv) Arm’s length range. See § 1.482–
1(e)(2) for determination of an arm’s
length range.
(3) Comparability and reliability
considerations—(i) In general. Whether
results derived from the application of
this method are the most reliable
measure of the arm’s length result must
be determined using the factors
described under the best method rule in
§ 1.482–1(c).
(ii) Comparability—(A) Functional
comparability. The degree of
comparability between controlled and
uncontrolled transactions is determined
by applying the comparability
provisions of § 1.482–1(d). A service
renderer’s gross services profit provides
compensation for performing services
related to the controlled services
transaction under review, including an
operating profit for the service
renderer’s investment of capital and
assumptions of risks. Therefore,
although all of the factors described in
§ 1.482–1(d)(3) must be considered,
comparability under this method is
particularly dependent on similarity of
services or functions performed, risks
borne, intangible property (if any) used
in providing the services or functions,
and contractual terms, or adjustments to
VerDate Nov<24>2008
16:58 Aug 03, 2009
Jkt 217001
account for the effects of any such
differences. If possible, the appropriate
gross services profit markup should be
derived from comparable uncontrolled
transactions of the same taxpayer
participating in the controlled services
transaction because similar
characteristics are more likely to be
found among services provided by the
same service provider than among
services provided by other service
providers. In the absence of such
services transactions, an appropriate
gross services profit markup may be
derived from comparable uncontrolled
services transactions of other service
providers. If the appropriate gross
services profit markup is derived from
comparable uncontrolled services
transactions of other service providers,
in evaluating comparability the
controlled taxpayer must consider the
results under this method expressed as
a markup on total services costs of the
controlled taxpayer, because differences
in functions performed may be reflected
in differences in service costs other than
those included in comparable
transactional costs.
(B) Other comparability factors.
Comparability under this method is less
dependent on close similarity between
the services provided than under the
comparable uncontrolled services price
method. Substantial differences in the
services may, however, indicate
significant functional differences
between the controlled and
uncontrolled taxpayers. Thus, it
ordinarily would be expected that the
controlled and uncontrolled
transactions would involve services of
the same general type (for example,
information-technology systems design).
Furthermore, if a significant amount of
the controlled taxpayer’s comparable
transactional costs consists of service
costs incurred in a tax accounting
period other than the tax accounting
period under review, the reliability of
the analysis would be reduced. In
addition, significant differences in the
value of the services rendered, due for
example to the use of valuable
intangible property, may also affect the
reliability of the comparison. Finally,
the reliability of profit measures based
on gross services profit may be
adversely affected by factors that have
less effect on prices. For example, gross
services profit may be affected by a
variety of other factors, including cost
structures or efficiency-related factors
(for example, differences in the level of
experience of the employees performing
the service in the controlled and
uncontrolled transactions). Accordingly,
if material differences in these factors
PO 00000
Frm 00030
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
are identified based on objective
evidence, the reliability of the analysis
may be affected.
(C) Adjustments for differences
between the controlled and uncontrolled
transactions. If there are material
differences between the controlled and
uncontrolled transactions that would
affect the gross services profit markup,
adjustments should be made to the gross
services profit markup earned in the
comparable uncontrolled transaction
according to the provisions of § 1.482–
1(d)(2). For this purpose, consideration
of the comparable transactional costs
associated with the functions performed
and risks assumed may be necessary,
because differences in the functions
performed are often reflected in these
costs. If there are differences in
functions performed, however, the effect
on gross services profit of such
differences is not necessarily equal to
the differences in the amount of related
comparable transactional costs. Specific
examples of the factors that may be
particularly relevant to this method
include—
(1) The complexity of the services;
(2) The duration or quantitative
measure of services;
(3) Contractual terms (for example,
scope and terms of warranties or
guarantees provided, volume, credit and
payment terms, allocation of risks,
including any contingent-payment
terms);
(4) Economic circumstances; and
(5) Risks borne.
(iii) Data and assumptions—(A) In
general. The reliability of the results
derived from the cost of services plus
method is affected by the completeness
and accuracy of the data used and the
reliability of the assumptions made to
apply this method. See § 1.482–1(c)
(Best method rule).
(B) Consistency in accounting. The
degree of consistency in accounting
practices between the controlled
transaction and the uncontrolled
comparables that materially affect the
gross services profit markup affects the
reliability of the results under this
method. Thus, for example, if
differences in cost accounting practices
would materially affect the gross
services profit markup, the ability to
make reliable adjustments for such
differences would affect the reliability
of the results obtained under this
method. Further, reliability under this
method depends on the extent to which
the controlled and uncontrolled
transactions reflect consistent reporting
of comparable transactional costs. For
purposes of this paragraph (e)(3)(iii)(B),
the term comparable transactional costs
includes the cost of acquiring tangible
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
Federal Register / Vol. 74, No. 148 / Tuesday, August 4, 2009 / Rules and Regulations
mstockstill on DSKH9S0YB1PROD with RULES3
property that is transferred (or used)
with the services, to the extent that the
arm’s length price of the tangible
property is not separately evaluated as
a controlled transaction under another
provision.
(4) Examples. The principles of this
paragraph (e) are illustrated by the
following examples:
Example 1. Internal comparable. (i)
Company A designs and assembles
information-technology networks and
systems. When Company A renders services
for uncontrolled parties, it receives
compensation based on time and materials as
well as certain other related costs necessary
to complete the project. This fee includes the
cost of hardware and software purchased
from uncontrolled vendors and incorporated
in the final network or system, plus a
reasonable allocation of certain specified
overhead costs incurred by Company A in
providing these services. Reliable accounting
records maintained by Company A indicate
that Company A earned a gross services
profit markup of 10% on its time, materials
and specified overhead in providing design
services during the year under examination
on information technology projects for
uncontrolled entities.
(ii) Company A designed an informationtechnology network for its Country X
subsidiary, Company B. The services
rendered to Company B are similar in scope
and complexity to services that Company A
rendered to uncontrolled parties during the
year under examination. Using Company A’s
accounting records (which are determined to
be reliable under paragraph (e)(3) of this
section), it is possible to identify the
comparable transactional costs involved in
the controlled services transaction with
reference to the costs incurred by Company
A in rendering similar design services to
uncontrolled parties. Company A’s records
indicate that it does not incur any additional
types of costs in rendering similar services to
uncontrolled customers. The data available
are sufficiently complete to conclude that it
is likely that all material differences between
the controlled and uncontrolled transactions
have been identified and adjusted for. Based
on the gross services profit markup data
derived from Company A’s uncontrolled
transactions involving similar design
services, an arm’s length result for the
controlled services transaction is equal to the
price that will allow Company A to earn a
10% gross services profit markup on its
comparable transactional costs.
Example 2. Inability to adjust for
differences in comparable transactional
costs. The facts are the same as in Example
1, except that Company A’s staff that
rendered the services to Company B
consisted primarily of engineers in training
status or on temporary rotation from other
Company A subsidiaries. In addition, the
Company B network incorporated innovative
features, including specially designed
software suited to Company B’s
requirements. The use of less-experienced
personnel and staff on temporary rotation,
together with the special features of the
Company B network, significantly increased
VerDate Nov<24>2008
16:58 Aug 03, 2009
Jkt 217001
the time and costs associated with the project
as compared to time and costs associated
with similar projects completed for
uncontrolled customers. These factors
constitute material differences between the
controlled and the uncontrolled transactions
that affect the determination of Company A’s
comparable transactional costs associated
with the controlled services transaction, as
well as the gross services profit markup.
Moreover, it is not possible to perform
reliable adjustments for these differences on
the basis of the available accounting data.
Under these circumstances, the reliability of
the cost of services plus method as a measure
of an arm’s length price is substantially
reduced.
Example 3. Operating loss by reference to
total services costs. The facts and analysis are
the same as in Example 1, except that an
unrelated Company C, instead of Company
A, renders similar services to uncontrolled
parties and publicly available information
indicates that Company C earned a gross
services profit markup of 10% on its time,
materials and certain specified overhead in
providing those services. As in Example 1,
Company A still provides services for its
Country X subsidiary, Company B. In
accordance with the requirements in
paragraph (e)(3)(ii) of this section, the
taxpayer performs additional analysis and
restates the results of Company A’s
controlled services transaction with its
Country X subsidiary, Company B, in the
form of a markup on Company A’s total
services costs. This analysis by reference to
total services costs shows that Company A
generated an operating loss on the controlled
services transaction, which indicates that
functional differences likely exist between
the controlled services transaction performed
by Company A and uncontrolled services
transactions performed by Company C, and
that these differences may not be reflected in
the comparable transactional costs. Upon
further scrutiny, the presence of such
functional differences between the controlled
and uncontrolled transactions may indicate
that the cost of services plus method does not
provide the most reliable measure of an arm’s
length result under the facts and
circumstances.
Example 4. Internal comparable. (i)
Company A, a U.S. corporation, and its
subsidiaries perform computer consulting
services relating to systems integration and
networking for business clients in various
countries. Company A and its subsidiaries
render only consulting services and do not
manufacture or distribute computer hardware
or software to clients. The controlled group
is organized according to industry
specialization, with key industry specialists
working for Company A. These personnel
typically form the core consulting group that
teams with consultants from the localcountry subsidiaries to serve clients in the
subsidiaries’ respective countries.
(ii) On some occasions, Company A and its
subsidiaries undertake engagements directly
for clients. On other occasions, they work as
subcontractors for uncontrolled parties on
more extensive consulting engagements for
clients. In undertaking the latter engagements
with third-party consultants, Company A
PO 00000
Frm 00031
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
38859
typically prices its services at four times the
compensation costs of its consultants,
defined as the consultants’ base salary plus
estimated fringe benefits, as defined in this
table:
Category
Project managers ..............
Technical staff ...................
Rate
$100 per hour.
75 per hour.
(iii) In uncontrolled transactions, Company
A also charges the customer, at no markup,
for out-of-pocket expenses such as travel,
lodging, and data acquisition charges. Thus,
for example, a project involving 100 hours of
time from project managers, and 400 hours of
technical staff time would result in total
compensation costs to Company A of (100
hrs. × $100/hr.) + (400 hrs. × $75/hr.) =
$10,000 + $30,000 = $40,000. Applying the
markup of 300%, the total fee charged would
thus be (4 × $40,000), or $160,000, plus outof-pocket expenses.
(iv) Company B, a Country X subsidiary of
Company A, contracts to render consulting
services to a Country X client in the banking
industry. In undertaking this engagement,
Company B uses its own consultants and also
uses the services of Company A project
managers and technical staff that specialize
in the banking industry for 75 hours and 380
hours, respectively. The data available are
sufficiently complete to conclude that it is
likely that all material differences between
the controlled and uncontrolled transactions
have been identified and adjusted for. Based
on reliable data concerning the compensation
costs to Company A, an arm’s length result
for the controlled services transaction is
equal to $144,000. This is calculated as
follows: [4 × (75 hrs. × $100/hr.)] + [4 × (380
hrs. × $75/hr.)] = $30,000 + $114,000 =
$144,000, reflecting a 300% markup on the
total compensation costs for Company A
project managers and technical staff. In
addition, consistent with Company A’s
pricing of uncontrolled transactions,
Company B must reimburse Company A for
appropriate out-of-pocket expenses incurred
in performing the services.
(f) Comparable profits method—(1) In
general. The comparable profits method
evaluates whether the amount charged
in a controlled transaction is arm’s
length, based on objective measures of
profitability (profit level indicators)
derived from uncontrolled taxpayers
that engage in similar business activities
under similar circumstances. The rules
in § 1.482–5 relating to the comparable
profits method apply to controlled
services transactions, except as
modified in this paragraph (f).
(2) Determination of arm’s length
result—(i) Tested party. This paragraph
(f) applies where the relevant business
activity of the tested party as
determined under § 1.482–5(b)(2) is the
rendering of services in a controlled
services transaction. Where the tested
party determined under § 1.482–5(b)(2)
is instead the recipient of the controlled
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
38860
Federal Register / Vol. 74, No. 148 / Tuesday, August 4, 2009 / Rules and Regulations
services, the rules under this paragraph
(f) are not applicable to determine the
arm’s length result.
(ii) Profit level indicators. In addition
to the profit level indicators provided in
§ 1.482–5(b)(4), a profit level indicator
that may provide a reliable basis for
comparing operating profits of the tested
party involved in a controlled services
transaction and uncontrolled
comparables is the ratio of operating
profit to total services costs (as defined
in paragraph (j) of this section).
(iii) Comparability and reliability
considerations—Data and
assumptions—Consistency in
accounting. Consistency in accounting
practices between the relevant business
activity of the tested party and the
uncontrolled service providers is
particularly important in determining
the reliability of the results under this
method, but less than in applying the
cost of services plus method.
Adjustments may be appropriate if
materially different treatment is applied
to particular cost items related to the
relevant business activity of the tested
party and the uncontrolled service
providers. For example, adjustments
may be appropriate where the tested
party and the uncontrolled comparables
use inconsistent approaches to classify
similar expenses as ‘‘cost of goods sold’’
and ‘‘selling, general, and
administrative expenses.’’ Although
distinguishing between these two
categories may be difficult, the
distinction is less important to the
extent that the ratio of operating profit
to total services costs is used as the
appropriate profit level indicator.
Determining whether adjustments are
necessary under these or similar
circumstances requires thorough
analysis of the functions performed and
consideration of the cost accounting
practices of the tested party and the
uncontrolled comparables. Other
adjustments as provided in § 1.482–
5(c)(2)(iv) may also be necessary to
increase the reliability of the results
under this method.
(3) Examples. The principles of this
paragraph (f) are illustrated by the
following examples:
Example 1. Ratio of operating profit to total
services costs as the appropriate profit level
indicator. (i) A Country T parent firm,
Company A, and its Country Y subsidiary,
Company B, both engage in manufacturing as
their principal business activity. Company A
also performs certain advertising services for
itself and its affiliates. In year 1, Company A
renders advertising services to Company B.
(ii) Based on the facts and circumstances,
it is determined that the comparable profits
method will provide the most reliable
measure of an arm’s length result. Company
A is selected as the tested party. No data are
available for comparable independent
manufacturing firms that render advertising
services to third parties. Financial data are
available, however, for ten independent firms
that render similar advertising services as
their principal business activity in Country
X. The ten firms are determined to be
comparable under § 1.482–5(c). Neither
Company A nor the comparable companies
use valuable intangible property in rendering
the services.
(iii) Based on the available financial data
of the comparable companies, it cannot be
determined whether these comparable
companies report costs for financial
accounting purposes in the same manner as
the tested party. The publicly available
financial data of the comparable companies
segregate total services costs into cost of
goods sold and sales, general and
administrative costs, with no further
segmentation of costs provided. Due to the
limited information available regarding the
cost accounting practices used by the
comparable companies, the ratio of operating
profits to total services costs is determined to
be the most appropriate profit level indicator.
This ratio includes total services costs to
minimize the effect of any inconsistency in
accounting practices between Company A
and the comparable companies.
Example 2. Application of the operating
profit to total services costs profit level
indicator. (i) Company A is a foreign
subsidiary of Company B, a U.S. corporation.
Year 1
mstockstill on DSKH9S0YB1PROD with RULES3
Revenues .........................................................................................................
Cost of Goods Sold .........................................................................................
Operating Expenses ........................................................................................
Operating Profit ................................................................................................
(v) After adjustments have been made to
account for identified material differences
between the relevant business activity of
Company B and the comparables, the average
ratio for the taxable years 1 through 3 of
operating profit to total services costs is
calculated for each of the uncontrolled
service providers. Applying each ratio to
Company B’s average total services costs
from the relevant business activity for the
taxable years 1 through 3 would lead to the
VerDate Nov<24>2008
16:58 Aug 03, 2009
Jkt 217001
1,200,000
100,000
1,100,000
0
following comparable operating profit (COP)
for the services rendered by Company B:
Uncontrolled
service
provider
Company
Company
Company
Company
PO 00000
1
2
3
4
OP/Total
service costs
(percent)
...
...
...
...
Frm 00032
15.75
15.00
14.00
13.30
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
Company B
COP
$189,000
180,000
168,000
159,600
Company B is under examination for its year
1 taxable year. Company B renders
management consulting services to Company
A. Company B’s consulting function includes
analyzing Company A’s operations,
benchmarking Company A’s financial
performance against companies in the same
industry, and to the extent necessary,
developing a strategy to improve Company
A’s operational performance. The accounting
records of Company B allow reliable
identification of the total services costs of the
consulting staff associated with the
management consulting services rendered to
Company A. Company A reimburses
Company B for its costs associated with
rendering the consulting services, with no
markup.
(ii) Based on all the facts and
circumstances, it is determined that the
comparable profits method will provide the
most reliable measure of an arm’s length
result. Company B is selected as the tested
party, and its rendering of management
consulting services is identified as the
relevant business activity. Data are available
from ten domestic companies that operate in
the industry segment involving management
consulting and that perform activities
comparable to the relevant business activity
of Company B. These comparables include
entities that primarily perform management
consulting services for uncontrolled parties.
The comparables incur similar risks as
Company B incurs in performing the
consulting services and do not make use of
valuable intangible property or special
processes.
(iii) Based on the available financial data
of the comparables, it cannot be determined
whether the comparables report their costs
for financial accounting purposes in the same
manner as Company B reports its costs in the
relevant business activity. The available
financial data for the comparables report only
an aggregate figure for costs of goods sold and
operating expenses, and do not segment the
underlying services costs. Due to this
limitation, the ratio of operating profits to
total services costs is determined to be the
most appropriate profit level indicator.
(iv) For the taxable years 1 through 3,
Company B shows the following results for
the services performed for Company A:
Year 2
Year 3
1,100,000
100,000
1,000,000
0
1,300,000
N/A
1,300,000
0
Uncontrolled
service
provider
OP/Total
service costs
(percent)
Company
Company
Company
Company
Company
Company
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
5 ...
6 ...
7 ...
8 ...
9 ...
10
04AUR3
12.00
11.30
11.25
11.18
11.11
10.75
Average
1,200,000
66,667
1,133,333
0
Company B
COP
144,000
135,600
135,000
134,160
133,320
129,000
Federal Register / Vol. 74, No. 148 / Tuesday, August 4, 2009 / Rules and Regulations
(vi) The available data are not sufficiently
complete to conclude that it is likely that all
material differences between the relevant
business activity of Company B and the
comparables have been identified. Therefore,
an arm’s length range can be established only
pursuant to § 1.482–1(e)(2)(iii)(B). The arm’s
length range is established by reference to the
interquartile range of the results as calculated
under § 1.482–1(e)(2)(iii)(C), which consists
of the results ranging from $168,000 to
$134,160. Company B’s reported average
operating profit of zero ($0) falls outside this
range. Therefore, an allocation may be
appropriate.
(vii) Because Company B reported income
of zero, to determine the amount, if any, of
the allocation, Company B’s reported
operating profit for year 3 is compared to the
comparable operating profits derived from
the comparables’ results for year 3. The ratio
of operating profit to total services costs in
year 3 is calculated for each of the
comparables and applied to Company B’s
year 3 total services costs to derive the
following results:
Uncontrolled
service
provider
Company
Company
Company
Company
Company
Company
Company
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
OP/Total
service costs
(for year 3)
(percent)
15.00
14.75
14.00
13.50
12.30
11.05
11.03
Company B
COP
$195,000
191,750
182,000
175,500
159,900
143,650
143,390
Uncontrolled
service
provider
OP/Total
service costs
(for year 3)
(percent)
Company 8 ...
Company 9 ...
Company 10
11.00
10.50
10.25
Company B
COP
143,000
136,500
133,250
(viii) Based on these results, the median of
the comparable operating profits for year 3 is
$151,775. Therefore, Company B’s income for
year 3 is increased by $151,775, the
difference between Company B’s reported
operating profit for year 3 of zero and the
median of the comparable operating profits
for year 3.
Example 3. Material difference in
accounting for stock-based compensation. (i)
Taxpayer, a U.S. corporation the stock of
which is publicly traded, performs controlled
services for its wholly-owned subsidiaries.
The arm’s length price of these controlled
services is evaluated under the comparable
profits method for services in paragraph (f) of
this section by reference to the net cost plus
profit level indicator (PLI). Taxpayer is the
tested party under paragraph (f)(2)(i) of this
section. The Commissioner identifies the
most narrowly identifiable business activity
of the tested party for which data are
available that incorporate the controlled
transaction (the relevant business activity).
The Commissioner also identifies four
uncontrolled domestic service providers,
Companies A, B, C, and D, each of which
performs exclusively activities similar to the
relevant business activity of Taxpayer that is
38861
subject to analysis under paragraph (f) of this
section. The stock of Companies A, B, C, and
D is publicly traded on a U.S. stock
exchange. Assume that Taxpayer makes an
election to apply these regulations to earlier
taxable years.
(ii) Stock options are granted to the
employees of Taxpayer that engage in the
relevant business activity. Assume that, as
determined under a method in accordance
with U.S. generally accepted accounting
principles, the fair value of such stock
options attributable to the employees’
performance of the relevant business activity
is 500 for the taxable year in question. In
evaluating the controlled services, Taxpayer
includes salaries, fringe benefits, and related
compensation of these employees in ‘‘total
services costs,’’ as defined in paragraph (j) of
this section. Taxpayer does not include any
amount attributable to stock options in total
services costs, nor does it deduct that amount
in determining ’’reported operating profit’’
within the meaning of § 1.482–5(d)(5), for the
year under examination.
(iii) Stock options are granted to the
employees of Companies A, B, C, and D.
Under a fair value method in accordance
with U.S. generally accepted accounting
principles, the comparables include in total
compensation the value of the stock options
attributable to the employees’ performance of
the relevant business activity for the annual
financial reporting period, and treat this
amount as an expense in determining
operating profit for financial accounting
purposes. The treatment of employee stock
options is summarized in the following table:
Salaries and
other non-option compensation
Taxpayer
Company
Company
Company
Company
......................................................................................................................................
A ..................................................................................................................................
B ..................................................................................................................................
C ..................................................................................................................................
D ..................................................................................................................................
mstockstill on DSKH9S0YB1PROD with RULES3
(iv) A material difference in accounting for
stock-based compensation (within the
meaning of § 1.482–7T(d)(3)(i)) exists.
Analysis indicates that this difference would
materially affect the measure of an arm’s
length result under this paragraph (f). In
making an adjustment to improve
comparability under §§ 1.482–1(d)(2) and
1.482–5(c)(2)(iv), the Commissioner includes
in total services costs of the tested party the
total compensation costs of 1,500 (including
stock option fair value). In addition, the
Commissioner calculates the net cost plus
PLI by reference to the financial-accounting
data of Companies A, B, C, and D, which take
into account compensatory stock options.
Example 4. Material difference in
utilization of stock-based compensation.
(i) The facts are the same as in paragraph
(i) of Example 3.
(ii) No stock options are granted to the
employees of Taxpayer that engage in the
relevant business activity. Thus, no
deduction for stock options is made in
determining ‘‘reported operating profit’’
Stock options
fair value
Stock options
expensed
1,000
7,000
4,300
12,000
15,000
500
2,000
250
4,500
2,000
0
2,000
250
4,500
2,000
(within the meaning of § 1.482–5(d)(5)) for
the taxable year under examination.
(iii) Stock options are granted to the
employees of Companies A, B, C, and D, but
none of these companies expense stock
options for financial accounting purposes.
Under a method in accordance with U.S.
generally accepted accounting principles,
however, Companies A, B, C, and D disclose
the fair value of the stock options for
financial accounting purposes. The
utilization and treatment of employee stock
options is summarized in the following table:
Salaries and
other non-option compensation
Taxpayer
Company
Company
Company
Company
......................................................................................................................................
A ..................................................................................................................................
B ..................................................................................................................................
C ..................................................................................................................................
D ..................................................................................................................................
VerDate Nov<24>2008
16:58 Aug 03, 2009
Jkt 217001
PO 00000
Frm 00033
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
Stock options
fair value
Stock options
expensed
1,000
7,000
4,300
12,000
15,000
0
2,000
250
4,500
2,000
N/A
0
0
0
0
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
38862
Federal Register / Vol. 74, No. 148 / Tuesday, August 4, 2009 / Rules and Regulations
(iv) A material difference in the utilization
of stock-based compensation (within the
meaning of § 1.482–7T(d)(3)(i)) exists.
Analysis indicates that these differences
would materially affect the measure of an
arm’s length result under this paragraph (f).
In evaluating the comparable operating
profits of the tested party, the Commissioner
uses Taxpayer’s total services costs, which
include total compensation costs of 1,000. In
considering whether an adjustment is
necessary to improve comparability under
§§ 1.482–1(d)(2) and 1.482–5(c)(2)(iv), the
Commissioner recognizes that the total
compensation provided to employees of
Taxpayer is comparable to the total
compensation provided to employees of
Companies A, B, C, and D. Because
Companies A, B, C, and D do not expense
stock-based compensation for financial
accounting purposes, their reported operating
profits must be adjusted in order to improve
comparability with the tested party. The
Commissioner increases each comparable’s
total services costs, and also reduces its
reported operating profit, by the fair value of
the stock-based compensation incurred by
the comparable company.
(v) The adjustments to the data of
Companies A, B, C, and D described in
paragraph (iv) of this Example 4 are
summarized in the following table:
Salaries and
other non-option compensation
Stock options
fair value
Total services
costs
(A)
7,000
4,300
12,000
15,000
2,000
250
4,500
2,000
25,000
12,500
36,000
27,000
6,000
2,500
11,000
7,000
24.00
20.00
30.56
25.93
7,000
4,300
12,000
15,000
2,000
250
4,500
2,000
27,000
12,750
40,500
29,000
4,000
2,250
6,500
5,000
14.81
17.65
16.05
17.24
Per financial statements:
Company A ...................................................................
Company B ...................................................................
Company C ...................................................................
Company D ...................................................................
As adjusted:
Company A ...................................................................
Company B ...................................................................
Company C ...................................................................
Company D ...................................................................
Example 5. Non-material difference in
utilization of stock-based compensation.
(i) The facts are the same as in paragraph
(i) of Example 3.
(ii) Stock options are granted to the
employees of Taxpayer that engage in the
relevant business activity. Assume that, as
determined under a method in accordance
with U.S. generally accepted accounting
principles, the fair value of such stock
options attributable to the employees’
performance of the relevant business activity
is 50 for the taxable year. Taxpayer includes
salaries, fringe benefits, and all other
compensation of these employees (including
the stock option fair value) in ‘‘total services
costs,’’ as defined in paragraph (j) of this
section, and deducts these amounts in
determining ‘‘reported operating profit’’
within the meaning of § 1.482–5(d)(5), for the
taxable year under examination.
Operating
profit
(B)
Net cost plus
PLI
(B/A)
(Percent)
(iii) Stock options are granted to the
employees of Companies A, B, C, and D, but
none of these companies expense stock
options for financial accounting purposes.
Under a method in accordance with U.S.
generally accepted accounting principles,
however, Companies A, B, C, and D disclose
the fair value of the stock options for
financial accounting purposes. The
utilization and treatment of employee stock
options is summarized in the following table:
Salaries and
other non-option compensation
Taxpayer
Company
Company
Company
Company
......................................................................................................................................
A ..................................................................................................................................
B ..................................................................................................................................
C ..................................................................................................................................
D ..................................................................................................................................
(iv) Analysis of the data reported by
Companies A, B, C, and D indicates that an
adjustment for differences in utilization of
stock-based compensation would not have a
Stock options
fair value
Stock options
expensed
1,000
7,000
4,300
12,000
15,000
50
100
40
130
75
50
0
0
0
0
material effect on the determination of an
arm’s length result.
mstockstill on DSKH9S0YB1PROD with RULES3
Salaries and
other non-option compensation
Stock options
fair value
Total services
costs
(A)
7,000
4,300
12,000
15,000
100
40
130
75
25,000
12,500
36,000
27,000
6,000
2,500
11,000
7,000
24.00
20.00
30.56
25.93
7,000
4,300
12,000
15,000
100
40
130
75
25,100
12,540
36,130
27,075
5,900
2,460
10,870
6,925
23.51
19.62
30.09
25.58
Per financial statements:
Company A ...................................................................
Company B ...................................................................
Company C ...................................................................
Company D ...................................................................
As adjusted:
Company A ...................................................................
Company B ...................................................................
Company C ...................................................................
Company D ...................................................................
(v) Under the circumstances, the difference
in utilization of stock-based compensation
VerDate Nov<24>2008
16:58 Aug 03, 2009
Jkt 217001
would not materially affect the determination
of the arm’s length result under this
PO 00000
Frm 00034
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
Operating
profit
(B)
Net cost plus
PLI
(B/A)
(percent)
paragraph (f). Accordingly, in calculating the
net cost plus PLI, no comparability
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
Federal Register / Vol. 74, No. 148 / Tuesday, August 4, 2009 / Rules and Regulations
adjustment is made to the data of Companies
A, B, C, or D pursuant to §§ 1.482–1(d)(2) and
1.482–5(c)(2)(iv).
Example 6. Material difference in
comparables’ accounting for stock-based
compensation. (i) The facts are the same as
in paragraph (i) of Example 3.
(ii) Stock options are granted to the
employees of Taxpayer that engage in the
relevant business activity. Assume that, as
determined under a method in accordance
with U.S. generally accepted accounting
principles, the fair value of such stock
options attributable to employees’
performance of the relevant business activity
is 500 for the taxable year. Taxpayer includes
salaries, fringe benefits, and all other
compensation of these employees (including
the stock option fair value) in ‘‘total services
costs,’’ as defined in paragraph (j) of this
section, and deducts these amounts in
determining ‘‘reported operating profit’’
(within the meaning of § 1.482–5(d)(5)) for
the taxable year under examination.
(iii) Stock options are granted to the
employees of Companies A, B, C, and D.
38863
Companies A and B expense the stock
options for financial accounting purposes in
accordance with U.S. generally accepted
accounting principles. Companies C and D
do not expense the stock options for financial
accounting purposes. Under a method in
accordance with U.S. generally accepted
accounting principles, however, Companies
C and D disclose the fair value of these
options in their financial statements. The
utilization and accounting treatment of
options are depicted in the following table:
Salary and
other non-option compensation
Taxpayer
Company
Company
Company
Company
......................................................................................................................................
A ..................................................................................................................................
B ..................................................................................................................................
C ..................................................................................................................................
D ..................................................................................................................................
(iv) A material difference in accounting for
stock-based compensation (within the
meaning of § 1.482–7T(d)(3)(i)) exists.
Analysis indicates that this difference would
materially affect the measure of the arm’s
length result under paragraph (f) of this
section. In evaluating the comparable
operating profits of the tested party, the
Commissioner includes in total services costs
Taxpayer’s total compensation costs of 1,500
(including stock option fair value of 500). In
considering whether an adjustment is
necessary to improve comparability under
§§ 1.482–1(d)(2) and 1.482–5(c)(2)(iv), the
Commissioner recognizes that the total
employee compensation (including stock
options provided by Taxpayer and
Companies A, B, C, and D) provides a reliable
basis for comparison. Because Companies A
and B expense stock-based compensation for
financial accounting purposes, whereas
Companies C and D do not, an adjustment to
the comparables’ operating profit is
necessary. In computing the net cost plus
PLI, the Commissioner uses the financialaccounting data of Companies A and B, as
Stock options
fair value
Stock options
expensed
1,000
7,000
4,300
12,000
15,000
500
2,000
250
4,500
2,000
500
2,000
250
0
0
reported. The Commissioner increases the
total services costs of Companies C and D by
amounts equal to the fair value of their
respective stock options, and reduces the
operating profits of Companies C and D
accordingly.
(v) The adjustments described in paragraph
(iv) of this Example 6 are depicted in the
following table. For purposes of illustration,
the unadjusted data of Companies A and B
are also included.
Salaries and
other non-option compensation
Stock options
fair value
Total services
costs
(A)
7,000
4,300
2,000
250
27,000
12,750
4,000
2,250
14.80
17.65
12,000
15,000
4,500
2,000
40,500
29,000
6,500
5,000
16.05
17.24
mstockstill on DSKH9S0YB1PROD with RULES3
Per financial statements:
Company A ...................................................................
Company B ...................................................................
As adjusted:
Company C ...................................................................
Company D ...................................................................
(g) Profit split method—(1) In general.
The profit split method evaluates
whether the allocation of the combined
operating profit or loss attributable to
one or more controlled transactions is
arm’s length by reference to the relative
value of each controlled taxpayer’s
contribution to that combined operating
profit or loss. The relative value of each
controlled taxpayer’s contribution is
determined in a manner that reflects the
functions performed, risks assumed and
resources employed by such controlled
taxpayer in the relevant business
activity. For application of the profit
split method (both the comparable profit
split and the residual profit split), see
§ 1.482–6. The residual profit split
method may not be used where only one
VerDate Nov<24>2008
16:58 Aug 03, 2009
Jkt 217001
controlled taxpayer makes significant
nonroutine contributions.
(2) Examples. The principles of this
paragraph (g) are illustrated by the
following examples:
Example 1. Residual profit split. (i)
Company A, a corporation resident in
Country X, auctions spare parts by means of
an interactive database. Company A
maintains a database that lists all spare parts
available for auction. Company A developed
the software used to run the database.
Company A’s database is managed by
Company A employees in a data center
located in Country X, where storage and
manipulation of data also take place.
Company A has a wholly-owned subsidiary,
Company B, located in Country Y. Company
B performs marketing and advertising
activities to promote Company A’s
interactive database. Company B solicits
unrelated companies to auction spare parts
PO 00000
Frm 00035
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
Operating
profit
(B)
Net cost plus
PLI
(B/A)
(percent)
on Company A’s database, and solicits
customers interested in purchasing spare
parts online. Company B owns and maintains
a computer server in Country Y, where it
receives information on spare parts available
for auction. Company B has also designed a
specialized communications network that
connects its data center to Company A’s data
center in Country X. The communications
network allows Company B to enter data
from uncontrolled companies on Company
A’s database located in Country X. Company
B’s communications network also allows
uncontrolled companies to access Company
A’s interactive database and purchase spare
parts. Company B bore the risks and cost of
developing this specialized communications
network. Company B enters into contracts
with uncontrolled companies and provides
the companies access to Company A’s
database through the Company B network.
(ii) Analysis of the facts and circumstances
indicates that both Company A and Company
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
mstockstill on DSKH9S0YB1PROD with RULES3
38864
Federal Register / Vol. 74, No. 148 / Tuesday, August 4, 2009 / Rules and Regulations
B possess valuable intangible property that
they use to conduct the spare parts auction
business. Company A bore the economic
risks of developing and maintaining software
and the interactive database. Company B bore
the economic risks of developing the
necessary technology to transmit information
from its server to Company A’s data center,
and to allow uncontrolled companies to
access Company A’s database. Company B
helped to enhance the value of Company A’s
trademark and to establish a network of
customers in Country Y. In addition, there
are no market comparables for the
transactions between Company A and
Company B to reliably evaluate them
separately. Given the facts and
circumstances, the Commissioner determines
that a residual profit split method will
provide the most reliable measure of an arm’s
length result.
(iii) Under the residual profit split method,
profits are first allocated based on the routine
contributions of each taxpayer. Routine
contributions include general sales,
marketing or administrative functions
performed by Company B for Company A for
which it is possible to identify market
returns. Any residual profits will be allocated
based on the nonroutine contributions of
each taxpayer. Since both Company A and
Company B provided nonroutine
contributions, the residual profits are
allocated based on these contributions.
Example 2. Residual profit split. (i)
Company A, a Country 1 corporation,
provides specialized services pertaining to
the processing and storage of Level 1
hazardous waste (for purposes of this
example, the most dangerous type of waste).
Under long-term contracts with private
companies and governmental entities in
Country 1, Company A performs multiple
services, including transportation of Level 1
waste, development of handling and storage
protocols, recordkeeping, and supervision of
waste-storage facilities owned and
maintained by the contracting parties.
Company A’s research and development unit
has also developed new and unique
processes for transport and storage of Level
1 waste that minimize environmental and
occupational effects. In addition to this novel
technology, Company A has substantial
know-how and a long-term record of safe
operations in Country 1.
(ii) Company A’s subsidiary, Company B,
has been in operation continuously for a
number of years in Country 2. Company B
has successfully completed several projects
in Country 2 involving Level 2 and Level 3
waste, including projects with governmentowned entities. Company B has a license in
Country 2 to handle Level 2 waste (Level 3
does not require a license). Company B has
established a reputation for completing these
projects in a responsible manner. Company B
has cultivated contacts with procurement
officers, regulatory and licensing officials,
and other government personnel in Country
2.
(iii) Country 2 government publishes
invitations to bid on a project to handle the
country’s burgeoning volume of Level 1
waste, all of which is generated in
government-owned facilities. Bidding is
VerDate Nov<24>2008
16:58 Aug 03, 2009
Jkt 217001
limited to companies that are domiciled in
Country 2 and that possess a license from the
government to handle Level 1 or Level 2
waste. In an effort to submit a winning bid
to secure the contract, Company B points to
its Level 2 license and its record of successful
completion of projects, and also
demonstrates to these officials that it has
access to substantial technical expertise
pertaining to processing of Level 1 waste.
(iv) Company A enters into a long-term
technical services agreement with Company
B. Under this agreement, Company A agrees
to supply to Company B project managers
and other technical staff who have detailed
knowledge of Company A’s proprietary Level
1 remediation techniques. Company A
commits to perform under any long-term
contracts entered into by Company B.
Company B agrees to compensate Company
A based on a markup on Company A’s
marginal costs (pro rata compensation and
current expenses of Company A personnel).
In the bid on the Country 2 contract for Level
1 waste remediation, Company B proposes to
use a multi-disciplinary team of specialists
from Company A and Company B. Project
managers from Company A will direct the
team, which will also include employees of
Company B and will make use of physical
assets and facilities owned by Company B.
Only Company A and Company B personnel
will perform services under the contract.
Country 2 grants Company B a license to
handle Level 1 waste.
(v) Country 2 grants Company B a fiveyear, exclusive contract to provide processing
services for all Level 1 hazardous waste
generated in County 2. Under the contract,
Company B is to be paid a fixed price per ton
of Level 1 waste that it processes each year.
Company B undertakes that all services
provided will meet international standards
applicable to processing of Level 1 waste.
Company B begins performance under the
contract.
(vi) Analysis of the facts and circumstances
indicates that both Company A and Company
B make nonroutine contributions to the Level
1 waste processing activity in Country 2. In
addition, it is determined that reliable
comparables are not available for the services
that Company A provides under the longterm contract, in part because those services
incorporate specialized knowledge and
process intangible property developed by
Company A. It is also determined that
reliable comparables are not available for the
Level 2 license in Country 2, the successful
track record, the government contacts with
Country 2 officials, and other intangible
property that Company B provided. In view
of these facts, the Commissioner determines
that the residual profit split method for
services in paragraph (g) of this section
provides the most reliable means of
evaluating the arm’s length results for the
transaction. In evaluating the appropriate
returns to Company A and Company B for
their respective contributions, the
Commissioner takes into account that the
controlled parties incur different risks,
because the contract between the controlled
parties provides that Company A will be
compensated on the basis of marginal costs
incurred, plus a markup, whereas the
PO 00000
Frm 00036
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
contract between Company B and the
government of Country 2 provides that
Company B will be compensated on a fixedprice basis per ton of Level 1 waste
processed.
(vii) In the first stage of the residual profit
split, an arm’s length return is determined for
routine activities performed by Company B
in Country 2, such as transportation,
recordkeeping, and administration. In
addition, an arm’s length return is
determined for routine activities performed
by Company A (administrative, human
resources, etc.) in connection with providing
personnel to Company B. After the arm’s
length return for these functions is
determined, residual profits may be present.
In the second stage of the residual profit
split, any residual profit is allocated by
reference to the relative value of the
nonroutine contributions made by each
taxpayer. Company A’s nonroutine
contributions include its commitment to
perform under the contract and the
specialized technical knowledge made
available through the project managers under
the services agreement with Company B.
Company B’s nonroutine contributions
include its licenses to handle Level 1 and
Level 2 waste in Country 2, its knowledge of
and contacts with procurement, regulatory
and licensing officials in the government of
Country 2, and its record in Country 2 of
successfully handling non-Level 1 waste.
(h) Unspecified methods. Methods not
specified in paragraphs (b) through (g)
of this section may be used to evaluate
whether the amount charged in a
controlled services transaction is arm’s
length. Any method used under this
paragraph (h) must be applied in
accordance with the provisions of
§ 1.482–1. Consistent with the specified
methods, an unspecified method should
take into account the general principle
that uncontrolled taxpayers evaluate the
terms of a transaction by considering the
realistic alternatives to that transaction,
including economically similar
transactions structured as other than
services transactions, and only enter
into a particular transaction if none of
the alternatives is preferable to it. For
example, the comparable uncontrolled
services price method compares a
controlled services transaction to
similar uncontrolled transactions to
provide a direct estimate of the price to
which the parties would have agreed
had they resorted directly to a market
alternative to the controlled services
transaction. Therefore, in establishing
whether a controlled services
transaction achieved an arm’s length
result, an unspecified method should
provide information on the prices or
profits that the controlled taxpayer
could have realized by choosing a
realistic alternative to the controlled
services transaction (for example,
outsourcing a particular service
function, rather than performing the
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
Federal Register / Vol. 74, No. 148 / Tuesday, August 4, 2009 / Rules and Regulations
function itself). As with any method, an
unspecified method will not be applied
unless it provides the most reliable
measure of an arm’s length result under
the principles of the best method rule.
See § 1.482–1(c). Therefore, in
accordance with § 1.482–1(d)
(comparability), to the extent that an
unspecified method relies on internal
data rather than uncontrolled
comparables, its reliability will be
reduced. Similarly, the reliability of a
method will be affected by the
reliability of the data and assumptions
used to apply the method, including any
projections used.
mstockstill on DSKH9S0YB1PROD with RULES3
Example. (i) Company T, a U.S.
corporation, develops computer software
programs including a real estate investment
program that performs financial analysis of
commercial real properties. Companies U, V,
and W are owned by Company T. The
primary business activity of Companies U, V,
and W is commercial real estate
development. For business reasons, Company
T does not sell the computer program to its
customers (on a compact disk or via
download from Company T’s server through
the Internet). Instead, Company T maintains
the software program on its own server and
allows customers to access the program
through the Internet by using a password.
The transactions between Company T and
Companies U, V, and W are structured as
controlled services transactions whereby
Companies U, V, and W obtain access via the
Internet to Company T’s software program for
financial analysis. Each year, Company T
provides a revised version of the computer
program including the most recent data on
the commercial real estate market, rendering
the old version obsolete.
(ii) In evaluating whether the consideration
paid by Companies U, V, and W to Company
T was arm’s length, the Commissioner may
consider, subject to the best method rule of
§ 1.482–1(c), Company T’s alternative of
selling the computer program to Companies
U, V, and W on a compact disk or via
download through the Internet. The
Commissioner determines that the controlled
services transactions between Company T
and Companies U, V, and W are comparable
to the transfer of a similar software program
on a compact disk or via download through
the Internet between uncontrolled parties.
Subject to adjustments being made for
material differences between the controlled
services transactions and the comparable
uncontrolled transactions, the uncontrolled
transfers of tangible property may be used to
evaluate the arm’s length results for the
controlled services transactions between
Company T and Companies U, V, and W.
(i) Contingent-payment contractual
terms for services—(1) Contingentpayment contractual terms recognized
in general. In the case of a contingentpayment arrangement, the arm’s length
result for the controlled services
transaction generally would not require
payment by the recipient to the renderer
in the tax accounting period in which
VerDate Nov<24>2008
16:58 Aug 03, 2009
Jkt 217001
the service is rendered if the specified
contingency does not occur in that
period. If the specified contingency
occurs in a tax accounting period
subsequent to the period in which the
service is rendered, the arm’s length
result for the controlled services
transaction generally would require
payment by the recipient to the renderer
on a basis that reflects the recipient’s
benefit from the services rendered and
the risks borne by the renderer in
performing the activities in the absence
of a provision that unconditionally
obligates the recipient to pay for the
activities performed in the tax
accounting period in which the service
is rendered.
(2) Contingent-payment arrangement.
For purposes of this paragraph (i), an
arrangement will be treated as a
contingent-payment arrangement if it
meets all of the requirements in
paragraph (i)(2)(i) of this section and is
consistent with the economic substance
and conduct requirement in paragraph
(i)(2)(ii) of this section.
(i) General requirements—(A) Written
contract. The arrangement is set forth in
a written contract entered into prior to,
or contemporaneous with, the start of
the activity or group of activities
constituting the controlled services
transaction.
(B) Specified contingency. The
contract states that payment for a
controlled services transaction is
contingent (in whole or in part) upon
the happening of a future benefit
(within the meaning of § 1.482–9(l)(3))
for the recipient directly related to the
activity or group of activities. For
purposes of the preceding sentence,
whether the future benefit is directly
related to the activity or group of
activities is evaluated based on all the
facts and circumstances.
(C) Basis for payment. The contract
provides for payment on a basis that
reflects the recipient’s benefit from the
services rendered and the risks borne by
the renderer.
(ii) Economic substance and conduct.
The arrangement, including the
contingency and the basis for payment,
is consistent with the economic
substance of the controlled transaction
and the conduct of the controlled
parties. See § 1.482–1(d)(3)(ii)(B).
(3) Commissioner’s authority to
impute contingent-payment terms.
Consistent with the authority in
§ 1.482–1(d)(3)(ii)(B), the Commissioner
may impute contingent-payment
contractual terms in a controlled
services transaction if the economic
substance of the transaction is
consistent with the existence of such
terms.
PO 00000
Frm 00037
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
38865
(4) Evaluation of arm’s length charge.
Whether the amount charged in a
contingent-payment arrangement is
arm’s length will be evaluated in
accordance with this section and other
applicable regulations under section
482. In evaluating whether the amount
charged in a contingent-payment
arrangement for the manufacture,
construction, or development of tangible
or intangible property owned by the
recipient is arm’s length, the charge
determined under the rules of §§ 1.482–
3 and 1.482–4 for the transfer of similar
property may be considered. See
§ 1.482–1(f)(2)(ii).
(5) Examples. The principles of this
paragraph (i) are illustrated by the
following examples:
Example 1. (i) Company X is a member of
a controlled group that has operated in the
pharmaceutical sector for many years. In year
1, Company X enters into a written services
agreement with Company Y, another member
of the controlled group, whereby Company X
will perform certain research and
development activities for Company Y. The
parties enter into the agreement before
Company X undertakes any of the research
and development activities covered by the
agreement. At the time the agreement is
entered into, the possibility that any new
products will be developed is highly
uncertain and the possible market or markets
for any products that may be developed are
not known and cannot be estimated with any
reliability. Under the agreement, Company Y
will own any patent or other rights that result
from the activities of Company X under the
agreement and Company Y will make
payments to Company X only if such
activities result in commercial sales of one or
more derivative products. In that event,
Company Y will pay Company X, for a
specified period, x% of Company Y’s gross
sales of each of such products. Payments are
required with respect to each jurisdiction in
which Company Y has sales of such a
derivative product, beginning with the first
year in which the sale of a product occurs in
the jurisdiction and continuing for six
additional years with respect to sales of that
product in that jurisdiction.
(ii) As a result of research and
development activities performed by
Company X for Company Y in years 1
through 4, a compound is developed that
may be more effective than existing
medications in the treatment of certain
conditions. Company Y registers the patent
rights with respect to the compound in
several jurisdictions in year 4. In year 6,
Company Y begins commercial sales of the
product in Jurisdiction A and, in that year,
Company Y makes the payment to Company
X that is required under the agreement. Sales
of the product continue in Jurisdiction A in
years 7 through 9 and Company Y makes the
payments to Company X in years 7 through
9 that are required under the agreement.
(iii) The years under examination are years
6 through 9. In evaluating whether the
contingent-payment terms will be
recognized, the Commissioner considers
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
mstockstill on DSKH9S0YB1PROD with RULES3
38866
Federal Register / Vol. 74, No. 148 / Tuesday, August 4, 2009 / Rules and Regulations
whether the conditions of paragraph (i)(2) of
this section are met and whether the
arrangement, including the specified
contingency and basis of payment, is
consistent with the economic substance of
the controlled services transaction and with
the conduct of the controlled parties. The
Commissioner determines that the
contingent-payment arrangement is reflected
in the written agreement between Company
X and Company Y; that commercial sales of
products developed under the arrangement
represent future benefits for Company Y
directly related to the controlled services
transaction; and that the basis for the
payment provided for in the event such sales
occur reflects the recipient’s benefit and the
renderer’s risk. Consistent with § 1.482–
1(d)(3)(ii)(B) and (iii)(B), the Commissioner
determines that the parties’ conduct over the
term of the agreement has been consistent
with their contractual allocation of risk; that
Company X has the financial capacity to bear
the risk that its research and development
services may be unsuccessful and that it may
not receive compensation for such services;
and that Company X exercises managerial
and operational control over the research and
development, such that it is reasonable for
Company X to assume the risk of those
activities. Based on all these facts, the
Commissioner determines that the
contingent-payment arrangement is
consistent with economic substance.
(iv) In determining whether the amount
charged under the contingent-payment
arrangement in each of years 6 through 9 is
arm’s length, the Commissioner evaluates
under this section and other applicable rules
under section 482 the compensation paid in
each year for the research and development
services. This analysis takes into account that
under the contingent-payment terms
Company X bears the risk that it might not
receive payment for its services in the event
that those services do not result in
marketable products and the risk that the
magnitude of its payment depends on the
magnitude of product sales, if any. The
Commissioner also considers the alternatives
reasonably available to the parties in
connection with the controlled services
transaction. One such alternative, in view of
Company X’s willingness and ability to bear
the risk and expenses of research and
development activities, would be for
Company X to undertake such activities on
its own behalf and to license the rights to
products successfully developed as a result
of such activities. Accordingly, in evaluating
whether the compensation of x% of gross
sales that is paid to Company X during the
first four years of commercial sales of
derivative products is arm’s length, the
Commissioner may consider the royalties (or
other consideration) charged for intangible
property that are comparable to those
incorporated in the derivative products and
that resulted from Company X’s research and
development activities under the contingentpayment arrangement.
Example 2. (i) The facts are the same as in
Example 1, except that no commercial sales
ever materialize with regard to the patented
compound so that, consistent with the
agreement, Company Y makes no payments
to Company X in years 6 through 9.
VerDate Nov<24>2008
16:58 Aug 03, 2009
Jkt 217001
(ii) Based on all the facts and
circumstances, the Commissioner determines
that the contingent-payment arrangement is
consistent with economic substance, and the
result (no payments in years 6 through 9) is
consistent with an arm’s length result.
Example 3. (i) The facts are the same as in
Example 1, except that, in the event that
Company X’s activities result in commercial
sales of one or more derivative products by
Company Y, Company Y will pay Company
X a fee equal to the research and
development costs borne by Company X plus
an amount equal to x% of such costs, with
the payment to be made in the first year in
which any such sales occur. The x% markup
on costs is within the range, ascertainable in
year 1, of markups on costs of independent
contract researchers that are compensated
under terms that unconditionally obligate the
recipient to pay for the activities performed
in the tax accounting period in which the
service is rendered. In year 6, Company Y
makes the single payment to Company X that
is required under the arrangement.
(ii) The years under examination are years
6 through 9. In evaluating whether the
contingent-payment terms will be
recognized, the Commissioner considers
whether the requirements of paragraph (i)(2)
of this section were met at the time the
written agreement was entered into and
whether the arrangement, including the
specified contingency and basis for payment,
is consistent with the economic substance of
the controlled services transaction and with
the conduct of the controlled parties. The
Commissioner determines that the
contingent-payment terms are reflected in the
written agreement between Company X and
Company Y and that commercial sales of
products developed under the arrangement
represent future benefits for Company Y
directly related to the controlled services
transaction. However, in this case, the
Commissioner determines that the basis for
payment provided for in the event such sales
occur (costs of the services plus x%,
representing the markup for contract research
in the absence of any nonpayment risk) does
not reflect the recipient’s benefit and the
renderer’s risks in the controlled services
transaction. Based on all the facts and
circumstances, the Commissioner determines
that the contingent-payment arrangement is
not consistent with economic substance.
(iii) Accordingly, the Commissioner
determines to exercise its authority to impute
contingent-payment contractual terms that
accord with economic substance, pursuant to
paragraph (i)(3) of this section and § 1.482–
1(d)(3)(ii)(B). In this regard, the
Commissioner takes into account that at the
time the arrangement was entered into, the
possibility that any new products would be
developed was highly uncertain and the
possible market or markets for any products
that may be developed were not known and
could not be estimated with any reliability.
In such circumstances, it is reasonable to
conclude that one possible basis of payment,
in order to reflect the recipient’s benefit and
the renderer’s risks, would be a charge equal
to a percentage of commercial sales of one or
more derivative products that result from the
research and development activities. The
PO 00000
Frm 00038
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
Commissioner in this case may impute terms
that require Company Y to pay Company X
a percentage of sales of the products
developed under the agreement in each of
years 6 through 9.
(iv) In determining an appropriate arm’s
length charge under such imputed
contractual terms, the Commissioner
conducts an analysis under this section and
other applicable rules under section 482, and
considers the alternatives reasonably
available to the parties in connection with
the controlled services transaction. One such
alternative, in view of Company X’s
willingness and ability to bear the risks and
expenses of research and development
activities, would be for Company X to
undertake such activities on its own behalf
and to license the rights to products
successfully developed as a result of such
activities. Accordingly, for purposes of its
determination, the Commissioner may
consider the royalties (or other consideration)
charged for intangible property that are
comparable to those incorporated in the
derivative products that resulted from
Company X’s research and development
activities under the contingent-payment
arrangement.
(j) Total services costs. For purposes
of this section, total services costs
means all costs of rendering those
services for which total services costs
are being determined. Total services
costs include all costs in cash or in kind
(including stock-based compensation)
that, based on analysis of the facts and
circumstances, are directly identified
with, or reasonably allocated in
accordance with the principles of
paragraph (k)(2) of this section to, the
services. In general, costs for this
purpose should comprise provision for
all resources expended, used, or made
available to achieve the specific
objective for which the service is
rendered. Reference to generally
accepted accounting principles or
Federal income tax accounting rules
may provide a useful starting point but
will not necessarily be conclusive
regarding inclusion of costs in total
services costs. Total services costs do
not include interest expense, foreign
income taxes (as defined in § 1.901–
2(a)), or domestic income taxes.
(k) Allocation of costs—(1) In general.
In any case where the renderer’s activity
that results in a benefit (within the
meaning of paragraph (l)(3) of this
section) for one recipient in a controlled
services transaction also generates a
benefit for one or more other members
of a controlled group (including the
benefit, if any, to the renderer), and the
amount charged under this section in
the controlled services transaction is
determined under a method that makes
reference to costs, costs must be
allocated among the portions of the
activity performed for the benefit of the
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
Federal Register / Vol. 74, No. 148 / Tuesday, August 4, 2009 / Rules and Regulations
first mentioned recipient and such other
members of the controlled group under
this paragraph (k). The principles of this
paragraph (k) must also be used
whenever it is appropriate to allocate
and apportion any class of costs (for
example, overhead costs) in order to
determine the total services costs of
rendering the services. In no event will
an allocation of costs based on a
generalized or non-specific benefit be
appropriate.
(2) Appropriate method of allocation
and apportionment—(i) Reasonable
method standard. Any reasonable
method may be used to allocate and
apportion costs under this section. In
establishing the appropriate method of
allocation and apportionment,
consideration should be given to all
bases and factors, including, for
example, total services costs, total costs
for a relevant activity, assets, sales,
compensation, space utilized, and time
spent. The costs incurred by supporting
departments may be apportioned to
other departments on the basis of
reasonable overall estimates, or such
costs may be reflected in the other
departments’ costs by applying
reasonable departmental overhead rates.
Allocations and apportionments of costs
must be made on the basis of the full
cost, as opposed to the incremental cost.
(ii) Use of general practices. The
practices used by the taxpayer to
apportion costs in connection with
preparation of statements and analyses
for the use of management, creditors,
minority shareholders, joint venturers,
clients, customers, potential investors,
or other parties or agencies in interest
will be considered as potential
indicators of reliable allocation
methods, but need not be accorded
conclusive weight by the Commissioner.
In determining the extent to which
allocations are to be made to or from
foreign members of a controlled group,
practices employed by the domestic
members in apportioning costs among
themselves will also be considered if the
relationships with the foreign members
are comparable to the relationships
among the domestic members of the
controlled group. For example, if for
purposes of reporting to public
stockholders or to a governmental
agency, a corporation apportions the
costs attributable to its executive
officers among the domestic members of
a controlled group on a reasonable and
consistent basis, and such officers
exercise comparable control over foreign
members of the controlled group, such
domestic apportionment practice will be
considered in determining the
allocations to be made to the foreign
members.
(3) Examples. The principles of this
paragraph (k) are illustrated by the
following examples:
Example 1. Company A pays an annual
license fee of 500x to an uncontrolled
38867
taxpayer for unlimited use of a database
within the corporate group. Under the terms
of the license with the uncontrolled taxpayer,
Company A is permitted to use the database
for its own use and in rendering research
services to its subsidiary, Company B.
Company B obtains benefits from the
database that are similar to those that it
would obtain if it had independently
licensed the database from the uncontrolled
taxpayer. Evaluation of the arm’s length
charge (under a method in which costs are
relevant) to Company B for the controlled
services that incorporate use of the database
must take into account the full amount of the
license fee of 500x paid by Company A, as
reasonably allocated and apportioned to the
relevant benefits, although the incremental
use of the database for the benefit of
Company B did not result in an increase in
the license fee paid by Company A.
Example 2. (i) Company A is a consumer
products company located in the United
States. Companies B and C are wholly-owned
subsidiaries of Company A and are located in
Countries B and C, respectively. Company A
and its subsidiaries manufacture products for
sale in their respective markets. Company A
hires a consultant who has expertise
regarding a manufacturing process used by
Company A and its subsidiary, Company B.
Company C, the Country C subsidiary, uses
a different manufacturing process, and
accordingly will not receive any benefit from
the outside consultant hired by Company A.
In allocating and apportioning the cost of
hiring the outside consultant (100), Company
A determines that sales constitute the most
appropriate allocation key.
(ii) Company A and its subsidiaries have
the following sales:
Company
A
B
C
Total
Sales ................................................................................................................
400
100
200
700
(iii) Because Company C does not obtain
any benefit from the consultant, none of the
costs are allocated to it. Rather, the costs of
100 are allocated and apportioned ratably to
Company A and Company B as the entities
that obtain a benefit from the campaign,
Company
A
mstockstill on DSKH9S0YB1PROD with RULES3
Allocation .....................................................................................................................................
Amount .........................................................................................................................................
(l) Controlled services transaction—
(1) In general. A controlled services
transaction includes any activity (as
defined in paragraph (l)(2) of this
section) by one member of a group of
controlled taxpayers (the renderer) that
results in a benefit (as defined in
paragraph (l)(3) of this section) to one or
more other members of the controlled
group (the recipient(s)).
(2) Activity. An activity includes the
performance of functions, assumptions
of risks, or use by a renderer of tangible
or intangible property or other
VerDate Nov<24>2008
16:58 Aug 03, 2009
Jkt 217001
resources, capabilities, or knowledge,
such as knowledge of and ability to take
advantage of particularly advantageous
situations or circumstances. An activity
also includes making available to the
recipient any property or other
resources of the renderer.
(3) Benefit—(i) In general. An activity
is considered to provide a benefit to the
recipient if the activity directly results
in a reasonably identifiable increment of
economic or commercial value that
enhances the recipient’s commercial
position, or that may reasonably be
PO 00000
based on the total sales of those entities
(500). An appropriate allocation of the costs
of the consultant is as follows:
Frm 00039
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
B
400/500
80
100/500
20
Total
100
anticipated to do so. An activity is
generally considered to confer a benefit
if, taking into account the facts and
circumstances, an uncontrolled taxpayer
in circumstances comparable to those of
the recipient would be willing to pay an
uncontrolled party to perform the same
or similar activity on either a fixed or
contingent-payment basis, or if the
recipient otherwise would have
performed for itself the same activity or
a similar activity. A benefit may result
to the owner of intangible property if
the renderer engages in an activity that
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
mstockstill on DSKH9S0YB1PROD with RULES3
38868
Federal Register / Vol. 74, No. 148 / Tuesday, August 4, 2009 / Rules and Regulations
is reasonably anticipated to result in an
increase in the value of that intangible
property. Paragraphs (l)(3)(ii) through
(v) of this section provide guidelines
that indicate the presence or absence of
a benefit for the activities in the
controlled services transaction.
(ii) Indirect or remote benefit. An
activity is not considered to provide a
benefit to the recipient if, at the time the
activity is performed, the present or
reasonably anticipated benefit from that
activity is so indirect or remote that the
recipient would not be willing to pay,
on either a fixed or contingent-payment
basis, an uncontrolled party to perform
a similar activity, and would not be
willing to perform such activity for itself
for this purpose. The determination
whether the benefit from an activity is
indirect or remote is based on the nature
of the activity and the situation of the
recipient, taking into consideration all
facts and circumstances.
(iii) Duplicative activities. If an
activity performed by a controlled
taxpayer duplicates an activity that is
performed, or that reasonably may be
anticipated to be performed, by another
controlled taxpayer on or for its own
account, the activity is generally not
considered to provide a benefit to the
recipient, unless the duplicative activity
itself provides an additional benefit to
the recipient.
(iv) Shareholder activities. An activity
is not considered to provide a benefit if
the sole effect of that activity is either
to protect the renderer’s capital
investment in the recipient or in other
members of the controlled group, or to
facilitate compliance by the renderer
with reporting, legal, or regulatory
requirements applicable specifically to
the renderer, or both. Activities in the
nature of day-to-day management
generally do not relate to protection of
the renderer’s capital investment. Based
on analysis of the facts and
circumstances, activities in connection
with a corporate reorganization may be
considered to provide a benefit to one
or more controlled taxpayers.
(v) Passive association. A controlled
taxpayer generally will not be
considered to obtain a benefit where
that benefit results from the controlled
taxpayer’s status as a member of a
controlled group. A controlled
taxpayer’s status as a member of a
controlled group may, however, be
taken into account for purposes of
evaluating comparability between
controlled and uncontrolled
transactions.
(4) Disaggregation of transactions. A
controlled services transaction may be
analyzed as two separate transactions
for purposes of determining the arm’s
VerDate Nov<24>2008
16:58 Aug 03, 2009
Jkt 217001
length consideration, if that analysis is
the most reliable means of determining
the arm’s length consideration for the
controlled services transaction. See the
best method rule under § 1.482–1(c).
(5) Examples. The principles of this
paragraph (l) are illustrated by the
following examples. In each example,
assume that Company X is a U.S.
corporation and Company Y is a whollyowned subsidiary of Company X in
Country B.
Example 1. In general. In developing a
worldwide advertising and promotional
campaign for a consumer product, Company
X pays for and obtains designation as an
official sponsor of the Olympics. This
designation allows Company X and all its
subsidiaries, including Company Y, to
identify themselves as sponsors and to use
the Olympic logo in advertising and
promotional campaigns. The Olympic
sponsorship campaign generates benefits to
Company X, Company Y, and other
subsidiaries of Company X.
Example 2. Indirect or remote benefit.
Based on recommendations contained in a
study performed by its internal staff,
Company X implements certain changes in
its management structure and the
compensation of managers of divisions
located in the United States. No changes
were recommended or considered for
Company Y in Country B. The internal study
and the resultant changes in its management
may increase the competitiveness and overall
efficiency of Company X. Any benefits to
Company Y as a result of the study are,
however, indirect or remote. Consequently,
Company Y is not considered to obtain a
benefit from the study.
Example 3. Indirect or remote benefit.
Based on recommendations contained in a
study performed by its internal staff,
Company X decides to make changes to the
management structure and management
compensation of its subsidiaries, in order to
increase their profitability. As a result of the
recommendations in the study, Company X
implements substantial changes in the
management structure and management
compensation scheme of Company Y. The
study and the changes implemented as a
result of the recommendations are
anticipated to increase the profitability of
Company X and its subsidiaries. The
increased management efficiency of
Company Y that results from these changes
is considered to be a specific and identifiable
benefit, rather than remote or speculative.
Example 4. Duplicative activities. At its
corporate headquarters in the United States,
Company X performs certain treasury
functions for Company X and for its
subsidiaries, including Company Y. These
treasury functions include raising capital,
arranging medium and long-term financing
for general corporate needs, including cash
management. Under these circumstances, the
treasury functions performed by Company X
do not duplicate the functions performed by
Company Y’s staff. Accordingly, Company Y
is considered to obtain a benefit from the
functions performed by Company X.
PO 00000
Frm 00040
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
Example 5. Duplicative activities. The facts
are the same as in Example 4, except that
Company Y’s functions include ensuring that
the financing requirements of its own
operations are met. Analysis of the facts and
circumstances indicates that Company Y
independently administers all financing and
cash-management functions necessary to
support its operations, and does not utilize
financing obtained by Company X. Under the
circumstances, the treasury functions
performed by Company X are duplicative of
similar functions performed by Company Y’s
staff, and the duplicative functions do not
enhance Company Y’s position. Accordingly,
Company Y is not considered to obtain a
benefit from the duplicative activities
performed by Company X.
Example 6. Duplicative activities.
Company X’s in-house legal staff has
specialized expertise in several areas,
including intellectual property. The
intellectual property legal staff specializes in
technology licensing, patents, copyrights,
and negotiating and drafting intellectual
property agreements. Company Y is involved
in negotiations with an unrelated party to
enter into a complex joint venture that
includes multiple licenses and cross-licenses
of patents and copyrights. Company Y retains
outside counsel that specializes in
intellectual property law to review the
transaction documents. Company Y does not
have in-house counsel of its own to review
intellectual property transaction documents.
Outside counsel advises that the terms for the
proposed transaction are advantageous to
Company Y and that the contracts are valid
and fully enforceable. Company X’s
intellectual property legal staff possess
valuable knowledge of Company Y’s patents
and technological achievements. They are
capable of identifying particular scientific
attributes protected under patent that
strengthen Company Y’s negotiating position,
and of discovering flaws in the patents
offered by the unrelated party. To reduce risk
associated with the transaction, Company X’s
intellectual property legal staff reviews the
transaction documents before Company Y
executes the contracts. Company X’s
intellectual property legal staff also
separately evaluates the patents and
copyrights with respect to the licensing
arrangements and concurs in the opinion
provided by outside counsel. The activities
performed by Company X substantially
duplicate the legal services obtained by
Company Y, but they also reduce risk
associated with the transaction in a way that
confers an additional benefit on Company Y.
Example 7. Shareholder activities.
Company X is a publicly held corporation.
U.S. laws and regulations applicable to
publicly held corporations such as Company
X require the preparation and filing of
periodic reports that show, among other
things, profit and loss statements, balance
sheets, and other material financial
information concerning the company’s
operations. Company X, Company Y and
each of the other subsidiaries maintain their
own separate accounting departments that
record individual transactions and prepare
financial statements in accordance with their
local accounting practices. Company Y, and
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
mstockstill on DSKH9S0YB1PROD with RULES3
Federal Register / Vol. 74, No. 148 / Tuesday, August 4, 2009 / Rules and Regulations
the other subsidiaries, forward the results of
their financial performance to Company X,
which analyzes and compiles these data into
periodic reports in accordance with U.S. laws
and regulations. Because Company X’s
preparation and filing of the reports relate
solely to its role as an investor of capital or
shareholder in Company Y or to its
compliance with reporting, legal, or
regulatory requirements, or both, these
activities constitute shareholder activities
and therefore Company Y is not considered
to obtain a benefit from the preparation and
filing of the reports.
Example 8. Shareholder activities. The
facts are the same as in Example 7, except
that Company Y’s accounting department
maintains a general ledger recording
individual transactions, but does not prepare
any financial statements (such as profit and
loss statements and balance sheets). Instead,
Company Y forwards the general ledger data
to Company X, and Company X analyzes and
compiles financial statements for Company
Y, as well as for Company X’s overall
operations, for purposes of complying with
U.S. reporting requirements. Company Y is
subject to reporting requirements in Country
B similar to those applicable to Company X
in the United States. Much of the data that
Company X analyzes and compiles regarding
Company Y’s operations for purposes of
complying with the U.S. reporting
requirements are made available to Company
Y for its use in preparing reports that must
be filed in Country B. Company Y
incorporates these data, after minor
adjustments for differences in local
accounting practices, into the reports that it
files in Country B. Under these
circumstances, because Company X’s
analysis and compilation of Company Y’s
financial data does not relate solely to its role
as an investor of capital or shareholder in
Company Y, or to its compliance with
reporting, legal, or regulatory requirements,
or both, these activities do not constitute
shareholder activities.
Example 9. Shareholder activities.
Members of Company X’s internal audit staff
visit Company Y on a semiannual basis in
order to review the subsidiary’s adherence to
internal operating procedures issued by
Company X and its compliance with U.S.
anti-bribery laws, which apply to Company
Y on account of its ownership by a U.S.
corporation. Because the sole effect of the
reviews by Company X’s audit staff is to
protect Company X’s investment in Company
Y, or to facilitate Company X’s compliance
with U.S. anti-bribery laws, or both, the visits
are shareholder activities and therefore
Company Y is not considered to obtain a
benefit from the visits.
Example 10. Shareholder activities.
Country B recently enacted legislation that
changed the foreign currency exchange
controls applicable to foreign shareholders of
Country B corporations. Company X
concludes that it may benefit from changing
the capital structure of Company Y, thus
taking advantage of the new foreign currency
exchange control laws in Country B.
Company X engages an investment banking
firm and a law firm to review the Country B
legislation and to propose possible changes
VerDate Nov<24>2008
16:58 Aug 03, 2009
Jkt 217001
to the capital structure of Company Y.
Because Company X’s retention of the firms
facilitates Company Y’s ability to pay
dividends and other amounts and has the
sole effect of protecting Company X’s
investment in Company Y, these activities
constitute shareholder activities and
Company Y is not considered to obtain a
benefit from the activities.
Example 11. Shareholder activities. The
facts are the same as in Example 10, except
that Company Y bears the full cost of
retaining the firms to evaluate the new
foreign currency control laws in Country B
and to make appropriate changes to its stock
ownership by Company X. Company X is
considered to obtain a benefit from the
rendering by Company Y of these activities,
which would be shareholder activities if
conducted by Company X (see Example 10).
Example 12. Shareholder activities. The
facts are the same as in Example 10, except
that the new laws relate solely to corporate
governance in Country B, and Company X
retains the law firm and investment banking
firm in order to evaluate whether
restructuring would increase Company Y’s
profitability, reduce the number of legal
entities in Country B, and increase Company
Y’s ability to introduce new products more
quickly in Country B. Because Company X
retained the law firm and the investment
banking firm primarily to enhance Company
Y’s profitability and the efficiency of its
operations, and not solely to protect
Company X’s investment in Company Y or to
facilitate Company X’s compliance with
Country B’s corporate laws, or to both, these
activities do not constitute shareholder
activities.
Example 13. Shareholder activities.
Company X establishes detailed personnel
policies for its subsidiaries, including
Company Y. Company X also reviews and
approves the performance appraisals of
Company Y’s executives, monitors levels of
compensation paid to all Company Y
personnel, and is involved in hiring and
firing decisions regarding the senior
executives of Company Y. Because this
personnel-related activity by Company X
involves day-to-day management of Company
Y, this activity does not relate solely to
Company X’s role as an investor of capital or
a shareholder of Company Y, and therefore
does not constitute a shareholder activity.
Example 14. Shareholder activities. Each
year, Company X conducts a two-day retreat
for its senior executives. The purpose of the
retreat is to refine the long-term business
strategy of Company X and its subsidiaries,
including Company Y, and to produce a
confidential strategy statement. The strategy
statement identifies several potential growth
initiatives for Company X and its subsidiaries
and lists general means of increasing the
profitability of the company as a whole. The
strategy statement is made available without
charge to Company Y and the other
subsidiaries of Company X. Company Y
independently evaluates whether to
implement some, all, or none of the
initiatives contained in the strategy
statement. Because the preparation of the
strategy statement does not relate solely to
Company X’s role as an investor of capital or
PO 00000
Frm 00041
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
38869
a shareholder of Company Y, the expense of
preparing the document is not a shareholder
expense.
Example 15. Passive association/benefit.
Company X is the parent corporation of a
large controlled group that has been in
operation in the information-technology
sector for ten years. Company Y is a small
corporation that was recently acquired by the
Company X controlled group from local
Country B owners. Several months after the
acquisition of Company Y, Company Y
obtained a contract to redesign and assemble
the information-technology networks and
systems of a large financial institution in
Country B. The project was significantly
larger and more complex than any other
project undertaken to date by Company Y.
Company Y did not use Company X’s
marketing intangible property to solicit the
contract, and Company X had no
involvement in the solicitation, negotiation,
or anticipated execution of the contract. For
purposes of this section, Company Y is not
considered to obtain a benefit from Company
X or any other member of the controlled
group because the ability of Company Y to
obtain the contract, or to obtain the contract
on more favorable terms than would have
been possible prior to its acquisition by the
Company X controlled group, was due to
Company Y’s status as a member of the
Company X controlled group and not to any
specific activity by Company X or any other
member of the controlled group.
Example 16. Passive association/benefit.
The facts are the same as in Example 15,
except that Company X executes a
performance guarantee with respect to the
contract, agreeing to assist in the project if
Company Y fails to meet certain mileposts.
This performance guarantee allowed
Company Y to obtain the contract on
materially more favorable terms than
otherwise would have been possible.
Company Y is considered to obtain a benefit
from Company X’s execution of the
performance guarantee.
Example 17. Passive association/benefit.
The facts are the same as in Example 15,
except that Company X began the process of
negotiating the contract with the financial
institution in Country B before acquiring
Company Y. Once Company Y was acquired
by Company X, the contract with the
financial institution was entered into by
Company Y. Company Y is considered to
obtain a benefit from Company X’s
negotiation of the contract.
Example 18. Passive association/benefit.
The facts are the same as in Example 15,
except that Company X sent a letter to the
financial institution in Country B, which
represented that Company X had a certain
percentage ownership in Company Y and
that Company X would maintain that same
percentage ownership interest in Company Y
until the contract was completed. This letter
allowed Company Y to obtain the contract on
more favorable terms than otherwise would
have been possible. Since this letter from
Company X to the financial institution
simply affirmed Company Y’s status as a
member of the controlled group and
represented that this status would be
maintained until the contract was completed,
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
mstockstill on DSKH9S0YB1PROD with RULES3
38870
Federal Register / Vol. 74, No. 148 / Tuesday, August 4, 2009 / Rules and Regulations
Company Y is not considered to obtain a
benefit from Company X’s furnishing of the
letter.
Example 19. Passive association/benefit. (i)
S is a company that supplies plastic
containers to companies in various
industries. S establishes the prices for its
containers through a price list that offers
customers discounts based solely on the
volume of containers purchased.
(ii) Company X is the parent corporation of
a large controlled group in the information
technology sector. Company Y is a whollyowned subsidiary of Company X located in
Country B. Company X and Company Y both
purchase plastic containers from unrelated
supplier S. In year 1, Company X purchases
1 million units and Company Y purchases
100,000 units. S, basing its prices on
purchases by the entire group, completes the
order for 1.1 million units at a price of $0.95
per unit, and separately bills and ships the
orders to each company. Companies X and Y
undertake no bargaining with supplier S with
respect to the price charged, and purchase no
other products from supplier S.
(iii) R1 and its wholly-owned subsidiary
R2 are a controlled group of taxpayers
(unrelated to Company X or Company Y)
each of which carries out functions
comparable to those of Companies X and Y
and undertakes purchases of plastic
containers from supplier S, identical to those
purchased from S by Company X and
Company Y, respectively. S, basing its prices
on purchases by the entire group, charges R1
and R2 $0.95 per unit for the 1.1 million
units ordered. R1 and R2 undertake no
bargaining with supplier S with respect to
the price charged, and purchase no other
products from supplier S.
(iv) U is an uncontrolled taxpayer that
carries out comparable functions and
undertakes purchases of plastic containers
from supplier S identical to Company Y. U
is not a member of a controlled group,
undertakes no bargaining with supplier S
with respect to the price charged, and
purchases no other products from supplier S.
U purchases 100,000 plastic containers from
S at the price of $1.00 per unit.
(v) Company X charges Company Y a fee
of $5,000, or $0.05 per unit of plastic
containers purchased by Company Y,
reflecting the fact that Company Y receives
the volume discount from supplier S.
(vi) In evaluating the fee charged by
Company X to Company Y, the
Commissioner considers whether the
transactions between R1, R2, and S or the
transactions between U and S provide a more
reliable measure of the transactions between
Company X, Company Y and S. The
Commissioner determines that Company Y’s
status as a member of a controlled group
should be taken into account for purposes of
evaluating comparability of the transactions,
and concludes that the transactions between
R1, R2, and S are more reliably comparable
to the transactions between Company X,
Company Y, and S. The comparable charge
for the purchase was $0.95 per unit.
Therefore, obtaining the plastic containers at
a favorable rate (and the resulting $5,000
savings) is entirely due to Company Y’s
status as a member of the Company X
VerDate Nov<24>2008
16:58 Aug 03, 2009
Jkt 217001
controlled group and not to any specific
activity by Company X or any other member
of the controlled group. Consequently,
Company Y is not considered to obtain a
benefit from Company X or any other
member of the controlled group.
Example 20. Disaggregation of
transactions. (i) X, a domestic corporation, is
a pharmaceutical company that develops and
manufactures ethical pharmaceutical
products. Y, a Country B corporation, is a
distribution and marketing company that also
performs clinical trials for X in Country B.
Because Y does not possess the capability to
conduct the trials, it contracts with a third
party to undertake the trials at a cost of $100.
Y also incurs $25 in expenses related to the
third-party contract (for example, in hiring
and working with the third party).
(ii) Based on a detailed functional analysis,
the Commissioner determines that Y
performed functions beyond merely
facilitating the clinical trials for X, such as
audit controls of the third party performing
those trials. In determining the arm’s length
price, the Commissioner may consider a
number of alternatives. For example, for
purposes of determining the arm’s length
price, the Commissioner may determine that
the intercompany service is most reliably
analyzed on a disaggregated basis as two
separate transactions: in this case, the
contract between Y and the third party could
constitute an internal CUSP with a price of
$100. Y would be further entitled to an arm’s
length remuneration for its facilitating
services. If the most reliable method is one
that provides a markup on Y’s costs, then
‘‘total services cost’’ in this context would be
$25. Alternatively, the Commissioner may
determine that the intercompany service is
most reliably analyzed as a single
transaction, based on comparable
uncontrolled transactions involving the
facilitation of similar clinical trial services
performed by third parties. If the most
reliable method is one that provides a
markup on all of Y’s costs, and the base of
the markup determined by the comparable
companies includes the third-party clinical
trial costs, then such a markup would be
applied to Y’s total services cost of $125.
Example 21. Disaggregation of
transactions. (i) X performs a number of
administrative functions for its subsidiaries,
including Y, a distributor of widgets in
Country B. These services include those
relating to working capital (inventory and
accounts receivable/payable) management.
To facilitate provision of these services, X
purchases an ERP system specifically
dedicated to optimizing working capital
management. The system, which entails
significant third-party costs and which
includes substantial intellectual property
relating to its software, costs $1,000.
(ii) Based on a detailed functional analysis,
the Commissioner determines that in
providing administrative services for Y, X
performed functions beyond merely
operating the ERP system itself, since X was
effectively using the ERP as an input to the
administrative services it was providing to Y.
In determining arm’s length price for the
services, the Commissioner may consider a
number of alternatives. For example, if the
PO 00000
Frm 00042
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
most reliable uncontrolled data is derived
from companies that use similar ERP systems
purchased from third parties to perform
similar administrative functions for
uncontrolled parties, the Commissioner may
determine that a CPM is the best method for
measuring the functions performed by X,
and, in addition, that a markup on total
services costs, based on the markup from the
comparable companies, is the most reliable
PLI. In this case, total services cost, and the
basis for the markup, would include
appropriate reflection of the ERP costs of
$1,000. Alternatively, X’s functions may be
most reliably measured based on comparable
uncontrolled companies that perform similar
administrative functions using their
customers’ own ERP systems. Under these
circumstances, the total services cost would
equal X’s costs of providing the
administrative services excluding the ERP
cost of $1,000.
(m) Coordination with transfer pricing
rules for other transactions—(1) Services
transactions that include other types of
transactions. A transaction structured as
a controlled services transaction may
include other elements for which a
separate category or categories of
methods are provided, such as a loan or
advance, a rental, or a transfer of
tangible or intangible property. See
§§ 1.482–1(b)(2) and 1.482–2(a), (c), and
(d). Whether such an integrated
transaction is evaluated as a controlled
services transaction under this section
or whether one or more elements should
be evaluated separately under other
sections of the section 482 regulations
depends on which approach will
provide the most reliable measure of an
arm’s length result. Ordinarily, an
integrated transaction of this type may
be evaluated under this section and its
separate elements need not be evaluated
separately, provided that each
component of the transaction may be
adequately accounted for in evaluating
the comparability of the controlled
transaction to the uncontrolled
comparables and, accordingly, in
determining the arm’s length result in
the controlled transaction. See § 1.482–
1(d)(3).
(2) Services transactions that effect a
transfer of intangible property. A
transaction structured as a controlled
services transaction may in certain cases
include an element that constitutes the
transfer of intangible property or may
result in a transfer, in whole or in part,
of intangible property. Notwithstanding
paragraph (m)(1) of this section, if such
element relating to intangible property
is material to the evaluation, the arm’s
length result for the element of the
transaction that involves intangible
property must be corroborated or
determined by an analysis under
§ 1.482–4.
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
Federal Register / Vol. 74, No. 148 / Tuesday, August 4, 2009 / Rules and Regulations
mstockstill on DSKH9S0YB1PROD with RULES3
(3) [Reserved]. For further guidance,
see § 1.482–9T(m)(3).
(4) Other types of transactions that
include controlled services transactions.
A transaction structured other than as a
controlled services transaction may
include one or more elements for which
separate pricing methods are provided
in this section. Whether such an
integrated transaction is evaluated
under another section of the section 482
regulations or whether one or more
elements should be evaluated separately
under this section depends on which
approach will provide the most reliable
measure of an arm’s length result.
Ordinarily, a single method may be
applied to such an integrated
transaction, and the separate services
component of the transaction need not
be separately analyzed under this
section, provided that the controlled
services may be adequately accounted
for in evaluating the comparability of
the controlled transaction to the
uncontrolled comparables and,
accordingly, in determining the arm’s
length results in the controlled
transaction. See § 1.482–1(d)(3).
(5) Examples. The principles of this
paragraph (m) are illustrated by the
following examples:
Example 1. (i) U.S. parent corporation
Company X enters into an agreement to
maintain equipment of Company Y, a foreign
subsidiary. The maintenance of the
equipment requires the use of spare parts.
The cost of the spare parts necessary to
maintain the equipment amounts to
approximately 25 percent of the total costs of
maintaining the equipment. Company Y pays
a fee that includes a charge for labor and
parts.
(ii) Whether this integrated transaction is
evaluated as a controlled services transaction
or is evaluated as a controlled services
transaction and the transfer of tangible
property depends on which approach will
provide the most reliable measure of an arm’s
length result. If it is not possible to find
comparable uncontrolled services
transactions that involve similar services and
tangible property transfers as the controlled
transaction between Company X and
Company Y, it will be necessary to determine
the arm’s length charge for the controlled
services, and then to evaluate separately the
arm’s length charge for the tangible property
transfers under § 1.482–1 and §§ 1.482–3
through 1.482–6. Alternatively, it may be
possible to apply the comparable profits
method of § 1.482–5 to evaluate the arm’s
length profit of Company X or Company Y
from the integrated controlled transaction.
The comparable profits method may provide
the most reliable measure of an arm’s length
result if uncontrolled parties are identified
that perform similar, combined functions of
maintaining and providing spare parts for
similar equipment.
Example 2. (i) U.S. parent corporation
Company X sells industrial equipment to its
VerDate Nov<24>2008
16:58 Aug 03, 2009
Jkt 217001
foreign subsidiary, Company Y. In
connection with this sale, Company X
renders to Company Y services that consist
of demonstrating the use of the equipment
and assisting in the effective start-up of the
equipment. Company X structures the
integrated transaction as a sale of tangible
property and determines the transfer price
under the comparable uncontrolled price
method of § 1.482–3(b).
(ii) Whether this integrated transaction is
evaluated as a transfer of tangible property or
is evaluated as a controlled services
transaction and a transfer of tangible property
depends on which approach will provide the
most reliable measure of an arm’s length
result. In this case, the controlled services
may be similar to services rendered in the
transactions used to determine the
comparable uncontrolled price, or they may
appropriately be considered a difference
between the controlled transaction and
comparable transactions with a definite and
reasonably ascertainable effect on price for
which appropriate adjustments can be made.
See § 1.482–1(d)(3)(ii)(A)(6). In either case,
application of the comparable uncontrolled
price method to evaluate the integrated
transaction may provide a reliable measure of
an arm’s length result, and application of a
separate transfer pricing method for the
controlled services element of the transaction
is not necessary.
Example 3. (i) The facts are the same as in
Example 2 except that, after assisting
Company Y in start-up, Company X also
renders ongoing services, including
instruction and supervision regarding
Company Y’s ongoing use of the equipment.
Company X structures the entire transaction,
including the incremental ongoing services,
as a sale of tangible property, and determines
the transfer price under the comparable
uncontrolled price method of § 1.482–3(b).
(ii) Whether this integrated transaction is
evaluated as a transfer of tangible property or
is evaluated as a controlled services
transaction and a transfer of tangible property
depends on which approach will provide the
most reliable measure of an arm’s length
result. It may not be possible to identify
comparable uncontrolled transactions in
which a seller of merchandise renders
services similar to the ongoing services
rendered by Company X to Company Y. In
such a case, the incremental services in
connection with ongoing use of the
equipment could not be taken into account
as a comparability factor because they are not
similar to the services rendered in
connection with sales of similar tangible
property. Accordingly, it may be necessary to
evaluate separately the transfer price for such
services under this section in order to
produce the most reliable measure of an
arm’s length result. Alternatively, it may be
possible to apply the comparable profits
method of § 1.482–5 to evaluate the arm’s
length profit of Company X or Company Y
from the integrated controlled transaction.
The comparable profits method may provide
the most reliable measure of an arm’s length
result if uncontrolled parties are identified
that perform the combined functions of
selling equipment and rendering ongoing
after-sale services associated with such
PO 00000
Frm 00043
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
38871
equipment. In that case, it would not be
necessary to separately evaluate the transfer
price for the controlled services under this
section.
Example 4. (i) Company X, a U.S.
corporation, and Company Y, a foreign
corporation, are members of a controlled
group. Both companies perform research and
development activities relating to integrated
circuits. In addition, Company Y
manufactures integrated circuits. In years 1
through 3, Company X engages in substantial
research and development activities, gains
significant know-how regarding the
development of a particular high-temperature
resistant integrated circuit, and memorializes
that research in a written report. In years 1
through 3, Company X generates overall net
operating losses as a result of the
expenditures associated with this research
and development effort. At the beginning of
year 4, Company X enters into a technical
assistance agreement with Company Y. As
part of this agreement, the researchers from
Company X responsible for this project meet
with the researchers from Company Y and
provide them with a copy of the written
report. Three months later, the researchers
from Company Y apply for a patent for a
high-temperature resistant integrated circuit
based in large part upon the know-how
obtained from the researchers from Company
X.
(ii) The controlled services transaction
between Company X and Company Y
includes an element that constitutes the
transfer of intangible property (such as,
know-how). Because the element relating to
the intangible property is material to the
arm’s length evaluation, the arm’s length
result for that element must be corroborated
or determined by an analysis under § 1.482–
4.
(6) Global dealing operations.
[Reserved].
(n) Effective/applicability date—(1) In
general. This section is generally
applicable for taxable years beginning
after July 31, 2009. In addition, a person
may elect to apply the provisions of this
section to earlier taxable years. See
paragraph (n)(2) of this section.
(2) Election to apply regulations to
earlier taxable years—(i) Scope of
election. A taxpayer may elect to apply
§ 1.482–1(a)(1), (b)(2)(i), (d)(3)(ii)(C)
Examples 3 through 6, (d)(3)(v),
(f)(2)(ii)(A), (f)(2)(iii)(B), (g)(4)(i),
(g)(4)(iii) Example 1, (i), (j)(6)(i) and
(j)(6)(ii), § 1.482–2(b), (f)(1) and (2),
§ 1.482–4(f)(3)(i)(A), (f)(3)(ii) Examples
1 and 2, (f)(4), (h)(1) and (2), § 1.482–
6(c)(2)(ii)(B)(1), (c)(2)(ii)(D), (c)(3)(i)(A),
(c)(3)(i)(B), (c)(3)(ii)(D), and (d), § 1.482–
8(b) Examples 10 through 12, (c)(1) and
(c)(2), § 1.482–9(a) through (m)(2), and
(m)(4) through (n)(2), § 1.861–8(a)(5)(ii),
(b)(3), (e)(4), (f)(4)(i), (g) Examples 17,
18, and 30, § 1.6038A–3(a)(3) Example 4
and (i), § 1.6662–6(d)(2)(ii)(B),
(d)(2)(iii)(B)(4), (d)(2)(iii)(B)(6), and (g),
and § 31.3121(s)–1(c)(2)(iii) and (d) of
this chapter to any taxable year
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
38872
Federal Register / Vol. 74, No. 148 / Tuesday, August 4, 2009 / Rules and Regulations
beginning after September 10, 2003.
Such election requires that all of the
provisions of such sections be applied
to such taxable year and all subsequent
taxable years (earlier taxable years) of
the taxpayer making the election.
(ii) Effect of election. An election to
apply the regulations to earlier taxable
years has no effect on the limitations on
assessment and collection or on the
limitations on credit or refund (see
Chapter 66 of the Internal Revenue
Code).
(iii) Time and manner of making
election. An election to apply the
regulations to earlier taxable years must
be made by attaching a statement to the
taxpayer’s timely filed U.S. tax return
(including extensions) for its first
taxable year beginning after July 31,
2009.
(iv) Revocation of election. An
election to apply the regulations to
earlier taxable years may not be revoked
without the consent of the
Commissioner.
■ Par. 15. Section 1.482–9T is amended
by revising paragraphs (a), (b), (c), (d),
(e), (f), (g), (h), (i), (j), (k), (l), (m)(1),
(m)(2), (m)(4), (m)(5), and (n), and
adding paragraph (o) to read as follows:
§ 1.482–9T Methods to determine taxable
income in connection with a controlled
services transaction (temporary).
(a) through (m)(2) [Reserved]. For
further guidance, see § 1.482–9(a)
through (m)(2).
(3) * * *
(4) and (m)(5) [Reserved]. For further
guidance, see § 1.482–9(m)(4) and
(m)(5).
(n) Effective/applicability date.
Paragraph (m)(3) of this section is
generally applicable on January 5, 2009.
(o) Expiration date. The applicability
of paragraph (m)(3) of this section
expires on December 30, 2011.
■ Par. 16. Section 1.861–8 is amended
by revising paragraphs (a)(5)(ii), (b)(3),
(e)(4), (f)(4), (g) Examples 17, 18 and 30,
and (h) to read as follows:
§ 1.861–8 Computation of taxable income
from sources within the United States and
from other sources and activities.
mstockstill on DSKH9S0YB1PROD with RULES3
*
*
*
*
*
(a) * * *
(5) * * *
(ii) Paragraph (e)(4), the last sentence
of paragraph (f)(4)(i), and paragraph (g),
Examples 17, 18, and 30 of this section
are generally applicable for taxable
years beginning after July 31, 2009. In
addition, a person may elect to apply
the provisions of paragraph (e)(4) of this
section to earlier years. Such election
shall be made in accordance with the
rules set forth in § 1.482–9(n)(2).
*
*
*
*
*
VerDate Nov<24>2008
16:58 Aug 03, 2009
Jkt 217001
(b) * * *
(3) Supportive functions. Deductions
which are supportive in nature (such as
overhead, general and administrative,
and supervisory expenses) may relate to
other deductions which can more
readily be allocated to gross income. In
such instance, such supportive
deductions may be allocated and
apportioned along with the deductions
to which they relate. On the other hand,
it would be equally acceptable to
attribute supportive deductions on some
reasonable basis directly to activities or
property which generate, have generated
or could reasonably be expected to
generate gross income. This would
ordinarily be accomplished by
allocating the supportive expenses to all
gross income or to another broad class
of gross income and apportioning the
expenses in accordance with paragraph
(c)(1) of this section. For this purpose,
reasonable departmental overhead rates
may be utilized. For examples of the
application of the principles of this
paragraph (b)(3) to expenses other than
expenses attributable to stewardship
activities, see Examples 19 through 21
of paragraph (g) of this section. See
paragraph (e)(4)(ii) of this section for the
allocation and apportionment of
deductions attributable to stewardship
expenses. However, supportive
deductions that are described in
§ 1.861–14T(e)(3) shall be allocated and
apportioned in accordance with the
rules of § 1.861–14T and shall not be
allocated and apportioned by reference
only to the gross income of a single
member of an affiliated group of
corporations as defined in § 1.861–
14T(d).
*
*
*
*
*
(e) * * *
(4) Stewardship and controlled
services—(i) Expenses attributable to
controlled services. If a corporation
performs a controlled services
transaction (as defined in § 1.482–
9(l)(3)), which includes any activity by
one member of a group of controlled
taxpayers that results in a benefit to a
related corporation, and the rendering
corporation charges the related
corporation for such services, section
482 and these regulations provide for an
allocation where the charge is not
consistent with an arm’s length result as
determined. The deductions for
expenses of the corporation attributable
to the controlled services transaction are
considered definitely related to the
amounts so charged and are to be
allocated to such amounts.
(ii) Stewardship expenses attributable
to dividends received. Stewardship
expenses, which result from
PO 00000
Frm 00044
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
‘‘overseeing’’ functions undertaken for a
corporation’s own benefit as an investor
in a related corporation, shall be
considered definitely related and
allocable to dividends received, or to be
received, from the related corporation.
For purposes of this section,
stewardship expenses of a corporation
are those expenses resulting from
‘‘duplicative activities’’ (as defined in
§ 1.482–9(l)(3)(iii)) or ‘‘shareholder
activities’’ (as defined in § 1.482–
9(l)(3)(iv)) of the corporation with
respect to the related corporation. Thus,
for example, stewardship expenses
include expenses of an activity the sole
effect of which is either to protect the
corporation’s capital investment in the
related corporation or to facilitate
compliance by the corporation with
reporting, legal, or regulatory
requirements applicable specifically to
the corporation, or both. If a corporation
has a foreign or international
department which exercises overseeing
functions with respect to related foreign
corporations and, in addition, the
department performs other functions
that generate other foreign-source
income (such as fees for services
rendered outside of the United States for
the benefit of foreign related
corporations, foreign-source royalties,
and gross income of foreign branches),
some part of the deductions with
respect to that department are
considered definitely related to the
other foreign-source income. In some
instances, the operations of a foreign or
international department will also
generate United States source income
(such as fees for services performed in
the United States). Permissible methods
of apportionment with respect to
stewardship expenses include
comparisons of time spent by employees
weighted to take into account
differences in compensation, or
comparisons of each related
corporation’s gross receipts, gross
income, or unit sales volume, assuming
that stewardship activities are not
substantially disproportionate to such
factors. See paragraph (f)(5) of this
section for the type of verification that
may be required in this respect. See
§ 1.482–9(l)(5) for examples that
illustrate the principles of § 1.482–
9(l)(3). See Example 17 and Example 18
of paragraph (g) of this section for the
allocation and apportionment of
stewardship expenses. See paragraph
(b)(3) of this section for the allocation
and apportionment of deductions
attributable to supportive functions
other than stewardship expenses, such
as expenses in the nature of day-to-day
management, and paragraph (e)(5) of
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
Federal Register / Vol. 74, No. 148 / Tuesday, August 4, 2009 / Rules and Regulations
mstockstill on DSKH9S0YB1PROD with RULES3
this section generally for the allocation
and apportionment of deductions
attributable to legal and accounting fees
and expenses.
*
*
*
*
*
(f) * * *
(4) Adjustments made under other
provisions of the Code—(i) In general. If
an adjustment which affects the
taxpayer is made under section 482 or
any other provision of the Code, it may
be necessary to recompute the
allocations and apportionments
required by this section in order to
reflect changes resulting from the
adjustment. The recomputation made by
the Commissioner shall be made using
the same method of allocation and
apportionment as was originally used by
the taxpayer, provided such method as
originally used conformed with
paragraph (a)(2) of this section and, in
light of the adjustment, such method
does not result in a material distortion.
In addition to adjustments which would
be made aside from this section,
adjustments to the taxpayer’s income
and deductions which would not
otherwise be made may be required
before applying this section in order to
prevent a distortion in determining
taxable income from a particular source
of activity. For example, if an item
included as a part of the cost of goods
sold has been improperly attributed to
specific sales, and, as a result, gross
income under one of the operative
sections referred to in paragraph (f)(1) of
this section is improperly determined, it
may be necessary for the Commissioner
to make an adjustment to the cost of
goods sold, consistent with the
principles of this section, before
applying this section. Similarly, if a
domestic corporation transfers the stock
in its foreign subsidiaries to a domestic
subsidiary and the parent corporation
continues to incur expenses in
connection with protecting its capital
investment in the foreign subsidiaries
(see paragraph (e)(4) of this section), it
may be necessary for the Commissioner
to make an allocation under section 482
with respect to such expenses before
making allocations and apportionments
required by this section, even though
the section 482 allocation might not
otherwise be made.
*
*
*
*
*
(g) * * *
Example 17. Stewardship expenses
(consolidation). (i) (A) Facts. X, a domestic
corporation, wholly owns M, N, and O, also
domestic corporations. X, M, N, and O file a
consolidated income tax return. All the
income of X and O is from sources within the
United States, all of M’s income is general
category income from sources within South
America, and all of N’s income is general
VerDate Nov<24>2008
16:58 Aug 03, 2009
Jkt 217001
category income from sources within Africa.
X receives no dividends from M, N, or O.
During the taxable year, the consolidated
group of corporations earned consolidated
gross income of $550,000 and incurred total
deductions of $370,000 as follows:
Gross
income
Deductions
Corporations:
X ................
M ................
N ................
O ................
$100,000
250,000
150,000
50,000
$50,000
100,000
200,000
20,000
Total ...
550,000
370,000
(B) Of the $50,000 of deductions incurred
by X, $15,000 relates to X’s ownership of M;
$10,000 relates to X’s ownership of N; $5,000
relates to X’s ownership of O; and the sole
effect of the entire $30,000 of deductions is
to protect X’s capital investment in M, N, and
O. X properly categorizes the $30,000 of
deductions as stewardship expenses. The
remainder of X’s deductions ($20,000) relates
to production of United States source income
from its plant in the United States.
(ii) (A) Allocation. X’s deductions of
$50,000 are definitely related and thus
allocable to the types of gross income to
which they give rise, namely $25,000 wholly
to general category income from sources
outside the United States ($15,000 for
stewardship of M and $10,000 for
stewardship of N) and the remainder
($25,000) wholly to gross income from
sources within the United States. Expenses
incurred by M and N are entirely related and
thus wholly allocable to general category
income earned from sources without the
United States, and expenses incurred by O
are entirely related and thus wholly allocable
to income earned within the United States.
Hence, no apportionment of expenses of X,
M, N, or O is necessary. For purposes of
applying the foreign tax credit limitation; the
statutory grouping is general category gross
income from sources without the United
States and the residual grouping is gross
income from sources within the United
States. As a result of the allocation of
deductions, the X consolidated group has
taxable income from sources without the
United States in the amount of $75,000,
computed as follows:
Foreign source general category
gross income ($250,000 from
M + $150,000 from N) ............
Less: Deductions allocable to
foreign source general category gross income ($25,000
from X, $100,000 from M, and
$200,000 from N) ....................
(325,000)
Total foreign-source taxable
income .............................
75,000
$400,000
(B) Thus, in the combined computation of
the general category limitation, the
numerator of the limiting fraction (taxable
income from sources outside the United
States) is $75,000.
PO 00000
Frm 00045
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
38873
Example 18. Stewardship and supportive
expenses. (i) (A) Facts. X, a domestic
corporation, manufactures and sells
pharmaceuticals in the United States. X’s
domestic subsidiary S, and X’s foreign
subsidiaries T, U, and V perform similar
functions in the United States and foreign
countries T, U, and V, respectively. Each
corporation derives substantial net income
during the taxable year that is general
category income described in section
904(d)(1). X’s gross income for the taxable
year consists of:
Domestic sales income ..........
Dividends from S (before
dividends received deduction) ....................................
Dividends from T ..................
Dividends from U ..................
Dividends from V ..................
Royalties from T and U .........
Fees from U for services performed by X .......................
$32,000,000
Total gross income .........
40,000,000
3,000,000
2,000,000
1,000,000
0
1,000,000
1,000,000
(B) In addition, X incurs expenses of its
supervision department of $1,500,000.
(C) X’s supervision department (the
Department) is responsible for the
supervision of its four subsidiaries and for
rendering certain services to the subsidiaries,
and this Department provides all the
supportive functions necessary for X’s
foreign activities. The Department performs
three principal types of activities. The first
type consists of services for the direct benefit
of U for which a fee is paid by U to X. The
cost of the services for U is $900,000 (which
results in a total charge to U of $1,000,000).
The second type consists of activities
described in § 1.482–9(l)(3)(iii) that are in the
nature of shareholder oversight that duplicate
functions performed by the subsidiaries’ own
employees and that do not provide an
additional benefit to the subsidiaries. For
example, a team of auditors from X’s
accounting department periodically audits
the subsidiaries’ books and prepares internal
reports for use by X’s management. Similarly,
X’s treasurer periodically reviews for the
board of directors of X the subsidiaries’
financial policies. These activities do not
provide an additional benefit to the related
corporations. The cost of the duplicative
services and related supportive expenses is
$540,000. The third type of activity consists
of providing services which are ancillary to
the license agreements which X maintains
with subsidiaries T and U. The cost of the
ancillary services is $60,000.
(ii) Allocation. The Department’s outlay of
$900,000 for services rendered for the benefit
of U is allocated to the $1,000,000 in fees
paid by U. The remaining $600,000 in the
Department’s deductions are definitely
related to the types of gross income to which
they give rise, namely dividends from
subsidiaries S, T, U, and V and royalties from
T and U. However, $60,000 of the $600,000
in deductions are found to be attributable to
the ancillary services and are definitely
related (and therefore allocable) solely to
royalties received from T and U, while the
remaining $540,000 in deductions are
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
38874
Federal Register / Vol. 74, No. 148 / Tuesday, August 4, 2009 / Rules and Regulations
definitely related (and therefore allocable) to
dividends received from all the subsidiaries.
(iii) (A) Apportionment. For purposes of
applying the foreign tax credit limitation, the
statutory grouping is general category gross
income from sources outside the United
States and the residual grouping is gross
income from sources within the United
States. X’s deduction of $540,000 for the
Department’s expenses and related
supportive expenses which are allocable to
dividends received from the subsidiaries
must be apportioned between the statutory
and residual groupings before the foreign tax
credit limitation may be applied. In
determining an appropriate method for
apportioning the $540,000, a basis other than
X’s gross income must be used since the
dividend payment policies of the subsidiaries
bear no relationship either to the activities of
the Department or to the amount of income
earned by each subsidiary. This is evidenced
by the fact that V paid no dividends during
the year, whereas S, T, and U paid dividends
of $1 million or more each. In the absence
of facts that would indicate a material
distortion resulting from the use of such
method, the stewardship expenses ($540,000)
may be apportioned on the basis of the gross
receipts of each subsidiary.
(B) The gross receipts of the subsidiaries
were as follows:
S ..............................................
T .............................................
U .............................................
V .............................................
$4,000,000
3,000,000
500,000
1,500,000
Total ................................
9,000,000
(C) Thus, the expenses of the Department
are apportioned for purposes of the foreign
tax credit limitation as follows:
Apportionment of stewardship expenses to the statutory grouping of gross income: $540,000 × [($3,000,000 + $500,000 +
$1,500,000)/$9,000,000] ....................................................................................................................................................................
Apportionment of supervisory expenses to the residual grouping of gross income: $540,000 × [$4,000,000/9,000,000] ............
$300,000
240,000
Total: Apportioned stewardship expense ....................................................................................................................................
540,000
mstockstill on DSKH9S0YB1PROD with RULES3
*
*
*
*
*
Example 30. Income taxes. (i)(A) Facts. As
in Example 17 of this paragraph (g), X is a
domestic corporation that wholly owns M, N,
and O, also domestic corporations. X, M, N,
and O file a consolidated income tax return.
All the income of X and O is from sources
within the United States, all of M’s income
is general category income from sources
within South America, and all of N’s income
is general category income from sources
within Africa. X receives no dividends from
M, N, or O. During the taxable year, the
consolidated group of corporations earned
consolidated gross income of $550,000 and
incurred total deductions of $370,000. X has
gross income of $100,000 and deductions of
$50,000, without regard to its deduction for
state income tax. Of the $50,000 of
deductions incurred by X, $15,000 relates to
X’s ownership of M; $10,000 relates to X’s
ownership of N; $5,000 relates to X’s
ownership of O; and the entire $30,000
constitutes stewardship expenses. The
remainder of X’s $20,000 of deductions
(which is assumed not to include state
income tax) relates to production of U.S.
source income from its plant in the United
States. M has gross income of $250,000 and
deductions of $100,000, which yield foreignsource general category taxable income of
$150,000. N has gross income of $150,000
and deductions of $200,000, which yield a
foreign-source general category loss of
$50,000. O has gross income of $50,000 and
deductions of $20,000, which yield U.S.
source taxable income of $30,000.
(B) Unlike Example 17 of this paragraph
(g), however, X also has a deduction of
$1,800 for state A income taxes. X’s state A
taxable income is computed by first making
adjustments to the Federal taxable income of
X to derive apportionable taxable income for
state A tax purposes. An analysis of state A
law indicates that state A law also includes
in its definition of the taxable business
income of X which is apportionable to X’s
state A activities, the taxable income of M,
N, and O, which is related to X’s business.
As in Example 25 of this paragraph (g), the
amount of apportionable taxable income
attributable to business activities conducted
in state A is determined by multiplying
apportionable taxable income by a fraction
VerDate Nov<24>2008
16:58 Aug 03, 2009
Jkt 217001
(the ‘‘state apportionment fraction’’) that
compares the relative amounts of payroll,
property, and sales within state A with
worldwide payroll, property, and sales.
Assuming that X’s apportionable taxable
income equals $180,000, $100,000 of which
is from sources without the United States,
and $80,000 is from sources within the
United States, and that the state
apportionment fraction is equal to 10
percent, X has state A taxable income of
$18,000. The state A income tax of $1,800 is
then derived by applying the state A income
tax rate of 10 percent to the $18,000 of state
A taxable income.
(ii) Allocation and apportionment. Assume
that under Example 29 of this paragraph (g),
it is determined that X’s deduction for state
A income tax is definitely related to a class
of gross income consisting of income from
sources both within and without the United
States, and that the state A tax is apportioned
$1,000 to sources without the United States,
and $800 to sources within the United States.
Under Example 17 of this paragraph (g),
without regard to the deduction for X’s state
A income tax, X has a separate loss of
($25,000) from sources without the United
States. After taking into account the
deduction for state A income tax, X’s
separate loss from sources without the
United States is increased by the $1,000 state
A tax apportioned to sources without the
United States, and equals a loss of ($26,000),
for purposes of computing the numerator of
the consolidated general category foreign tax
credit limitation.
■ Par. 17. Section 1.861–8T is amended
by revising paragraphs (a)(3), (a)(4),
(a)(5), (b), (e)(3), (e)(4), (e)(5), (e)(6),
(e)(7), (e)(8), (e)(9), (e)(10), (e)(11),
(f)(1)(i), (f)(1)(iii), (f)(2), (f)(3), (f)(4),
(f)(5), (g) Examples 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8,
9, 10, 11, 12, 13,14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19,
20, 21, 22, 22, 23, and 30, and (h) to
read as follows:
§ 1.861–8T Computation of taxable income
from sources within the United States and
from other sources and activities
(temporary).
*
PO 00000
*
*
Frm 00046
*
Fmt 4701
*
Sfmt 4700
(a)(3) through (b) [Reserved]. For
further guidance, see § 1.861–8(a)(3)
through (b).
*
*
*
*
*
(e) * * *
(3) through (f)(1)(i) [Reserved]. For
further guidance, see § 1.861–8(e)(3)
through (f)(1)(i).
*
*
*
*
*
(f)(1)(iii) through (g) Examples 1
through 23 [Reserved]. For further
guidance, see § 1.861–8(f)(1)(iii) through
(g) Examples 1 through 23.
*
*
*
*
*
Example 30. [Reserved]. For further
guidance, see § 1.861–8(g) Example 30.
(h) Effective/applicability date. (1)
Paragraphs (f)(1)(vi)(E), (f)(1)(vi)(F), and
(f)(1)(vi)(G) of this section apply to
taxable years ending after April 9, 2008.
(2) Paragraph (e)(4), the last sentence
of paragraph (f)(4)(i), and paragraph (g),
Examples 17, 18, and 30 of this section
apply to taxable years beginning after
July 31, 2009.
(3) Also, see paragraph (e)(12)(iv) of
this section and 1.861–14(e)(6) for rules
concerning the allocation and
apportionment of deductions for
charitable contributions.
■ Par. 18. Section 1.861–9T(k) is
amended by adding new first and
second sentences to read as follows:
§ 1.861–9T Allocation and apportionment
of interest expense (temporary).
*
*
*
*
*
(k) * * * In general, the rules of this
section apply for taxable years
beginning after December 31, 1986.
Paragraphs (b)(2) (concerning the
treatment of certain foreign currency)
and (d)(2) (concerning the treatment of
interest incurred by nonresident aliens)
of this section are applicable for taxable
years commencing after December 31,
1988. * * *
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
Federal Register / Vol. 74, No. 148 / Tuesday, August 4, 2009 / Rules and Regulations
■ Par. 19. Section 1.861–10T is
amended by revising the section
heading and adding new paragraph (f) to
read as follows:
§ 1.861–10T Special allocations of interest
expense (temporary).
*
*
*
*
*
(f) Effective/applicability date. (1) In
general, the rules of this section apply
for taxable years beginning after
December 31, 1986.
(2) Paragraphs (b)(3)(ii) (providing an
operating costs test for purposes of the
nonrecourse indebtedness exception)
and (b)(6) (concerning excess
collaterization of nonrecourse
borrowings) of this section are
applicable for taxable years
commencing after December 31, 1988.
(3) Paragraph (e) (concerning the
treatment of related controlled foreign
corporation indebtedness) of this
section is applicable for taxable years
commencing after December 31, 1987.
For rules for taxable years beginning
before January 1, 1987, and for later
years to the extent permitted by § 1.861–
13T, see § 1.861–8 (revised as of April
1, 1986).
■ Par. 20. Section 1.861–11T is
amended by revising the section
heading and adding new paragraph (h)
to read as follows:
§ 1.861–11T Special rules for allocating
and apportioning interest expense of an
affiliated group of corporations (temporary).
*
*
*
*
*
(h) Effective/applicability date. The
rules of this section apply for taxable
years beginning after December 31,
1986.
■ Par. 21. Section 1.861–12T is
amended by revising the section
heading and adding new paragraph (k)
to read as follows:
§ 1.861–12T Characterization rules and
adjustments for certain assets (temporary).
*
*
*
*
(k) Effective/applicability date. The
rules of this section apply for taxable
years beginning after December 31,
1986.
■ Par. 22. Section 1.861–14T is
amended by adding new paragraph (k)
to read as follows:
mstockstill on DSKH9S0YB1PROD with RULES3
*
§ 1.861–14T Special rules for allocating
and apportioning certain expenses (other
than interest expense) of an affiliated group
of corporations (temporary).
*
*
*
*
*
(k) Effective/applicability date. The
rules of this section apply for taxable
years beginning after December 31,
1986.
VerDate Nov<24>2008
16:58 Aug 03, 2009
Jkt 217001
§ 1.6038A–1
[Amended]
Par. 23. Section 1.6038A–1 is
amended by removing paragraph (n)(3)
and redesignating paragraphs (n)(4),
(n)(5), (n)(6) and (n)(7) as paragraphs
(n)(3), (n)(4), (n)(5) and (n)(6),
respectively.
■ Par. 24. Section 1.6038A–3 is
amended by revising paragraphs (a)(3)
Example 4, and (i) to read as follows:
■
§ 1.6038A–3
Record maintenance.
(a) * * *
(3) * * *
Example 4. S, a U.S. reporting corporation,
provides computer consulting services for its
foreign parent, X. Based on the application of
section 482 and the regulations, it is
determined that the cost of services plus
method, as described in § 1.482–9(e), will
provide the most reliable measure of an arm’s
length result, based on the facts and
circumstances of the controlled transaction
between S and X. S is required to maintain
records to permit verification upon audit of
the comparable transactional costs (as
described in § 1.482–9(e)(2)(iii)) used to
calculate the arm’s length price. Based on the
facts and circumstances, if it is determined
that X’s records are relevant to determine the
correct U.S. tax treatment of the controlled
transaction between S and X, the record
maintenance requirements under section
6038A(a) and this section will be applicable
to the records of X.
*
*
*
*
*
(i) Effective/applicability date—(1) In
general. This section is generally
applicable on December 10, 1990.
However, records described in this
section in existence on or after March
20, 1990, must be maintained, without
regard to when the taxable year to
which the records relate began.
Paragraph (a)(3) Example 4 of this
section is generally applicable for
taxable years beginning after July 31,
2009.
(2) Election to apply regulation to
earlier taxable years. A person may elect
to apply the provisions of paragraph
(a)(3) Example 4 of this section to earlier
taxable years in accordance with the
rules set forth in § 1.482–9(n)(2).
§ 1.6038A–3T
[Removed]
■ Par. 25. Section 1.6038A–3T is
removed.
■ Par. 26. Section 1.6662–6 is amended
by revising paragraphs (d)(2)(ii)(B),
(d)(2)(iii)(B)(4), (d)(2)(iii)(B)(6), and (g)
to read as follows:
§ 1.6662–6 Transactions between persons
described in section 482 and net section
482 transfer price adjustments.
*
*
*
(d) * * *
(2) * * *
(ii) * * *
PO 00000
Frm 00047
*
Fmt 4701
*
Sfmt 4700
38875
(B) Services cost method. A taxpayer’s
selection of the services cost method for
certain services, described in § 1.482–
9(b), and its application of that method
to a controlled services transaction will
be considered reasonable for purposes
of the specified method requirement
only if the taxpayer reasonably allocated
and apportioned costs in accordance
with § 1.482–9(k), and reasonably
concluded that the controlled services
transaction satisfies the requirements
described in § 1.482–9(b)(2). Whether
the taxpayer’s conclusion was
reasonable must be determined from all
the facts and circumstances. The factors
relevant to this determination include
those described in paragraph
(d)(2)(ii)(A) of this section, to the extent
applicable.
*
*
*
*
*
(iii) * * *
(B) * * *
(4) A description of the method
selected and an explanation of why that
method was selected, including an
evaluation of whether the regulatory
conditions and requirements for
application of that method, if any, were
met;
*
*
*
*
*
(6) A description of the controlled
transactions (including the terms of
sale) and any internal data used to
analyze those transactions. For example,
if a profit split method is applied, the
documentation must include a schedule
providing the total income, costs, and
assets (with adjustments for different
accounting practices and currencies) for
each controlled taxpayer participating
in the relevant business activity and
detailing the allocations of such items to
that activity. Similarly, if a cost-based
method (such as the cost plus method,
the services cost method for certain
services, or a comparable profits method
with a cost-based profit level indicator)
is applied, the documentation must
include a description of the manner in
which relevant costs are determined and
are allocated and apportioned to the
relevant controlled transaction.
*
*
*
*
*
(g) Effective/applicability date—(1) In
general. This section is generally
applicable on February 9, 1996.
However, taxpayers may elect to apply
this section to all open taxable years
beginning after December 31, 1993.
(2) Special rules. The provisions of
paragraphs (d)(2)(ii)(B), (d)(2)(iii)(B)(4)
and (d)(2)(iii)(B)(6) of this section are
applicable for taxable years beginning
after July 31, 2009. However, taxpayers
may elect to apply the provisions of
paragraphs (d)(2)(ii)(B), (d)(2)(iii)(B)(4)
and (d)(2)(iii)(B)(6) of this section to
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
38876
Federal Register / Vol. 74, No. 148 / Tuesday, August 4, 2009 / Rules and Regulations
earlier taxable years in accordance with
the rules set forth in § 1.482–9(n)(2).
§ 1.6662–6T
[Removed]
Par. 27. Section 1.6662–6T is
removed.
■
PART 31—EMPLOYMENT TAXES AND
COLLECTION OF INCOME TAX AT THE
SOURCE
■ Par. 28. The authority citation for part
31 continues to read in part as follows:
Authority: 26 U.S.C. 7805 * * *
Par. 29. Section 31.3121(s)–1 is
amended by revising paragraphs
(c)(2)(iii) and (d) to read as follows:
■
§ 31.3121(s)–1 Concurrent employment by
related corporations with common
paymaster.
*
*
*
*
(c) * * *
(2) * * *
(iii) Group-wide allocation rules.
Under the group-wide method of
allocation, the Commissioner may
allocate the taxes imposed by sections
3102 and 3111 in an appropriate
manner to a related corporation that
remunerates an employee through a
common paymaster if the common
paymaster fails to remit the taxes to the
Internal Revenue Service. Allocation in
an appropriate manner varies according
to the circumstances. It may be based on
sales, property, corporate payroll, or any
mstockstill on DSKH9S0YB1PROD with RULES3
*
VerDate Nov<24>2008
16:58 Aug 03, 2009
Jkt 217001
other basis that reflects the distribution
of the services performed by the
employee, or a combination of the
foregoing bases. To the extent
practicable, the Commissioner may use
the principles of § 1.482–2(b) of this
chapter in making the allocations with
respect to wages paid after December 31,
1978, and on or before July 31, 2009. To
the extent practicable, the
Commissioner may use the principles of
§ 1.482–9 of this chapter in making the
allocations with respect to wages paid
after July 31, 2009.
(d) Effective/applicability date—(1) In
general. This section is applicable with
respect to wages paid after December 31,
1978. The fourth sentence of paragraph
(c)(2)(iii) of this section is applicable
with respect to wages paid after
December 31, 1978, and on or before
July 31, 2009. The fifth sentence of
paragraph (c)(2)(iii) of this section is
applicable with respect to wages paid
after July 31, 2009.
(2) Election to apply regulation to
earlier taxable years. A person may elect
to apply the fifth sentence of paragraph
(c)(2)(iii) of this section to earlier
taxable years in accordance with the
rules set forth in § 1.482–9(n)(2) of this
chapter.
§ 31.3121(s)–1T
[Removed]
■ Par. 30. Section 31.3121(s)–1T is
removed.
PO 00000
Frm 00048
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
PART 602—OMB CONTROL NUMBERS
UNDER THE PAPERWORK
REDUCTION ACT
■ Par. 31. The authority citation for part
602 continues to read as follows:
Authority: 26 U.S.C. 7805.
Par. 32. In § 602.101, paragraph (b) is
amended by adding an entry for
‘‘§ 1.482–9(b)’’ to the table to read
follows:
■
§ 602.101
*
OMB Control numbers.
*
*
(b) * * *
*
*
Current
OMB control
number
CFR part or section where
identified and described
*
*
*
*
1.482–9(b) ................................
*
*
*
*
*
1545–2149
*
Approved: July 25, 2009.
Linda E. Stiff,
Deputy Commissioner for Services and
Enforcement.
Michael Mundaca,
Acting Assistant Secretary of the Treasury
(Tax Policy).
[FR Doc. E9–18326 Filed 7–31–09; 8:45 am]
BILLING CODE 4830–01–P
E:\FR\FM\04AUR3.SGM
04AUR3
Agencies
[Federal Register Volume 74, Number 148 (Tuesday, August 4, 2009)]
[Rules and Regulations]
[Pages 38830-38876]
From the Federal Register Online via the Government Printing Office [www.gpo.gov]
[FR Doc No: E9-18326]
[[Page 38829]]
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
Part IV
Department of the Treasury
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
Internal Revenue Service
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
26 CFR Parts 1 and 31, and 602
Treatment of Services Under Section 482; Allocation of Income and
Deductions From Intangible Property; Stewardship Expense; Final Rule
Federal Register / Vol. 74, No. 148 / Tuesday, August 4, 2009 / Rules
and Regulations
[[Page 38830]]
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
DEPARTMENT OF THE TREASURY
Internal Revenue Service
26 CFR Parts 1 and 31, and 602
[TD 9456]
RIN 1545-BI78, 1545-BI79, 1545-BI80
Treatment of Services Under Section 482; Allocation of Income and
Deductions From Intangible Property; Stewardship Expense
AGENCY: Internal Revenue Service (IRS), Treasury.
ACTION: Final regulations and removal of temporary regulations.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
SUMMARY: This document contains final regulations that provide guidance
regarding the treatment of controlled services transactions under
section 482 and the allocation of income from intangible property, in
particular with respect to contributions by a controlled party to the
value of intangible property owned by another controlled party. This
document also contains final regulations that modify the regulations
under section 861 concerning stewardship expenses to be consistent with
the changes made to the regulations under section 482. These final
regulations potentially affect controlled taxpayers within the meaning
of section 482. They provide updated guidance necessary to reflect
economic and legal developments since the issuance of the current
guidance.
DATES: Effective Date: These regulations are effective on July 31,
2009.
Applicability Dates: These regulations apply to taxable years
beginning after July 31, 2009.
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION CONTACT: Carol B. Tan or Gregory A. Spring,
(202) 435-5265 for matters relating to section 482, or Richard L.
Chewning (202) 622-3850 for matters relating to stewardship expenses
(not toll-free numbers).
SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION:
Paperwork Reduction Act
The collection of information contained in these final regulations
has been reviewed and approved by the Office of Management and Budget
in accordance with the Paperwork Reduction Act of 1995 (44 U.S.C.
3507(d)) under control number 1545-2149. The collection of information
in these final regulations is in Sec. 1.482-9. This information is
required to enable the IRS to verify that a taxpayer is reporting the
correct amount of taxable income. An agency may not conduct or sponsor,
and a person is not required to respond to, a collection of information
unless it displays a valid control number.
Books and records relating to a collection of information must be
retained as long as their contents might become material in the
administration of any internal revenue law. Generally, tax returns and
tax return information are confidential, as required by 26 U.S.C. 6103.
Background
Section 482 of the Internal Revenue Code generally provides that
the Secretary may allocate gross income, deductions, and credits
between or among two or more organizations, trades or businesses owned
or controlled by the same interests in order to prevent evasion of
taxes or clearly to reflect income of a controlled taxpayer.
Regulations under section 482 published in the Federal Register (33
FR 5849) on April 16, 1968, provided guidance with respect to a wide
range of controlled transactions, including transfers of tangible and
intangible property and the provision of services. Revised and updated
transfer pricing regulations were published in the Federal Register (59
FR 34971, 60 FR 65553, 61 FR 21955, and 68 FR 51171) on July 8, 1994,
December 20, 1995, May 13, 1996, and August 26, 2003. While
comprehensive in other respects, these regulations did not modify
substantively the rules dealing with controlled services transactions.
On September 10, 2003, proposed regulations relating to the treatment
of controlled services transactions and the allocation of income from
intangible property, in particular with respect to contributions by a
controlled party to the value of intangible property owned by another
controlled party (the 2003 proposed regulations), were published in the
Federal Register (68 FR 53448, REG-146893-02 and REG-115037-00).
On August 4, 2006, temporary regulations relating to the treatment
of controlled services transactions, the allocation of income from
intangible property, and stewardship expenses (the 2006 temporary
regulations) were published in the Federal Register (71 FR 44466, TD
9278, REG-146893-02, REG-115037-00, and REG-138603-03). A notice of
proposed rulemaking cross-referencing the temporary regulations was
published in the Federal Register on the same day (71 FR 44247, REG-
146893-02, REG-115037-00, and REG-138603-03). Written comments
responding to the notice of proposed rulemaking were received, and a
public hearing was held on October 27, 2006.
The 2006 temporary regulations are generally effective with respect
to taxable years beginning after December 31, 2006, and Notice 2007-5,
2007-1 C.B. 269, published on January 16, 2007, partially modified the
effective date of the 2006 temporary regulations as it pertained to the
identification of controlled services transactions eligible to be
priced at cost. Accordingly, the 2006 temporary regulations related to
the new services cost method in Sec. 1.482-9T(b) (described in Section
A.1 in this preamble) apply to taxable years after December 31, 2007,
with the exception of the business judgment rule described in Sec.
1.482-9T(b)(2), which had the same effective date (taxable years after
December 31, 2006) as the other provisions of the temporary
regulations.
By issuing the 2006 temporary regulations in temporary and proposed
form, the Treasury Department and the IRS provided taxpayers an
opportunity to submit additional comments prior to the time these
regulations became effective. See Sec. 601.601(d)(2)(ii)(b). After
consideration of all the comments, the proposed regulations under
section 482 are adopted as revised by this Treasury decision, and the
corresponding temporary regulations are removed.
Explanation of Revisions and Summary of Comments
Introduction
The Treasury Department and the IRS received a number of comments
on the 2006 temporary regulations from taxpayers, their
representatives, as well as industry and professional groups.
Commentators generally approved of the 2006 temporary regulations and
found the changes from the 2003 proposed regulations to be useful.
Specifically, commentators approved of the replacement of the
simplified cost-based method with the services cost method (SCM) and
the inclusion of the shared services arrangement provision in the SCM
rules. Commentators also generally approved of changes made to the
profit split method. However, commentators did express concerns with
some aspects of the 2006 temporary regulations.
While these final regulations reflect some modifications in
response to comments received on the 2006 temporary regulations, both
the format and the substance of the final regulations are generally
consistent with the 2006 temporary regulations. The changes adopted are
intended to make certain clarifications and improvements without
fundamentally altering the policies reflected in the 2006 temporary
regulations.
[[Page 38831]]
Explanation of Provisions
A. Controlled Services
1. Services Cost Method--Treas. Reg. Sec. 1.482-9(b)
a. Applicability of the Services Cost Method
Most comments focused on the SCM. Several commentators requested
confirmation that application of the SCM is a matter within the control
of the taxpayer, provided that the underlying services otherwise
qualify for the SCM. Some commentators stated that the 2006 temporary
regulations could be interpreted as requiring a taxpayer to apply the
SCM if all the conditions for that method were satisfied.
Notice 2007-5 confirmed that taxpayers control whether the SCM
applies. The final regulations make this clear. Section 1.482-9(b)(1)
provides that, if a taxpayer applies the SCM in accordance with the
rules of Sec. 1.482-9(b), which requires that a statement evidencing
the taxpayer's intent to apply the SCM be contained in the taxpayer's
books and records, then the SCM will be considered the best method for
purposes of Sec. 1.482-1(c).
b. Specified Covered Services
Several commentators contended that the proposed list of specified
covered services in Announcement 2006-50, 2006-2 C.B. 321, is too
narrow. One commentator listed tax planning and public relations
activities as examples of activities not on the list that illustrated
the narrowness of the list. Some commentators suggested that the list
should refer to departments, cost centers, or accounting
classifications, rather than to specific activities or groups of
activities. One commentator suggested that all activities in particular
departments should be identified as eligible for the SCM. Commentators
also stated that a comprehensive analysis would be required and that it
would be too burdensome to track employee time for activities that are
specified covered services vs. non-specified covered services. See
Sec. 601.601(d)(2)(ii)(b). The Treasury Department and the IRS also
received suggestions to broaden the general administrative provision
and add additional specific activities to the list of specified covered
services, including warehousing and distribution, quality control and
quality assurance relating to manufacturing and construction, and
environmental remediation.
The SCM is intended to provide a practical and administrable means
of identifying low-margin services that may be evaluated by reference
to total services cost without a markup. The list of services eligible
to be priced at cost in the specified covered services portion of the
SCM was added specifically in response to requests from commentators
that the former simplified cost-based method be eliminated and replaced
with just such a list of eligible services. In response to public
comments, the Treasury Department and the IRS published Rev. Proc.
2007-13, 2007-1 C.B. 295, which added several categories as well as
activities within existing categories. In particular, public relations
and tax planning services were added to the list, and the individual
categories of specified covered services were expanded to include
``other similar activities.''
After careful consideration, the Treasury Department and the IRS
believe that Rev. Proc. 2007-13 strikes the appropriate balance between
broadening the list to include services similar to the specific
services described and expanding the categories of services. The
Treasury Department and the IRS do not believe that other additional
services suggested by commentators were appropriate, but will continue
to consider other recommendations for additional services to be added
to the list in the future.
One commentator expressed concern that a review of services to
determine if they qualify as specified covered services may require a
more extensive analysis than under previous regulations, including
interviews of individual employees or of small groups of employees.
Although the covered services list is not applied on a departmental
basis, a reasonable aggregation of similar services may be appropriate
for performing the specified covered services analysis in some cases.
To determine if the services cost method should apply to a particular
service (or group of services) performed by a group of employees, the
aggregation principle of Treas. Reg. Sec. 1.482-1(f)(2)(i)(A) should
be followed as appropriate. In certain cases, aggregation may assure a
more accurate result, especially if it recognizes synergies that an
individual employee analysis might ignore. An aggregation of employee
services may, thus, efficiently evaluate the work of employees engaged
in a common function, as well as recognize the added value that their
collaborative effort might produce. Conversely, analysis on an
aggregate basis does not permit characterization of an individual
service as a specified covered service if it, in fact, is not a
specified covered service.
c. Low Margin Covered Services
Commentators provided comments on low margin covered services
described in Sec. 1.482-9T(b)(4)(ii) of the 2006 temporary
regulations. One commentator believed that the 7 percent limit is too
high for the SCM. In the commentator's view, the limit should be lower
because the 7 percent figure will cover activities that are risky. Most
of the commentators, however, believed that the 7 percent limit is an
appropriate measure. The Treasury Department and the IRS continue to
believe that the 7 percent limit is appropriate in light of its
purpose. That is, it minimizes the compliance burden on taxpayers and
the IRS for relatively low-margin services.
Several commentators requested more guidance on low margin covered
services. One commentator suggested that the Treasury Department and
the IRS develop an analysis to determine if certain services have a
markup of 7 percent or less and publish the results. For example, the
IRS could develop a set of comparables for various groups of low margin
services, such as human resources, accounting and finance, information
services, and training. Some commentators requested guidance on when
and how often a transfer pricing study is needed to support a
determination that services are low margin covered services. In this
regard, some commentators requested that the regulations specify a
period of years (such as three years) for which a transfer pricing
study may be valid for purposes of determining if a service is a low
margin covered service. In support of this request, one commentator
stated that the regulations could provide, for example, that the
reliance period could apply to taxpayers whose facts and circumstances
have not changed materially from the time the service was most recently
established as a covered service.
The Treasury Department and IRS did not adopt this proposal.
Because there may be significant differences among services across
different businesses, a standardized, IRS-developed comparables set
would not be feasible and would conflict with the fact intensive nature
of an appropriately robust transfer pricing analysis. For similar
reasons, the Treasury Department and the IRS did not adopt the proposal
to specify the frequency or timing of transfer pricing analyses to
support taxpayer positions. To do so would be inconsistent with a
proper comparability analysis, including consideration of the time at
which
[[Page 38832]]
transactions were undertaken, as well as other relevant economic
circumstances.
One other commentator requested that the midpoint should be used in
measuring a comparable markup on total services costs for purposes of
low margin covered services. While it may be true that, in some cases,
the midpoint could be used depending on the statistical method used,
the interquartile range ordinarily provides an acceptable measure of an
arm's length range. See Sec. 1.482-1(e)(2)(iii)(B). Therefore, the
Treasury Department and the IRS believe that the interquartile range of
the comparable median markup is an appropriate measure.
d. Excluded Activities
One commentator requested that engineering be removed from the list
of services that are ineligible for the SCM in Sec. 1.482-9T(b)(3) of
the 2006 temporary regulations. This comment was not adopted, since, in
the view of the Treasury Department and the IRS, intragroup engineering
services generally should be subject to a robust transfer pricing
analysis.
e. Business Judgment Rule
Several commentators expressed concern over how the business
judgment rule would be administered. Some commentators requested that
statements in the preamble about the business judgment rule in the 2006
temporary regulations be incorporated in final regulations. Other
commentators suggested that the business judgment rule should be
applied by reference to one or more trades or business of the
controlled group rather than of the renderer, recipient, or both. These
commentators claimed that the business judgment rule may yield
incorrect results in some cases, for example, where a headquarters
services company or other legal entity is established solely to provide
centralized support services. The activities performed by such an
entity would potentially be ineligible for the SCM under the business
judgment rule because they would constitute the entity's core
capability.
The Treasury Department and the IRS agree that the business
judgment rule should be determined on a controlled group basis and
expressed this view in Notice 2007-5. The final regulations clarify
that the business judgment rule is determined by reference to a trade
or business of the controlled group.
Section 3.04 of Notice 2007-5 clarified that the business judgment
rule ``is satisfied by a reasonable exercise of the taxpayer's business
judgment, not a reasonable exercise of the IRS's judgment in examining
the taxpayer.'' The Treasury Department and the IRS reiterate that the
final regulations incorporate a high threshold for application of the
business judgment rule to exclude services otherwise eligible for the
SCM. Section 1.482-9(b)(5) provides that the rule is based on a
taxpayer's reasonable conclusion in its business judgment that the rule
is satisfied. It has come to the attention of the Treasury Department
and the IRS that the clarification in the notice of the business
judgment rule has been misconstrued as creating a non-rebuttable
presumption that a taxpayer's determination under the business judgment
rule is always correct. This construction of the clarification was not
intended and is not supported by the plain language of the business
judgment rule. The business judgment rule requires a reasonable
conclusion by the taxpayer. Thus, the taxpayer's business judgment is
only the starting point of the analysis, and the taxpayer must make a
reasonable conclusion in that regard. Whether the taxpayer's conclusion
is reasonable may be subject to examination by the IRS in the course of
an audit.
One commentator suggested that the regulations adopt a ``principal
activity'' test similar to the test described in the Organisation for
Economic Cooperation and Development Transfer Pricing Guidelines for
Multinational Enterprises and Tax Administrations (OECD Guidelines) in
place of the business judgment rule. The Treasury Department and the
IRS decline to adopt this suggestion. Another commentator pointed out
that the examples illustrating the business judgment rule more
accurately describe a high value service or intangible property, rather
than a covered service. The Treasury Department and the IRS agree that
some of the examples in the temporary regulations could be read as
describing transfers of intangible property rather than provisions of
services involving the intangible property. Some examples have been
edited to improve clarity, including to ensure that they cannot be read
as describing transfers of intangible property.
Commentators also raised questions concerning how to evidence the
necessary business judgment; for example, whether an executive's
representation must be preferred to the tax director's. The business
judgment rule is applied on a case-by-case basis and takes into account
the taxpayer's facts and circumstances.
One other commentator requested that the business judgment rule
take into account whether a particular activity, such as that of a
corporate tax department, contributes to the operating profit (as
defined in Sec. 1.482-5(d)(3)) of one or more controlled parties.
Notice 2007-5 provided several clarifications to the business judgment
rule, including a clarification that the business judgment rule should
take into account whether a particular activity contributes to the
operating profit of one or more controlled parties. After further
consideration, the Treasury Department and the IRS decided not to add
an operating profit consideration to the business judgment rule because
the operating profit concept is broader than the intended rule and
because it would implicitly require taxpayers to do the type of
economic analysis (and create the attendant administrative burden for
taxpayers) that the business judgment rule is intended to eliminate.
The Treasury Department and the IRS continue to believe, however,
that the conclusion in Notice 2007-5 is correct--that activities such
as back office tax services should not fail the business judgment rule
because they may affect net income by reducing domestic or foreign
income taxes. Depending on the facts and circumstances, tax services
may or may not satisfy the business judgment rule.
f. Reorganization of the SCM
Section 1.482-9T(b) of the 2006 temporary regulations contains
several requirements, all of which have to be satisfied in order for
the SCM to be applicable. In other words, the requirements under Sec.
1.482-9T(b) are conjunctive; failure to satisfy one of the requirements
renders a service ineligible for SCM treatment regardless of whether
any of the other requirements is satisfied. The Treasury Department and
the IRS are aware that the rules under Sec. 1.482-9T(b) have been
misinterpreted as disjunctive such that satisfaction of only one of the
requirements renders a service eligible for the SCM. This view is
unsupported by the plain language of Sec. 1.482-9T(b). To improve
clarity, the requirements for the SCM are reorganized in the final
regulations. Section Sec. 1.482-9(b)(2) lists the conditions necessary
for a service to be eligible for the SCM and provides a cross-reference
to the paragraph in Sec. 1.482-9(b) that corresponds to each
condition. In summary, to be eligible for the SCM, a service must be a
covered service, the service cannot be an excluded activity, the
service cannot be precluded from constituting a covered service by
reason of the business judgment rule, and adequate books and records
must be maintained with respect to the service. The
[[Page 38833]]
reorganization does not substantively change the SCM rules.
Modifications have also been made to the list of excluded
activities to harmonize it with Rev. Proc. 2007-13. In particular,
instead of referring to ``excluded transactions,'' the regulations now
refer to ``excluded activities.''
g. Shared Services Arrangements
In general, commentators supported the shared services arrangement
(SSA) provision in the 2006 temporary regulations as a useful mechanism
for allocation of costs from shared or centralized services.
Commentators called into question, however, the restriction of SSAs to
covered services priced under the SCM. In response, Notice 2007-5
provided that a SSA may be used for controlled services transactions
outside of the SCM context. Specifically, Notice 2007-5 states: ``This
Notice confirms that taxpayers may also make allocations of arm's
length charges for services ineligible for the SCM that yield a benefit
to multiple members of a controlled group. In such a case, however, the
flexible rules under the SCM for establishing the joint benefits and
selecting the allocation key are inapplicable. Instead, the more robust
analysis under the general transfer pricing rules applies for purposes
of determining the appropriate arm's length charges, benefits,
allocation keys, etc.'' The Treasury Department and the IRS considered
providing additional SSA rules to services priced under methods other
than the SCM, but concluded that such rules would be unnecessary. In
any event, as stated in Notice 2007-5, the flexible SSA rules for
establishing the joint benefits and selecting the allocation key are
inapplicable in the non-SCM context.
Other commentators requested that a SSA should be respected even if
a party that reasonably anticipates a benefit makes a payment
equivalent to its share under an SSA to the service provider pursuant
to a different arrangement. For example, assume that a controlled
service provider performs services to ten taxpayers that are members of
its controlled group. Assume further that nine of the service
recipients agree in a single written contract to allocate the arm's
length charge based on a reasonable allocation basis, but the tenth
service recipient pays for its share of the services pursuant to a
separate agreement. These comments were not adopted because whether an
agreement constitutes a SSA requires a case-by-case determination based
on the facts and circumstances.
Some commentators observed that the SSA rules require the
allocation of costs on the basis that ``most reliably reflects'' the
participants' respective shares of reasonably anticipated benefits, but
some of the examples use the phrase ``precisely known.'' This led the
commentators to question whether the SSA rules create an unattainable
standard or, at least, a higher standard than the reasonable standard
for allocation of costs described in Treas. Reg. Sec. 1.482-9T(k) and
to suggest a change to the examples. The examples do not create a
standard based on precisely known shares of reasonably anticipated
benefits. Rather, the examples use hypothetical, precisely known
reasonably anticipated benefits as a measuring stick to provide an
easily understood comparative analysis of potential allocation keys for
illustrative purposes. The suggested changes are not adopted.
2. Comparable Uncontrolled Services Price Method--Treas. Reg. Sec.
1.482-9(c)
The comparable uncontrolled services price (CUSP) method evaluates
whether the consideration in a controlled services transaction is arm's
length by comparison to the price charged in a comparable uncontrolled
services transaction. This method is closely analogous to the
comparable uncontrolled price (CUP) method in Sec. 1.482-3(b).
One commentator objected to the statement in the second sentence of
Sec. 1.482-9T(c)(1) of the 2006 temporary regulations that, to be
evaluated under the CUSP method, a controlled service ordinarily must
be ``identical to or have a high degree of similarity'' to the
uncontrolled comparable transactions. The commentator claimed that such
language creates a higher standard for determining the best method than
in the rest of the section 482 regulations. For example, both Sec.
1.482-1(c)(1) and Sec. 1.482-9T(c)(2)(i) refer to the ``most reliable
measure of an arm's length result'' standard. The sentence in question
was intended merely as a guide to when the CUSP method is applicable.
It was not intended to change the standard under the best method rule.
To avoid further confusion, the sentence is removed, but without
effecting a substantive change.
The CUSP method in these final regulations is substantially similar
to the corresponding method in the 2006 temporary regulations.
3. Cost of Services Plus Method--Treas. Reg. Sec. 1.482-9(e)
The cost of services plus method is generally analogous to the cost
plus method for transfers of tangible property in existing Sec. 1.482-
3(d). The cost of services plus method evaluates whether the amount
charged in a controlled services transaction is arm's length by
reference to the gross services profit markup realized in comparable
uncontrolled transactions. Section 1.482-9T(e)(3)(ii)(A) provides that,
if the appropriate gross services profit markup is derived from
comparable uncontrolled services transactions of other service
providers, then, in evaluating comparability, the controlled taxpayer
must consider the results under this method expressed as a markup on
total services costs of the controlled taxpayer because functional
differences may be reflected in differences in service costs other than
those included in comparable transactional costs.
One commentator objected to the required consideration of the
results of the cost of services plus method expressed as a markup on
total services costs of the controlled taxpayer when external
comparables are utilized. In the commentator's view, this rule requires
a confirming analysis under a comparable profits method (CPM) and,
therefore, places an undue burden on the taxpayer. The same commentator
also expressed the concern that the rule would create an even greater
burden by requiring two sets of external comparables for application of
the two methods.
These comments are not adopted for several reasons. First, the
restatement of the price does not require researching two sets of
external comparables under two different methods. The sole purpose of
the calculation is to determine whether it is necessary to perform
additional evaluation of functional comparability under the cost of
services plus method. That is, if the price indicates a markup on the
renderer's total services cost that is either low or negative when
restated, this may indicate differences in functions that have not been
accounted for under the traditional comparability factors under the
cost of services plus method. Thus, a low or negative markup merely
suggests the need for additional inquiry, which may lead to a
determination that the cost of services plus method is not the most
reliable measure of an arm's length result under the best method rule.
The cost of services plus method is adopted in the final
regulations without change.
4. Profit Split Method--Treas. Reg. Sec. Sec. 1.482-9(g) and 1.482-
6(c)(3)(i)(B)
The final regulations provide additional guidance concerning
application of the comparable profit
[[Page 38834]]
split and the residual profit split methods to controlled services
transactions in Sec. 1.482-9(g) and Sec. 1.482-6(c)(3)(i)(B).
Generally, the comparable profit split and the residual profit split
methods evaluate whether the allocation of the combined operating
profit or loss attributable to one or more controlled transactions is
arm's length by reference to the relative value of each controlled
taxpayer's contributions to the combined operating profit or loss.
The Treasury Department and the IRS received several comments on
the profit split method. One commentator requested that Sec. 1.482-
8T(b), Example 12 of the 2006 temporary regulations explain why the
profit split method is preferable to using the financial results of a
set of publicly-traded companies engaged in selling merchandise and
related promotion and marketing activities. Example 12 is revised in
the final regulations to address this comment.
Another commentator argued that the profit split method should not
apply to a party that does not own valuable intangible property or does
not use any such property in the related party transaction being
evaluated. The commentator noted that other parts of the regulations,
such as the CPM, CUSP method, and costs of services plus method
reference valuable intangible property in the examples. The same
commentator asserted that the profit split method should be limited to
parties that bear substantial risk in their intercompany transactions.
The Treasury Department and the IRS believe that limiting application
of the profit split method to contributions of valuable intangible
property or the bearing of risks would be inappropriate. The changes in
the 2006 temporary regulations to routine and non-routine contributions
is an appropriate standard and conformed to the changes to Sec. 1.482-
6T(c)(3)(i)(B)(1), which defines a nonroutine contribution as ``a
contribution that is not accounted for as a routine contribution.'' In
other words, a nonroutine contribution is one for which the return
cannot be determined by reference to market benchmarks.
The 2006 temporary regulations provide that the residual profit
split method ordinarily is used where multiple controlled taxpayers
make significant nonroutine contributions. A commentator requested that
this provision be removed because it suggests that the method always
applies where there are no market benchmarks. The provision regarding
the residual profit split method that the commentator requested be
removed has been changed to conform to language in the cost sharing
regulations. Accordingly, Sec. 1.482-9(g)(1) provides that the
residual profit split method may not be used where only one controlled
taxpayer makes significant nonroutine contributions. The commentator
also claimed that the residual profit split method contains an
inconsistency because, although the method applies when there are no
market benchmarks, the method includes a market benchmark analysis for
comparability purposes. Compare Sec. Sec. 1.482-9(g)(1) and 1.482-
6(c)(3)(i)(B)(2). The Treasury Department and the IRS do not consider
that there is an inconsistency. The method contemplates the use of
market benchmarks, if available, to determine the profit split that
will be applied to the return to nonroutine contributions already
determined under the method. The same commentator requested that the
sentence in Sec. 1.482-6T(c)(2)(ii)(B) of the 2006 temporary
regulations relating to the comparable profit split method that states
that ``the comparable profit split method may not be used if the
combined operating profit (as a percentage of the combined assets) of
the uncontrolled comparables varies significantly from that earned by
the controlled taxpayers'' should be deleted. These comments are not
adopted, since the stated condition is fundamental to comparability
under the method.
5. Contingent Payments--Treas. Reg. Sec. 1.482-9(i)
The 2006 temporary regulations provide detailed guidance concerning
contingent-payment contractual terms. The rules built on the principle
that, in structuring controlled transactions, taxpayers are free to
choose from among a wide range of risk allocations. The provision
acknowledged that contingent-payment terms--terms requiring
compensation to be paid only if specified results are obtained--may be
particularly relevant in the context of controlled services
transactions.
Commentators raised several concerns about the substance and scope
of this provision. One commentator said that the regulations do not
address whether a taxpayer may, in the absence of a written agreement,
present facts to demonstrate that a contingent payment arrangement best
reflects the economic substance of the underlying transactions. The
Treasury Department and the IRS do not agree that an arrangement may be
treated as a contingent payment arrangement under Sec. 1.482-9(i)(2)
if the arrangement does not satisfy the requirements of the contingent
payment arrangement provision, including the written contract
requirement. However, where the Commissioner exercises its authority
pursuant to Sec. 1.482-1(d)(3)(ii)(B) to impute contractual terms, the
taxpayer may present additional facts to indicate if an alternative
agreement best reflects the economic substance of the underlying
transaction, consistent with the parties' course of conduct in a
particular case. See Sec. 1.482-1(d)(3)(ii)(C), Examples 4 and 6.
The same commentator also pointed out that the requirement to
evaluate whether a specified contingency bears a direct relationship to
the controlled services transaction based on all of the facts and
circumstances should be combined with the specified contingency
requirement. The Treasury Department and the IRS agree that the
language in Sec. 1.482-9(i)(2) should be clarified. Accordingly, the
regulations remove the last sentence in Sec. 1.482-9T(i)(2)(i)(C) of
the 2006 temporary regulations relating to a specified contingency and
combine it with the requirement under Sec. 1.482-9T(i)(2)(i)(B). Thus,
Sec. 1.482-9(i)(2)(i)(B) now requires that the contract state that
payment for a controlled services transaction is contingent (in whole
or in part) upon the happening of a future benefit (within the meaning
of Sec. 1.482-9(l)(3)) for the recipient directly related to the
activity or group of activities. For this purpose, whether the future
benefit is directly related to the activity or group of activities is
evaluated based on all the facts and circumstances.
6. Total Services Costs--Treas. Reg. Sec. 1.482-9(j)
In the 2006 temporary regulations, total services costs include all
costs directly identified with provision of the controlled services, as
well as all other costs reasonably allocable to such services under
Sec. 1.482-9(k). ``Costs'' must reflect all resources expended, used,
or made available to render the service. Generally accepted accounting
principles (GAAP) or Federal income tax accounting rules may provide an
appropriate starting point, but neither would necessarily be conclusive
in evaluating whether an item must be included in total services costs.
Another commentator requested that value added costs (that is,
labor costs and depreciation) should be distinguished from total
services costs. The commentator stated that a markup on value added
costs may be more reliable than a markup on total costs in certain
instances and that this could be a useful measure for any of the
transfer pricing methods, including the cost of services plus method.
The regulations already provide flexibility in the context of the cost
of services plus method,
[[Page 38835]]
which is determined by reference to comparable transactional costs, the
comparable profits method, and unspecified methods. Consequently, the
comment is not adopted. The definition of total services costs in these
regulations is, thus, similar to the provisions in the 2006 temporary
regulations.
Section 1.482-9T(j) of the 2006 temporary regulations explicitly
states that total services costs include stock-based compensation, and
Examples 3 through 6 of Sec. 1.482-9T(f)(3) illustrate when stock-
based compensation constitutes a material difference requiring
adjustments for comparability and reliability purposes. Commentators
requested further guidance regarding the valuation, comparability, and
reliability considerations for stock-based compensation. Other
commentators objected to the explicit statement that stock-based
compensation can be a total services cost. These final regulations do
not provide further guidance regarding stock-based compensation. The
Treasury Department and the IRS continue to consider technical issues
involving stock-based compensation in the services and other contexts
and intend to address those issues in a subsequent guidance project.
7. Controlled Services Transactions and Shareholder Activities--Treas.
Reg. Sec. 1.482-9(l)
Section 1.482-9(l) sets forth a threshold test for determining
whether an activity constitutes a controlled services transaction
subject to the general framework of Sec. 1.482-9. Section 1.482-
9(l)(3) provides rules for determining whether an activity provides a
benefit. Paragraphs (l)(3)(ii) through (v) provide guidelines that
indicate the presence or absence of a benefit. Section 1.482-
9T(l)(3)(iv) of the 2006 temporary regulations provides that an
activity is a shareholder activity if the sole effect of that activity
is either to protect the renderer's capital investment in the recipient
or in other members of the controlled group, or to facilitate
compliance by the renderer with reporting, legal, or regulatory
requirements applicable specifically to the renderer, or both.
The Treasury Department and the IRS received comments on
shareholder activities. Some commentators asserted that the ``sole
effect'' language is too restrictive and that the language should be
replaced by a ``primary effect'' standard. Other commentators argued
that the language appropriately encompasses shareholder activities.
Another commentator requested a change to the regulations such that a
shareholder activity should be considered to have a sole effect only if
the benefits provided to the other controlled group members are either
(i) indirect or remote or (ii) duplicative.
The Treasury Department and the IRS believe that the ``sole
effect'' language is appropriate. The ``primary effect'' language in
the 2003 proposed regulations could inappropriately include activities
that are not true shareholder activities and may even consist of
substantial activities that are non-shareholder activities. An activity
that is described in Sec. 1.482-9(l)(3)(ii) through (iv) does not
produce a benefit, but the mere fact that an activity is not described
in Sec. 1.482-9(l)(3)(ii) through (iv) does not mean that the activity
necessarily provides a benefit. An activity not described in Sec.
1.482-9(l)(3)(ii) through (iv) provides a benefit only if it satisfies
the incremental value standard of Sec. 1.482-9(l)(3)(i). Furthermore,
for that purpose, it may be more reliable, depending on the facts and
circumstances, to measure incremental value on a functional aggregate
activity, rather than a component activity-by-activity basis.
8. Third Party Costs--Treas. Reg. Sec. 1.482-9(l)(4)
Under Sec. 1.482-9T(l)(4) of the 2006 temporary regulations, a
controlled services transaction may be analyzed as a single transaction
or as two separate transactions depending on which approach provides
the most reliable measure of the arm's length result under the best
method rule in existing Sec. 1.482-1(c). Two examples are provided
illustrating different alternatives when a controlled services
transaction included expenses related to a third-party contract (third
party costs) with a controlled taxpayer. In both examples, third party
costs that could be reliably disaggregated could be charged at cost.
Commentators requested that all third party costs be treated as ``pass
through'' items that are not subject to a markup applicable to costs
incurred by the renderer in its capacity as service provider.
The Treasury Department and the IRS continue to maintain the view
that whether to consider ``pass through'' items as disaggregated from,
or aggregated with, other functions and costs, depends on which
analysis most reliably reflects an arm's length result. Therefore, the
rules of Sec. 1.482-9(l)(4) are adopted without change.
9. Coordination With Other Transfer Pricing Rules--Treas. Reg. Sec.
1.482-9(m) and Guarantees
Section 1.482-9(m) provides coordination rules applicable to a
controlled services transaction that is combined with, or includes
elements of, a non-services transaction. These coordination rules rely
on the best method rule in existing Sec. 1.482-1(c)(1) to determine
which method or methods would provide the most reliable measure of an
arm's length result for a particular controlled transaction.
a. Services Subject to a Qualified Cost Sharing Arrangement--Treas.
Reg. Sec. 1.482-9(m)(3)
Section 1.482-9T(m)(3) of the 2006 temporary regulations states
that services provided by a controlled participant under a qualified
cost sharing arrangement are subject to existing Sec. 1.482-7. As part
of the temporary cost sharing regulations (TD 9441, 2009-7 I.R.B. 460,
74 FR 340) published on January 5, 2009, the Treasury Department and
the IRS replaced the coordination rules with new Sec. 1.482-9T(m)(3).
Section 1.482-9(m)(3) is reserved pending finalization of the cost
sharing regulations.
b. Global Dealing Operations
The Treasury Department and the IRS are working on new global
dealing regulations. The intent of the Treasury Department and the IRS
is that, when final global dealing regulations are issued, those
regulations will govern the evaluation of the activities performed by a
global dealing operation. Pending the issuance of new global dealing
regulations, taxpayers may rely on the proposed global dealing
regulations to govern financial transactions entered into in connection
with a global dealing operation as defined in proposed Sec. 1.482-8.
Thus, the cross-reference under proposed Sec. 1.482-9(m)(6) (71 FR
44247), which provides that a controlled services transaction does not
include a financial transaction entered into in connection with a
global dealing operation as defined in proposed Sec. 1.482-8, remains
in proposed form. Section 1.482-9(m)(6) in these final regulations is
reserved pending issuance of global dealing regulations.
c. Guarantees, Including Financial Guarantees
Financial transactions, including guarantees, are explicitly
excluded from eligibility for the SCM by Sec. 1.482-9(b)(4)(viii).
However, no inference is intended that financial transactions
(including guarantees) would otherwise be considered the provision of
services
[[Page 38836]]
for transfer pricing purposes. The Treasury Department and the IRS
intend to issue future guidance regarding financial guarantees.
B. Income Attributable to Intangible Property--Treas. Reg. Sec. 1.482-
4(f)(3) and (4)
Paragraphs (3) and (4) of Sec. 1.482-4(f) provide rules for
determining the owner of intangible property for purposes of section
482 and also provide rules for determining the arm's length
compensation in situations where a controlled party other than the
owner makes contributions to the value of intangible property. Section
1.482-4(f)(3)(i)(A) provides that the legal owner of intangible
property pursuant to the intellectual property law of the relevant
jurisdiction, or the holder of rights constituting intangible property
pursuant to contractual terms (such as the terms of a license) or other
legal provision, will be considered the sole owner of intangible
property for purposes of this section unless such ownership is
inconsistent with the economic substance of the underlying
transactions. Some commentators believe that the rules should specify
that a holder of bare legal title to intangible property should not be
presumed to be the owner when other parties have all of the other
benefits and burdens of ownership. After considering the public
comments, the Treasury Department and the IRS continue to believe that
the legal ownership standard as set forth in Sec. 1.482-4(f)(3)(i)(A)
is the appropriate framework for determining ownership of intangible
property under section 482.
The provisions of Sec. 1.482-4(f)(3) and (4) are adopted without
change.
C. Economic Substance
A number of commentators expressed similar and sometimes
interrelated concerns regarding economic substance considerations,
imputation of contractual terms, the realistic alternatives principle,
and the rules for income attributable to intangible property. The
common thread running through these comments is a concern that the IRS
will inappropriately treat taxpayers as having engaged in transactions
different from those in which they actually engaged.
Section 1.482-4(f)(3)(i)(A) provides that, if no owner of
intangible property is identified under the intellectual property law
of the relevant jurisdiction, or pursuant to contractual terms
(including terms imputed pursuant to Sec. 1.482-1(d)(3)(ii)(B)) or
other legal provision, then the controlled taxpayer that has control of
intangible property, based on all the facts and circumstances, will be
considered the sole owner of intangible property for purposes of this
section. One commentator believes that the control rule for determining
ownership of non-legally protected intangibles allows the IRS to
attribute ownership of intangible property in a manner that is
inconsistent with economic substance. Accordingly, the comment suggests
that such control determinations must be consistent with economic
substance in all cases. In the context of the control rule in Sec.
1.482-4(f)(3)(i)(A), this is already reflected in the language
``including terms imputed pursuant to Sec. 1.482-1(d)(3)(ii)(B).''
Section 1.482-9T(h) of the 2006 temporary regulations provides
that, consistent with the specified methods, an unspecified method
should take into account the general principle that uncontrolled
taxpayers compare the terms of a particular transaction to the
realistic alternatives to that transaction, including economically
similar transactions structured as other than services transactions,
and only enter into a transaction if none of the alternatives is
preferable to it. The realistic alternatives concept was imported from
Sec. 1.482-1(f)(2)(ii) to be consistent with the general aim to
coordinate the analyses under the various sections of the regulations
under section 482. This provision allows flexibility to consider non-
services alternatives to a services transaction, for example, a
transfer or license of intangible property, if such an approach
provides the most reliable measure of an arm's length result.
Commentators suggested that the realistic alternative principle be
clarified so that only transactions actually engaged in by the
controlled taxpayer can constitute realistic alternatives or that the
principle be removed altogether on the grounds that it inappropriately
treats taxpayers as engaging in transactions other than those they
chose. The Treasury Department and the IRS do not agree with the
assertion that consideration of realistic alternatives improperly
disregards a taxpayer's chosen arrangement and that the realistic
alternative principle is limited to internal comparables. It is a
longstanding principle under Sec. 1.482-1(f)(2)(ii)(A) and in the
valuation field, generally, that, although the Commissioner will
evaluate the results of a transaction as actually structured by the
taxpayer unless it lacks economic substance, the Commissioner may
consider alternatives available in determining the arm's length
valuation of the controlled transaction. The realistic alternatives
principle does not recast the transaction. Rather, it assumes that
taxpayers are rational and will not choose to price an arrangement in a
manner that makes them worse off economically than another available
alternative. Thus, if the price associated with a realistic alternative
appears preferable in comparison with the price associated with the
chosen arrangement, the logical implication is that the actual
arrangement has been priced incorrectly through a flawed application of
the best method rule. This is further reflected in the example in Sec.
1.482-9T(h), which illustrates when realistic alternatives may be
considered to evaluate the arm's length consideration, and explicitly
states that the best method rule of Sec. 1.482-1(c) governs the
analysis.
The unspecified method provisions in these final regulations are
adopted without change.
Section 1.482-9(i)(3) provides that, consistent with the authority
in Sec. 1.482-1(d)(3)(ii)(B), the Commissioner may impute contingent-
payment contractual terms in a controlled services transaction if the
economic substance of the transaction is consistent with the existence
of such terms. When the 2003 proposed regulations were issued,
commentators expressed concerns with the rule for imputing contingent
payment terms to the extent that it permits the IRS to recast
arrangements if there is a disagreement about the pricing of a service.
The temporary regulations responded to this concern by providing a new
Example 5 in Sec. 1.482-1T(d)(3)(ii)(C) to illustrate that if a
taxpayer's pricing is outside of the arm's length range, that fact
alone would not support imputation of additional contractual terms
based on economic substance grounds. Commentators responded, however,
that the last sentence of Example 5 perpetuated the same problem of
allowing the IRS to recast arrangements if there were pricing disputes
between a taxpayer and the IRS.
The Treasury Department and the IRS agree that the last sentence of
Example 5 in Sec. 1.482-1T(d)(3)(ii)(C) did not clearly convey its
intended meaning, which is that a transfer pricing method and the price
derived from the application of that method do not inform the terms of
the transaction or the risks borne by the entities. Rather, the
selection and application of a transfer pricing method should be based
on a comparability analysis of the transaction, which must consider the
risks borne by each entity in the transaction. Thus, the last sentence
in Sec. 1.482-1T(d)(3)(ii)(C) Example 5,
[[Page 38837]]
paragraph (iv), was intended to explain that the IRS is not required to
accept the transfer pricing method and form of payment terms of a
transaction as represented by a taxpayer if they are inconsistent with
the conduct of the entities and the economic substance of the
transaction. Because this sentence caused confusion, it has been
removed. However, the Treasury Department and the IRS affirm that the
IRS may impute contingent-payment terms where the economic substance of
the transaction is consistent with the existence of such terms.
D. Stewardship Expenses--Sec. 1.861-8
The regulations under Sec. 1.861-8(e)(4) conform to, and are
consistent with, the language relating to controlled services
transactions as set forth in Sec. 1.482-9(l). The regulations under
Sec. 1.861-8(e)(4) are applicable for taxable years beginning after
December 31, 2006.
E. Effective/Applicability Date--Sec. 1.482-9(n)
These regulations are applicable for taxable years beginning after
July 31, 2009. Controlled taxpayers may elect to apply retroactively
all of the provisions of these regulations to any taxable year
beginning after September 10, 2003. Such election will be effective for
the year of the election and all subsequent taxable years.
Special Analyses
It has been determined that this Treasury decision is not a
significant regulatory action as defined in Executive Order 12866.
Therefore, a regulatory assessment is not required. It also has been
determined that section 553(b) of the Administrative Procedure Act (5
U.S.C. chapter 5) does not apply to this regulation. It is hereby
certified that the collections of information in this regulation will
not have a significant economic impact on a substantial number of small
entities. This certification is based on the fact that the collections
of information are related to elective provisions for determining
taxable income that simplify and reduce compliance burdens in
connection with controlled services transactions. When collection of
information is required, it is expected to take taxpayers approximately
2 hours to comply, and the administrative and economic costs will be
nominal in comparison with the resulting simplification and reduction
of compliance burdens. Thus, the economic impact of the collections of
information will not be significant. Similarly, while some small
entities may be subject to the collections of information if they elect
one of the provisions, the collections of information are not expected
to affect a substantial number of small entities. Accordingly, a
regulatory flexibility analysis under the Regulatory Flexibility Act (5
U.S.C. chapter 6) is not required. Pursuant to section 7805(f) of the
Internal Revenue Code, the notice of proposed rulemaking preceding
these regulations was submitted to the Small Business Administration
for comment on its impact on small business.
Drafting Information
The principal authors of these regulations are Carol B. Tan and
Gregory A. Spring, Office of Associate Chief Counsel (International)
for matters relating to section 482, and Richard L. Chewning, Office of
Associate Chief Counsel (International) for matters relating to
stewardship expenses.
List of Subjects
26 CFR Part 1
Income taxes, Reporting and recordkeeping requirements.
26 CFR Part 31
Employment taxes, Income taxes, Penalties, Pensions, Railroad
retirement, Reporting and recordkeeping requirements, Social Security
and Unemployment compensation.
26 CFR Part 602
Reporting and recordkeeping requirements.
Adoption of Amendments to the Regulations
0
Accordingly, 26 CFR parts 1, 31, and 602 are amended as follows:
PART 1--INCOME TAXES
0
Paragraph 1. The authority citation for part 1 is amended by adding an
entry in numerical order to read in part as follows:
Authority: 26 U.S.C. 7805 * * *.
Section 1.482-9 also issued under 26 U.S.C. 482. * * *
0
Par. 2. Section 1.482-0 is amended as follows:
0
1. The introductory text is revised.
0
2. The entries for Sec. 1.482-1(a)(1), (d)(3)(ii)(C), (d)(3)(v),
(f)(2)(ii)(A), (f)(2)(iii)(B), (g)(4)(iii), (i) and (j) are revised.
0
3. The entries for Sec. 1.482-2(b), (e) and (f) are revised.
0
4. The entries for Sec. 1.482-4(f)(3), (f)(4), (g), and (h) are
revised.
0
5. The entry for Sec. 1.482-4(f)(7) is removed.
0
6. The entries for Sec. 1.482-6(c)(2)(ii)(B)(1), (c)(2)(ii)(D),
(c)(3)(i)(A), (c)(3)(i)(B), (c)(3)(ii)(D), and (d) are revised
0
7. The entry for Sec. 1.482-8(c) is added.
0
8. The entries for Sec. 1.482-9 are revised.
The addition and revisions read as follows:
Sec. 1.482-0 Outline of regulations under section 482.
This section contains major captions for Sec. Sec. 1.482-1 through
1.482-9.
Sec. 1.482-1 Allocation of income and deductions among taxpayers.
(a) * * *
(1) Purpose and scope.
* * * * *
(d) * * *
(3) * * *
(ii) * * *
(C) Examples.
* * * * *
(v) Property or services.
* * * * *
(f) * * *
(2) * * *
(ii) * * *
(A) In general.
* * * * *
(iii) * * *
(A) * * *
(B) Circumstances warranting consideration of multiple year data.
* * * * *
(g) * * *
(4) * * *
(iii) Examples.
* * * * *
(i) Definitions.
(j) Effective/applicability date.
Sec. 1.482-2 Determination of taxable income in specific situations.
* * * * *
(b) Rendering of services.
* * * * *
(e) [Reserved]. For further guidance, see Sec. 1.482-0T, the entry
for Sec. 1.482-2T(e).
(f) Effective/applicability date.
* * * * *
Sec. 1.482-4 Methods to determine taxable income in connection with a
transfer of intangible property.
* * * * *
(f) * * *
(3) Ownership of intangible property.
(i) Identification of owner.
(A) In general.
(B) [Reserved]. For further guidance, see Sec. 1.482-0T, the entry
for Sec. 1.482-4T(f)(3)(i)(B).
(ii) Examples.
(4) Contribution to the value of intangible property owned by
another.
(i) In general.
[[Page 38838]]
(ii) Examples.
* * * * *
(g) [Reserved]. For further guidance, see Sec. 1.482-0T, the entry
for Sec. 1.482-4T(g).
(h) Effective/applicability date.
* * * * *
Sec. 1.482-6 Profit split method.
* * * * *
(c) * * *
(2) * * *
(ii) * * *
(B) * * *.
(1) In general.
* * * * *
(D) Other factors affecting reliability.
* * * * *
(3) * * *
(i) * * *
(A) Allocate income to routine contributions.
(B) Allocate residual profit.
(1) Nonroutine contributions generally.
(2) Nonroutine contributions of intangible property.
(ii) * * *
(D) Other factors affecting reliability.
* * * * *
(d) Effective/applicability date.
Sec. 1.482-8 Examples of the best method rule.
* * * * *
(c) Effective/applicability date.
Sec. 1.482-9 Methods to determine taxable income in connection with
a controlled services transaction.
(a) In general.
(b) Services cost method.
(1) In general.
(2) Eligibility for the services cost method.
(3) Covered services.
(i) Specified covered services.
(ii) Low margin covered services.
(4) Excluded activities.
(5) Not services that contribute significantly to fundamental risks
of business success or failure.
(6) Adequate books and records.
(7) Shared services arrangement.
(i) In general.
(ii) Requirements for shared services arrangement.
(A) Eligibility.
(B) Allocation.
(C) Documentation.
(iii) Definitions and special rules.
(A) Participant.
(B) Aggregation.
(C) Coordination with cost sharing arrangements.
(8) Examples.
(c) Comparable uncontrolled services price method.
(1) In general.
(2) Comparability and reliability considerations.
(i) In general.
(ii) Comparability.
(A) In general.
(B) Adjustments for differences between controlled and uncontrolled
transactions.
(iii) Data and assumptions.
(3) Arm's length range.
(4) Examples.
(5) Indirect evidence of the price of a comparable uncontrolled
services transaction.
(i) In general.
(ii) Example.
(d) Gross services margin method.
(1) In general.
(2) Determination of arm's length price.
(i) In general.
(ii) Relevant uncontrolled transaction.
(iii) Applicable uncontrolled price.
(iv) Appropriate gross services profit.
(v) Arm's length range.
(3) Comparability and reliability considerations.
(i) In general.
(ii) Comparability.
(A) Functional comparability.
(B) Other comparability factors.
(C) Adjustments for differences between controlled and uncontrolled
transactions.
(D) Buy-sell distributor.
(iii) Data and assumptions.
(A) In general.
(B) Consistency in accounting.
(4) Examples.
(e) Cost of services plus method.
(1) In general.
(2) Determination of arm's length price.
(i) In general.
(ii) Appropriate gross services profit.
(iii) Comparable transactional costs.
(iv) Arm's length range.
(3) Comparability and reliability considerations.
(i) In general.
(ii) Comparability.
(A) Functional comparability.
(B) Other comparability factors.
(C) Adjustments for differences between the controlled and
uncontrolled transactions.
(iii) Data and assumptions.
(A) In general.
(B) Consistency in accounting.
(4) Examples.
(f) Comparable profits method.
(1) In general.
(2) Determination of arm's length result.
(i) Tested party.
(ii) Profit level indicators.
(iii) Comparability and reliability considerations--Data and
assumptions--Consistency
in accounting.
(3) Examples.
(g) Profit split method.
(1) In general.
(2) Examples.
(h) Unspecified methods.
(i) Contingent-payment contractual terms for services.
(1) Contingent-payment contractual terms recognized in general.
(2) Contingent-payment arrangement.
(i) General requirements.
(A) Written contract.
(B) Specified contingency.
(C) Basis for payment.
(ii) Economic substance and conduct.
(3) Commissioner's authority to impute contingent-payment terms.
(4) Evaluation of arm's length charge.
(5) Examples.
(j) Total services costs.
(k) Allocation of costs.
(1) In general.
(2) Appropriate method of allocation and apportionment.
(i) Reasonable method standard.
(ii) Use of general practices.
(3) Examples.
(l) Controlled services transaction.
(1) In general.
(2) Activity.
(3) Benefit.
(i) In general.
(ii) Indirect or remote benefit.
(iii) Duplicative activities.
(iv) Shareholder activities.
(v) Passive association.
(4) Disaggregation of transactions.
(5) Examples.
(m) Coordination with transfer pricing rules for other
transactions.
(1) Services transactions that include other types of transactions.
(2) Services transactions that effect a transfer of intangible
property.
(3) [Reserved]. For further guidance, see Sec. 1.482-0T, the entry
for Sec. 1.482-9T(m)(3).
(4) Other types of transactions that include controlled services
transactions.
(5) Examples.
(n) Effective/applicability date.
(1) In general.
(2) Election to apply regulations to earlier taxable years.
0
Par. 3. Section 1.482-0T is amended as follows:
0
1. Revise the section heading and introductory text.
0
2. Revise the section headings for Sec. Sec. 1.482-1T, 1.482-4T and
1.482.9T and the entries for Sec. Sec. 1.482-1T, 1.482-2T, 1.482-4T
and 1.482.9T.
0
3. Remove the entries for Sec. 1.482-6T.
The revisions read as follows:
Sec. 1.482-0T Outline of regulations under section 482 (temporary).
This section contains major captions for Sec. Sec. 1.482-1T,
1.482-2T, 1.482-4T, 1.482-7T, 1.482-8T, and 1.482-9T.
[[Page 38839]]
Sec. 1.482-1T Allocation of income and deductions among taxpayers
(temporary).
(a) through (b)(2) [Reserved]. For further guidance,